CN110881079A

CN110881079A - Method for switching multiple resources in parallel in flat interaction hierarchy and electronic equipment

Info

Publication number: CN110881079A
Application number: CN201910322124.4A
Authority: CN
Inventors: 张小林
Original assignee: Shanghai Co Technology Co ltd
Current assignee: Shanghai Co Technology Co ltd
Priority date: 2018-09-06
Filing date: 2019-04-19
Publication date: 2020-03-13
Anticipated expiration: 2039-04-19
Also published as: CN110881079B; CN110401764B; CN110401589A; CN110881080A; CN110881080B; CN110401764A

Abstract

The invention discloses a method for switching multiple resources in parallel in a flat interaction level and electronic equipment, belonging to the technical field of software interface interaction, and the embodiment of the invention provides a resource providing method for the electronic equipment, wherein the electronic equipment provides multiple application programs, and the method comprises the following steps: loading one of a plurality of applications through a display of an electronic device; and responding to the switching operation of the user on the application program currently presented on the display, and switching and outputting the plurality of application programs through the display. Based on the interface resource configuration method, the interchangeability of the application programs in the electronic equipment is improved.

Description

Method for switching multiple resources in parallel in flat interaction hierarchy and electronic equipment

Technical Field

The invention relates to the technical field of interface interaction, in particular to the technical field of providing a plurality of resources through a flat interaction hierarchy of electronic equipment.

Background

The development of science and technology has enabled people to change their communication modes greatly, and the continuous emergence of smart terminal products such as smart phones and the continuous release of various applications (apps) enables people to establish communication with family, colleagues and friends anytime and anywhere without being limited by distance.

However, in real life, some users, including but not limited to the elderly and children, are difficult to adapt to the technology development of the day and the night due to the lack of capability, difficult to adapt to the upgrading and upgrading of various communication means, and unable to be skilled in using the intelligent terminal and various communication apps, so that they may not be able to well establish communication with family and friends.

This situation is more evident in the following circumstances: young children work in large cities, while parents of their own ages, young children, may remain in a hometown that is far away. Even if a child purchases a smartphone and installs various communication apps and other apps for an old person, the old person often cannot normally operate the smartphone and the various internal apps, and thus cannot effectively establish communication with family and friends.

On the other hand, the technical route of the related communication technology and the related communication application software technology also takes place through a complex evolution process of many generations.

The communication system may provide fixed line connections or wireless connections for subscribers to communicate, such as voice or data communications. An example of a fixed line system is the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN). One example of a wireless communication system is a Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN), and another example is a satellite-based mobile communication system. Wireless communication typically occurs via a radio frequency connection between a mobile station of a subscriber and at least one network element of the communication system. Communications within a network are typically, but not necessarily, handled using fixed line connections between different network elements. Communications may also be transmitted within a system that includes one or more data networks. An example of such communication is the voice over IP (internet protocol) scheme that enables voice calls over packet switched data networks.

A communication network is a cellular radio network consisting of access entities commonly referred to as cells. In most cases, a cell is defined as an area covered by one or more Base Transceiver Stations (BTSs) that serve User Equipment (UE), such as a Mobile Station (MS), via a radio interface that may be connected to a Base Station Subsystem (BSS). Several cells cover a larger area and typically form a radio coverage area known as a Location Area (LA) or in some standards as a Routing Area (RA). It should be appreciated that the size of the location area or routing area depends on the system and environment and may be equal to one cell or less, such as a portion of the coverage area of a base station. One feature of cellular systems is that it provides mobility for mobile stations, i.e., enables mobile stations to move from one location area to another, and even from one network to another that is compatible with the standards to which the mobile station is adapted.

Wireless communication is a communication method using only electromagnetic waves without cables, and mainly includes microwave communication and satellite communication. Microwave is a radio wave that travels over distances typically of the order of tens of kilometers. However, the frequency band of the microwave is wide, and the communication capacity is large. A microwave relay station is established every dozens of kilometers in microwave communication. Satellite communication is the establishment of microwave communication links between two or more earth stations or between mobile bodies on the ground using communication satellites as relay stations.

Wireless Communication (Wireless Communication) is a Communication method for exchanging information using the characteristic that an electromagnetic wave signal can propagate in a free space, and in recent years, the most developed and widely used Wireless Communication technology is in the field of information Communication. Wireless communication implemented in mobile is also commonly referred to as mobile communication, and both are collectively referred to as wireless mobile communication.

In the network system of wireless mobile communication, the network system of mobile phone for mobile user mainly includes GSM, CDMA, 3G, 4G, and since the advent of mobile phone, the mobile phone has experienced the first generation analog system mobile phone (1G), the second generation GSM, TDMA and other digital mobile phones (2G), the 2.5 generation mobile communication technology CDMA, the third generation mobile communication technology 3G, the fourth generation mobile communication technology 4G.

The Global digitization has started from GSM (Global System for Mobile Communications), which is developed on the basis of cellular systems, and belongs to the second generation digital Mobile communication System. Its advantages are more kinds of mobile communication services, high connection speed, high speech quality, high security and security, high anti-interference power and wide network coverage. In terms of the topological structure, the public mobile communication network generally adopts cellular topology, and is based on the consideration of improving the frequency spectrum utilization rate, reducing mutual interference and increasing the system capacity.

In order to realize the support from the traditional voice service to the data service, the GPRS superposes a network supporting high-speed packet data on the basis of the original GSM network, provides functions of WAP browsing (browsing Internet pages), E-mail and the like for users, promotes the first leap development of the mobile data service, and realizes the perfect combination of the mobile communication technology and the data communication technology (especially the Internet technology).

From the second generation GSM, most mobile communications are digital systems, and besides voice communications, short messages (short messages, SMS), MMS (technology) | MMS (multimedia messages ), Wireless Application Protocols (WAP), and the like can be transmitted and received.

The Short Message Service (SMS) is a part of a service plan of "converged communication", and a user directly sends or receives text or digital information through a mobile phone or other telecommunication terminals, and the number of characters that the user can receive and send a short message each time is 160 english, digital characters or 70 chinese characters.

In general, the "mobile data traffic" refers to data traffic generated by accessing the internet or using related data value-added services through mobile communication technologies such as GPRS, EDGE, TD-SCDMA, HSDPA, WCDMA, and LTE, and does not include traffic generated by accessing the internet through other methods such as WLAN and CSD.

A mobile communication network between a mobile subscriber and a mobile subscriber or between a mobile subscriber and a fixed subscriber, and a public mobile communication network and a private mobile communication network are classified by service object; and can be divided into a mobile phone network and a mobile data network according to service properties. The mobile phone network supports communication in the form of short messages and voice. Correspondingly, the terminal equipment is provided with an SMS short message interface and a voice interface, thereby accessing to a mobile telephone network, receiving and sending short messages and dialing/answering the telephone from the voice network.

In addition, the mobile terminal may be connected to the internet through the mobile data traffic based on the public mobile data network, or may be connected to the internet through a WLAN access point based on a conventional home or enterprise broadband derivation, so that various network services and programs are used, and real-time communication is one of them.

The above-mentioned WLANs are all called: wireless Local Area Networks, with a Chinese name: a wireless local area network (wlan), which is a system for data transmission by using Radio Frequency (RF) technology, and the technology is used to make up for the deficiency of wired lans, so as to achieve the purpose of network extension and realize a clear network without network wires and distance limitations. The current protocols included in WLANs are: ieee802.11b protocol, ieee802.11a protocol, ieee802.11g protocol, ieee802.11e protocol, ieee802.11i protocol, Wireless Application Protocol (WAP), etc., and WIFI (wireless fidelity) technology is a wireless network communication technology based on IEEE802.11 series standards.

For both mobile data networks and WLAN communication networks, they are referred to in the industry as wireless data transmission networks.

Instant Messaging (IM) derived from the above communication technology is a real-time communication system (generally including service and client software) that allows two or more people to use a network to transmit text messages, files, data, voice and video in real time, including ICQ, Skype, MSN, etc. before the mobile data network is not popularized, and since then, with the popularization of wireless data transmission technologies such as mobile data network, WLAN, etc. and smart phone operating systems, a great number of mobile Instant Messaging services and software, such as Wechat, etc., have appeared.

There is a need for a communication method and related device based on the above communication technology and application software technology, which can meet various potential needs of users including but not limited to the elderly and children.

Disclosure of Invention

It would be beneficial if the accessibility of multiple programs provided in an electronic device with an interaction hierarchy could be improved.

Menu interface universally suitable for switching various application interfaces

In some embodiments according to the present invention, there is also provided a resource providing method for an electronic device in which a plurality of applications are provided, the method including two steps of: a) loading at least one of a plurality of applications through a display; b) and responding to the switching operation of the user on the application program currently presented on the display, and switching and outputting the plurality of application programs through the display. Wherein, the loading of the at least one application program in the step a) can be automatically completed by the electronic device or completed in response to the operation of the display by the user. The operation of the user on the display may be a horizontal or vertical sliding gesture, or a selection operation on a menu option provided on the display. These menu options may for example be located in the bottom row of the display, see some further embodiments for a detailed description of the menu options.

It is understood that in some embodiments, the display is schematically illustrated as being integrated with the electronic device. Of course, the electronic device may not include a display. In other words, the display may not belong to the electronic device, but may be a separate display unit independent of the electronic device, such as a television, and correspondingly, the electronic device may be a signal processing apparatus, such as a set-top box, coupled to the television for displaying video. Correspondingly, the operating component of the electronic device may be a remote controller physically independent of the electronic device such as the set-top box, and may be coupled with the set-top box device in a wired or wireless manner. Of course, the electronic device such as the set-top box may be integrated with a display unit such as a television. For simplicity of description, all these variations are not individually illustrated in detail in this application, but are also applicable to the electronic device of any of the embodiments of the present application. For this reason, further description may be omitted.

Alternatively, a plurality of applications provided in the electronic device may be stored locally in the electronic device, or may be invoked remotely and loaded through the display. For an application configured locally on the electronic device, the application may be a separately issued application independent of the operating system of the electronic device; or integrated into the operating system, and its functionality is also implemented by the operating system runtime (performance).

Optionally, the plurality of application programs may include: a plurality of communication class programs such as a communication program for a first contact, a communication program for a second contact, a communication program for a first contact group, a communication program for a second contact group, and a plurality of applications such as a photo album program and a weather/time broadcast program.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the plurality of applications comprises a first application. Alternatively, the plurality of applications includes, in addition to the first application, a program for exposing a set of application identifications. And the step of "loading at least one of the plurality of applications through a display to which the electronic device is coupled" further comprises: the first application or collection item is loaded through the display, either automatically or in response to a manual operation directed to the display. Wherein the active state is entered once the first application or collection item program is currently loaded on the display.

Optionally, in some embodiments, an application management program that manages a plurality of application programs is further configured in the electronic device, and an interface of the plurality of application programs is configured as a top layer of a user interface of the application management program; the interface of the first application or the collection item is optionally configured on a first page of a top level of the application manager user interface, so that when the application manager is started, the interface of the first application or the collection item is output by default through the user interface of the application manager.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the step of "loading the first application or the collection item program through the display" further includes: preferentially loading a first application or a collection item at a top level of an application manager user interface relative to other applications in the plurality of applications; and the step of "switching output of the plurality of applications through the display" further includes any one of 4 steps of the following S1, S2, S3, S4:

s1, responding to the transverse sliding gesture aiming at the application management program user interface, and scheduling a plurality of application programs to be output through the top layer of the application management program user interface respectively;

s2, responding to the transverse sliding gesture aiming at the application management program user interface, parallelly switching a plurality of application programs through the top layer of the application management program user interface to output the application programs to the display one by one;

s3, loading the corresponding application program in the plurality of application programs in the application management program user interface according to the switching operation of the user on the plurality of application programs through the top layer of the application management program;

s4 outputs a next interface of the current program or a next program of the plurality of application programs in sequence through a top layer of the application manager user interface in response to the lateral swipe gesture with respect to the interface of the current application program.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the step of "preferentially loading the first application or the collection item at a top level of an application management program user interface" further comprises: after the electronic device is started, the first application program is preferentially loaded on the top layer of the application management program user interface. And any one of the above steps S1S 2S 3 or S4 further includes, in response to the lateral swipe gesture, loading a subsequent program of the plurality of application programs, the subsequent program including a program of the collective items.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the step of "preferentially loading the first application or the collection item at a top level of an application management program user interface" further comprises: after the electronic equipment is started, the collection item program is preferentially loaded on the top layer of the user interface of the application management program. And either of steps S1S 2S 3 or S4 further includes, in response to the lateral swipe gesture, subsequently loading the first application.

Alternatively, in the process of switching the output of the plurality of applications through the display, for example, in the process of switching from the first application to the second application or the process of assembling items in response to a switching operation of the display by the user, switching from the first application to the second application may be performed in a hysteresis manner. For example, the electronic device may need to sense that the duration of the sliding operation of the user on the display exceeds a certain threshold, such as 1 second or 2 seconds, to switch the first application to the second application. Alternatively, the switching of the current program may be started when it is sensed that the amplitude of the deviation of the current interface on the display along with the switching operation of the user exceeds a certain threshold (for example, 2cm), that is, the current program is scheduled to run in the background, and the next program is activated and loaded on the display. If the cheap amplitude does not exceed the threshold value although the current interface shifts on the display with the switching operation of the user, the output of the current program through the display is still maintained for the user to continue interacting. Therefore, unexpected switching of the application program caused by misoperation of the user is prevented.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the application manager may be set as a boot item, so that the electronic device more automatically completes the loading process of the first application program or the collection item program on the display.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the application management program is an operating system of the electronic device or a program independent of the operating system; and if the application manager is independent of the operating system, the method further comprising: the application manager is loaded through the display in response to a start operation for the application manager.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the step of "loading at least one of the plurality of applications through the display" may further include: one of the plurality of applications is loaded through the display.

Wherein the plurality of applications may include a first application; and the step of loading one of the plurality of application programs on the display further comprises: a first application of the plurality of applications is preferentially loaded via the display relative to other applications of the plurality of applications or even the operating system.

It should be noted that: in some embodiments, the first application may be loaded on the display first after the electronic device is started and before the other applications are loaded, and one of the purposes of this difference in loading order is to increase the accessibility of the first application with respect to the other applications. However, this does not mean that the interface of the first application must be the first visible interface after the electronic device has been started. For example, after the electronic device is started, the electronic device may play other media, advertisement pictures or blank interfaces through the display before the first application is loaded on the display, or load some interactive interfaces (e.g., an interactive interface with a purchase guide function), and then preferentially load the user interface of the first application automatically or in response to the user operating the display. The operation of the user on the display may be a horizontal or vertical sliding gesture, or a selection operation on a menu option optionally provided on the display. These menu options may for example be located in the bottom row of the display, see some further embodiments for a detailed description of the menu options.

It will be appreciated that in the above exemplary description, after the electronic device is booted, menu items are optionally provided through a top level operating system user interface or an application management program, such as a menu area located at the bottom of the current media interface on the display. In the electronic equipment, a first application program and a user interface thereof in a plurality of application programs are preferentially loaded to replace the interactive interface or blank interface and the like in response to the operation of a user on the interactive interface such as a media interface and the like. Or, in the electronic device, in response to the user's selection operation of the menu item in the menu area, an application program corresponding to the selected menu item is loaded on the display to replace the interactive interface or the blank interface. The plurality of application programs correspond to a plurality of menu items in a menu area respectively, and an interactive interface or a blank interface such as a media playing interface displayed in the front does not correspond to any menu item in the menu area. In addition, it should be noted that, in general, the above-mentioned media playing interface or blank interface only serves as a transitional interface or a floating layer, and does not belong to the top layer of the operating system user interface, and under such a definition for the top layer of the operating system user interface, the top layer of the operating system user interface is configured with interfaces of multiple application programs instead of the media playing interface. In other embodiments, if the above-mentioned interactive interface such as the media playing interface is regarded as at least a part of the top layer of the operating system user interface, in these embodiments, the interfaces of the plurality of applications may also be configured on the top layer of the operating system user interface in parallel with the media playing interface, in other words, the plurality of applications may be configured behind the start page program (such as the above-mentioned media playing program or the like) on the top layer of the operating system user interface (or the user interface of the application management program), or alternatively (alternatively), the interfaces of the plurality of applications may be configured as the second layer of the interaction hierarchy of the operating system user interface. Similarly, this modification applied to the user interface of the operating system is also applicable to an embodiment in which a plurality of application programs are managed by an application manager independent of the operating system, and details thereof are not described again. Accordingly, in the electronic device according to the further embodiment of this modification, in response to a switching operation of the user to the second layer of the interaction hierarchy of the operating system or the second layer of the interaction hierarchy of the application management program, the plurality of application programs are switched in parallel to be output one by one to the display through the second-layer interaction interface of the interaction hierarchy. The applicant reserves the right to divide, continue, and partially continue the design of the above-described "load menu area and/or separate pre-cursor interface (including blank interface) via display before multiple applications are output to the user interface". Further optionally, the plurality of application programs may also include a program for presenting an identification set of the plurality of applications. The item set program may be configured on top of the UI of the operating system in parallel with other programs in the plurality of applications or on top of the user interface of the application management program for the plurality of applications, and the item set program may be located on page 2 or page n (n is greater than 2) of the user interface, and thus, loaded on the display of the electronic device after the first application. If the collection item program is loaded and executed, a collection item interface aiming at a plurality of application identifications is output through the display, in other words, the display externally presents an interface comprising one or more identifications or icon collection interfaces, the identifications are respectively associated with one or more application programs, and when a user selects one of the identifications, the application associated with the selected identification is executed.

Icons of programs used at relatively low frequency, for example, can be provided on the collection item interface, so that when the electronic device is started and the individual application programs used at high frequency are loaded first, some application programs used at low frequency can still be accessible to the user through the collection item interface, so that the user can still access most of the available resources in the electronic device. Of course, the collection item program may also be optionally configured on page 1 (or called the start page) of the user interface, and the first application program is configured in the subsequent page, and the collection item program is first loaded on the display through the user interface. Subsequently, the first application program is loaded on the display in response to the switching operation of the user.

In some embodiments, the first application or the collection item program is preferentially loaded and run through the display, where the collection item program loaded on the display forms a collection item interface, or a labeled collection interface, and the collection item interface may include icons, shortcuts, links, and the like of other applications besides the plurality of applications.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the interface resources of the plurality of applications are configured as a top level of an operating system user interface of the electronic device, in other words, the interactive interfaces of the plurality of applications are integrated into the operating system as a top level of the operating system user interface. The step of preferentially loading the first application program or the collection item program further comprises the following steps: the method comprises the steps that a first application program is preferentially loaded on a display through an operating system user interface after the electronic equipment is started; wherein, the step of switching the output of the plurality of application programs through the display further comprises: and loading the corresponding application program in the plurality of application programs through the display, for example, in an activated state according to the switching operation of the user on the plurality of application programs through the user interface of the operating system.

In some embodiments, the top layer of the operating system UI includes interface resources of a plurality of applications configured in parallel, and output can be switched in parallel at the top layer of the operating system UI through operation gestures such as a lateral sliding of a user with respect to a display or through operation operations such as pressing of a switch operation key with respect to an entity of the electronic device. After the electronic device is started, a first application program is preferentially loaded on a top level of an operating system user interface relative to other application programs in the plurality of application programs.

If the top layer of the UI is configured with not only the interface resources of a plurality of general applications including the interface of the first application but also the icon set interface, correspondingly, in other embodiments, after the electronic device is started, the first application is preferentially loaded on the top layer of the UI, and the icon set interface is subsequently loaded in response to the switching operation of the physical switch key for the display or for the electronic device. Alternatively, the icon collection interface is preferentially loaded at a top level of the operating system user interface, and the first application is subsequently loaded in response to a switching operation for the display or for an entity switching key of the electronic device. Alternatively, the user's switching operation for the display may be a single switching gesture, such as a swipe gesture to the left or right for the display; the switching operation for the entity switching key configured on the electronic device may be a single pressing, toggling or the like. Here, it should be noted that in these embodiments, after the electronic device is booted, the first application program is preferentially loaded through the top layer of the operating system UI, and then the second application program or icon set interface is sequentially loaded as the user switches the slide gesture with respect to the display. In the process that the first application program and the icon set interface are sequentially loaded on the display through the top layer of the operating system UI in response to the switching operation of the user, the first application program and the icon set interface are not limited to be adjacently output on the display, in other words, interfaces of other application programs may also be output between the first application program and the icon set interface. On the contrary, if the icon assembly interface is loaded in advance through the top layer of the operating system UI and then the first application program is loaded subsequently after the electronic device is started, the details are not described again. The content described herein is also applicable to any other embodiments, and is not described in detail.

With the interface resource providing method of some embodiments in the case where an application manager independent of an operating system is configured in an electronic device to manage a plurality of applications, similarly to the above-described embodiments, interface resources of a plurality of applications are configured in parallel on the top layer of an application manager UI. The plurality of applications can switch output in parallel on the top layer of the application management program UI through operation gestures such as horizontal sliding of the application management program UI by a user or operation such as pressing of a switching operation key of an entity of the electronic device. Since the icon of the application management program may be configured on the desktop of the operating system for the user to access, the user also needs to perform a start operation on the application management program through the desktop of the operating system. The resource providing method in the related embodiment mainly comprises the following steps: 1) responding to the starting operation of a user on the application management program, and loading the application management program through a display; 2) the first application is preferentially loaded through a top level of the application manager user interface, and the icon set interface is subsequently loaded at the top level of the application manager user interface in response to a switch operation for the display. Alternatively, the icon collection interface is loaded preferentially through a top level of the application manager user interface, and the first application is subsequently loaded on the top level of the application manager user interface in response to a switch operation for the display.

It should be understood that: in some embodiments, the plurality of applications or interface resources thereof are configured as a top level of the operating system user interface and are not limited to the top level of the operating system user interface consisting of only interface resources of the plurality of applications. In other words, other interface elements may be configured on the top layer of the operating system user interface, for example, the top layer of the operating system user interface may further include a menu area as mentioned in some other embodiments, which is a global fixed/floating window on the display of the electronic device, and the menu area is used for accommodating a plurality of options (or menu items) respectively corresponding to a plurality of resources, and the menu area is kept at the periphery (e.g., the bottom) of the display or the current interface (e.g., the top layer of the operating system user interface) in the switching process of a plurality of application programs. The plurality of options respectively correspond to a plurality of resources. These implicit or explicit menu areas (or option areas) and the options therein may remain cross-interface with their presentation on the display, i.e., the option areas remain loaded on the current interface, such as the area at the bottom of the display, regardless of whether the current interface is loaded with a communications program interface, an album program interface, an assembly item interface, or other resource. Of course, the interface resources of the plurality of applications are configured as the top layer of the application manager user interface for the plurality of applications, and similar to this, no further description is given.

Here, the interface resources of multiple applications are preferentially loaded on the display as an operating system user interface, which to some extent shields the user interface architecture of the operating system or "desktop + applications" of the electronic device. For example, it is not necessary for a user to manually load certain programs through an interactive operation with a desktop of the system, which makes the user perceive only specific functionality of the relevant application through the electronic device, which reduces the complexity of the user interface of the electronic device and shortens the logical distance between the user and the application in the interaction between the user and the electronic device. Furthermore, as described in some embodiments, the installation entry and the setting entry for the applications in the electronic devices may be configured in a remote second terminal, and a professional user of another electronic device operates the second terminal to remotely install, uninstall, or perform other maintenance work on the applications in the electronic devices according to the embodiments of the present invention. This further reduces the cognitive degree of difficulty of electronic equipment, has promoted electronic equipment's maneuverability and the accessibility of application and information therein.

In some embodiments of the present invention, a plurality of applications are configured in parallel on a top layer of an application management program user interface or an operating system user interface of an electronic device, and the electronic device outputs the plurality of applications one by one to a display for a user to access in a manner of parallel switching on the user interface through a lateral sliding gesture detected on the user interface. To some extent, the configuration of the method, apparatus, or device interactive interface resources in these embodiments overcomes the thinking positions and technical prejudices of those skilled in the art of communication devices, particularly smart phones, in the resource configuration and scheme design process. The method for providing the program resource and the interface resource of the embodiment of the invention is completely different compared with the prior art. In the resource providing method according to some embodiments of the present invention, a concept of "individual (for example, a specific application) gives priority" or "individual (for example, a specific application) and then whole (collective provision of other resources)" is adopted. That is, a specific application program is preferentially provided in the electronic device, and optionally, an application aggregation interface may be further configured in the electronic device to support the user to further access resources, such as other software capabilities configured by the electronic device, in addition to the individual application. The above-mentioned "individual" and "whole" are independent and parallel to each other. The technical bias in the prior art is still in the logical architecture of desktop and personal computers, which mainly uses "platform/operating system + functional program", or the user interface design mode of "desktop + application program entry", and the corresponding software resource allocation mode which is guided by the differentiation of the function or group of functions (functional) of the application program. In the technical idea in the prior art, the resource is provided in a "first entity and then an individual" manner, and the individual application programs and the entity (all available software and hardware capabilities in the electronic device) are not in parallel but in a containment relationship. In other words, in the prior art, individual programs are not provided separately from the whole. For example, in a logical architecture of "platform/operating system + functional program" or a "desktop + application portal" user interface architecture, multiple resource portals are collectively output to a display in the form of a desktop or the like for a user to select from. This requires that the user understand the resource management method of the electronic device to be able to access the specific application program skillfully and selectively, and, for the electronic device configured in the factory, especially, the user needs to customize the resource configuration of the electronic device as needed based on the learning and understanding of the resource management method of the electronic device to be able to conform to the usage habit thereof.

The logic architecture, user interface design and the like in the prior art are from the technical development history of the long past as the whole configuration mode of software resources, but dominate most of electronic equipment including a smart phone in the prior art, a personal computer and the current mobile electronic equipment are different in hardware configuration and use scene and use habit of a user, some design concepts and logic architectures in the personal computer are not suitable for the mobile electronic equipment, and the personal computer and the mobile electronic equipment which inherits the design concepts and functional architectures of the personal computer bring interaction difficulty to a part of users because the users need to have more understanding of professional technologies related to the electronic equipment.

In contrast to the prior art, some embodiments of the present invention support users with direct access to specific individual resources, such as communication applications. Moreover, optionally, in some embodiments, remote configuration of the resource in the electronic device by the remote second device is also supported, which further improves accessibility of the resource in the electronic device.

Optionally, in some embodiments, an application management program for a plurality of applications is configured in the electronic device, and identification information of the plurality of applications, such as icons, shortcuts, and the like, is centrally managed. The electronic device starts to finish displaying the common desktop, and the shortcut of the application management program can be provided on the desktop. When the user starts the application management program by clicking, the program output through the user interface of the application management program may be one of the plurality of application programs or any other program not belonging to the plurality of application programs. Thus, optionally, the user interfaces of the plurality of applications may be configured as a top level of the user interface of the application manager, and the user interface of the first application, e.g., the first contact communicator, may occupy a first page of the top level of the user interface of the operating system, such that the first contact communicator interface is preferentially loaded through the user interface of the application manager after the application manager is launched. In other words, the preferentially loading step of the first application program or the collection item program further includes: and responding to the starting operation of the user to the application management program, and preferentially loading the first application program on the display through the user interface of the application management program.

The step of switching the output of the plurality of application programs through the display further comprises: and loading the corresponding application program in the plurality of application programs on the display, for example, in an activated state according to the switching operation of the plurality of application programs by the user through the application management program.

It can be understood that: and responding to the switching operation of the user, the first application program is started and loaded on the current interface under the scheduling of the application management program, wherein once the first application program is loaded on the current interface, the first application program enters an activated state, the first application program can be directly interacted by the user without other operations such as selection and the like before the current application on the current interface is accessed. Therefore, the description thereof is omitted in other embodiments. Optionally, the activated current program may be presented in a full screen manner on the current interface.

By integrating a plurality of locally or remotely deployed application programs in the application management program, some application programs in the electronic equipment, such as application programs which are relatively frequently used by a user and are relatively interested, are provided for the user through the user interface of the application management program in a centralized manner, so that the user can conveniently select and load the application programs.

The application manager or the operating system serves as a manager of the plurality of application programs, the plurality of independent or associated application programs are scheduled to be loaded and run through the user interfaces defined in the embodiments, switching overhead (overhead) between the plurality of programs in user interaction is reduced, operating efficiency of the user on the application programs is improved, and a plurality of application program entries can be obtained through the manager in a centralized manner without accessing entries, icons and the like of the application programs scattered in a plurality of levels (such as a desktop of a common operating system, a deep folder and the like) of the user interface of the electronic device respectively. For example, an icon of an application management program can be set on a desktop of the electronic device, the desktop is a first operable interface presented to a user after the electronic device is started, the user can manage all application programs commonly used or interested by the user through the application management program by clicking the icon of the application management program, and the high-frequency application programs keep a standby (stand by) state for the user and can be loaded and activated at any time in response to a switching operation of the user for the application management program, so that the operability of the electronic device and the accessibility of specific resources are improved.

Optionally, in the method of some embodiments, the method further includes the step of: and configuring the output sequence of the plurality of application programs through an operating system user interface or an application management program according to the setting of the sequence of the plurality of application programs by the user and/or the access frequency or the access time of the user to the plurality of application programs respectively.

Optionally, the application programs corresponding to the multiple identifiers provided in the collection item interface are, for example, programs with low access frequency or low user interest level in general.

Alternatively, the plurality of application programs may be independent of each other, and each of the plurality of application programs has an independent interactive interface. According to the access frequency and the access time of the user to the user interface of each application program, the application programs can be automatically arranged in the output sequence through the display, or the user customizes the sequence according to the interestingness of the application programs. By this, the configuration order of the plurality of applications in the software interaction hierarchy of the electronic device is consistent with the user's desire to access the related programs and interfaces. The accessibility of the application program provided by the user interface and the interaction efficiency of the user to the interface are improved.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the switching operation is a single switching gesture.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the single switching gesture is a sliding gesture for the display, and the switching output step of the plurality of applications further includes: and responding to a leftward or rightward sliding gesture of a current interface of the current application program, and outputting the application programs one by one through the display.

Alternatively, the plurality of applications may be configured in a particular order, or randomly. Correspondingly, the output of the plurality of application programs through the display in response to the user's operation such as a slide gesture with respect to the current interface may be in a certain order or may be output randomly. Thus, the user can switch different application programs in parallel by aiming at one gesture of the display, and the application program switched to the current interface can be in an activated state for the user to directly access. This improves the operability of the application during user interaction, compared to the situation in the prior art where the user needs to perform two or more operations to switch the application on the display.

Alternatively, the electronic device may lock the interface of the current program loaded on the display so that it is temporarily not switchable by the switching gesture in response to a user's operation of a predetermined gesture with respect to the current interface on the display or a hardware key of the electronic device.

Optionally, the method of some embodiments further comprises the step of: providing a plurality of options in abbreviated form through a display or a top level of the operating system user interface or a top level of the application management program user interface and respectively associated with a plurality of application programs. Here, there is no temporal restriction between the providing step of the plurality of options and the loading step of the plurality of applications. For example, the application program may be presented on the display synchronously with the first application program in the plurality of application programs after the electronic device is started, and of course, the application program may be preferentially presented on the display before the application programs are loaded on the display, so as to serve as an operation entry for the user to selectively run the application programs. In addition, unless specifically stated otherwise, there is no time limit between steps in any one embodiment of the present invention.

Alternatively, the options may be icons, shortcuts, etc. for each of the plurality of applications. If the application management program is configured in the electronic device, the application management program is used for centrally managing icons, shortcuts and the like of a plurality of application programs, and the step of providing a plurality of options in a thumbnail form through a display and respectively associating the options with the application programs further comprises the following steps: a plurality of options in abbreviated form are provided at a top level (e.g., premise and/or globally) of a user interface of an application management program, the plurality of options being respectively associated with a plurality of application programs. That is, the abbreviated plurality of options remain output on top of the user interface of the application management program regardless of whether the user interface of the application management program outputs any one of the plurality of applications or some other program that does not belong to the plurality of applications. This constitutes a global menu window for the application manager to expose a plurality of options. Such that the user of the electronic device always maintains a preview of the application resources available through the application manager as a whole. For this reason, no further description is given elsewhere. If the application management program is not configured in the electronic device, the icons, shortcuts and the like of a plurality of application programs can be managed and presented in a centralized manner through an operating system of the electronic device, and correspondingly, the step of providing a plurality of options in a thumbnail form through a display and associating the options with the application programs respectively further comprises the following steps: multiple options in abbreviated form are provided (e.g., resident and/or global) at a top level of an operating system user interface and are respectively associated with multiple applications.

Optionally, the above-mentioned options may be fully or partially presented at the periphery of the current interface. When the number of the multiple options is less, all the options can be provided for the user to select, if the number of the multiple options is more, the multiple options can be divided into multiple groups, and the options of different groups can be sequentially and respectively displayed in response to the scrolling or sliding operation of the user on the area where the options are located.

Optionally, in some embodiments, a plurality of options are located at a periphery of the current interface, the plurality of options operable to execute in a one-to-one correspondence and output a plurality of applications via the display. In particular, the current interface described above may include a contact communication interface, an operating system user interface, or a user interface of an application management program. The plurality of applications may be output through an application manager or an operating system UI (user interface). For this reason, the description is omitted below.

Here, it should be noted that: if multiple applications are managed by a separate application manager independent of the operating system of the electronic device, the application manager may provide configuration options in the area where the multiple options are located, referred to as the options area. The electronic device may add an icon or the like of a new application to the option area in response to user manipulation of the configuration option. When the user selects the newly added option in the option area, the application program associated with the newly added option is output on the display through the management or scheduling of the application management program and is in an activated state for the user to access.

It is to be understood that the step of loading at least one of the plurality of applications via the display or the step of loading one of the plurality of applications via the display does not exclude the step of loading the first application via the display and the second application at the same time. Therefore, alternatively, the plurality of application programs may be individually output (one by one) on the display one by one, or the plurality of application programs may be loaded at a time through the display, for example, 2 or more than 2 programs in the plurality of interfaces may be collectively output on the display. Wherein, one or more programs on the current interface are in an activated state for direct interaction of the user.

Optionally, in response to a user's adjustment operation for the order of the plurality of options, the order of the plurality of options arranged on the current interface, for example, the bottom, is configured correspondingly.

Therefore, for the application programs frequently used by the user, the user interaction operation is simplified, the application programs can be started only through 1 or 2 operations, one-key loading of high-frequency use software is kept, or the application programs can be started through one operation, the high-frequency use software does not need to be returned to the desktop for repositioning and selecting the entrance of the application program through inefficient operation, and further time overhead is avoided. Further, by presenting the multiple options in a thumbnail form on the current interface or display, the user is provided with previews of more available applications through the current interface to further enhance the interoperability or operability of the multiple applications.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the plurality of options are configured in ranks. Correspondingly, the method also comprises the following steps: and in response to the switching operation aiming at the option area, the plurality of options are movably presented. Optionally, in some embodiments, before the step of loading the first application program or the collection item program through the display, the method may further include: a user interface, such as a separate video playback interface, interactive interface, etc., is loaded through the display regardless of the plurality of options.

In particular, the plurality of options may optionally be located in one or more rows above or below the current interface or display, or in one or more columns to the left/right of the current interface.

Optionally, in some embodiments, all or part of the plurality of options are arranged laterally below the current interface, and the step of moving and presenting further includes: in response to a switching operation for the option area, the plurality of options are moved and presented in the option area part by part.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the step of switching and outputting the plurality of programs through the display further includes: in response to a user selection among the plurality of options, switching the current interface to the interface corresponding to the selected option on the display, and synchronously focalizing the selected option in the option area. In other words, in response to the user's selection among the plurality of options, the application program corresponding to the selected option is switched and output through the operating system UI or the UI of the application management program, and the selected option is focused in the option area in synchronization.

Optionally, a first option of the plurality of options corresponds to a first application of the plurality of programs; and the step of switching and outputting the plurality of programs through the display further comprises: when the first application program is loaded on the current interface, responding to the selection of a second option in the multiple options by a user, loading the program corresponding to the second option on the current interface instead of the first application program, and synchronously transferring the focus display from the first option to the second option in the option area

Optionally, in some embodiments, each portion includes the same number of options, the same number being 3-6; the width of the option area along the longitudinal direction is 1.5cm-2.5 cm.

Optionally, the method further comprises the step of: and responding to the switching of the application program loaded on the current interface, and correspondingly switching the current focus display, namely switching the focus display in the multiple options to correspond to the switched application program.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the plurality of programs are executable programs, a current program currently loaded on the display entering an active state; the electronic equipment further comprises an application operation unit which is provided on the current interface virtually and/or is provided on the electronic equipment physically; the application operating unit is operable by a user to access the current program.

Among them, it can be understood that: an application currently loaded on the display for access by a user may be referred to as a current program.

Alternatively, in some embodiments, the application operation unit is correspondingly changeable in function from one current program to another to maintain operability on features (Feature), capabilities (capability) of the current program.

In other words, the functionality of the application operating unit can be redefined, dynamically configured, cross-interface/cross-programmatically. Specifically, the application operating unit may be operable to call a different characteristic of the current program correspondingly, regardless of whether the program on the current interface is switched to the first application program or the second application program. Alternatively, the functions provided by the first application and the second application are relatively integrated functions (integrated functions), the number of application operation units such as keys may correspond to the integrated functions, and a user may invoke different functions of the application or activate features or routine functions of the application by operating different application operation units. The number of application operating units may correspond one-to-many to these integrated functions. For example, different functions of the application provided by the current interface are invoked (invoke) by different operations of the same key. I.e. the function of the same key, can also be redefined for the current program to invoke a different feature of the current program.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the application operating unit comprises a key group. The method of these embodiments further comprises: in response to an operation on the key group, a plurality of properties of the current program are respectively called.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the key set is a push or toggle key set, a knob, or the like.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the key set further includes a column of virtual keys on a right side of the current interface, or a column of physical keys arranged on a right side of the electronic device corresponding to the column of virtual keys on the display; and the plurality of application programs are respectively customized and configured aiming at the plurality of entity keys, so that a plurality of characteristics of each of the plurality of application programs can be correspondingly activated respectively in response to physical operations (such as pressing from a user) suffered by the plurality of entity keys. This supports the operability of the same hardware key set across interfaces to different applications, or the operability of multiple different applications through the same hardware key set.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the first application is a communication program for a first contact, executable to output a communication interface for the first contact through the display, including a message area; the key groups are respectively associated with at least one communication network; and the associated method further comprises the steps of: a plurality of communications with the first contact via the at least one communications network are output in the message area in response to user manipulation of the key set. When a key in the key group is subjected to a predetermined gesture by a user, the key is activated, and the electronic device is enabled to execute the function associated with the activated key, such as establishing communication and the like. For this reason, no further details are given elsewhere.

Of course, the program for the first contact and the program for the second contact may be loaded on the display separately, for example, the communication interface of the first contact and the communication interface of the second contact are configured as a top layer of the user interface of the operating system, and a priority order is set according to the access frequency, and if the first communication interface of the first contact occupies a first page on the top layer of the user interface of the operating system, the first communication program of the first contact is preferentially started to form the first communication interface after the electronic device is powered on. Alternatively, in some electronic devices with larger displays, the communication programs of multiple contacts may also share the same page on the top of the user interface of the operating system and be arranged at different positions in the same page, for example, the first contact communication program and the second contact communication program may be preferentially started after the electronic device is powered on to be collectively loaded on the display of a tablet computer or a mobile phone with a folding screen, so that the first contact communication interface and the second contact communication interface are simultaneously presented on the current interface of the display, and a user can conveniently communicate with the first contact and the second contact without performing an interface switching operation. Of course, the first contact communication program and the second contact communication program may alternatively share (share) some of the same/similar software capabilities or basic functions. Therefore, it can be understood from another aspect: the multiple options in the menu/option area, such as the first contact option, the second contact option, etc., collectively correspond to the same communication program. This is a many-to-one correspondence between options and their associated executables, rather than a one-to-one correspondence.

The communication interfaces of a plurality of different contacts are used as the top layer of the user interface of the operating system (different contacts can have a page exclusively arranged according to the priority order, for example, the page can be directly used as the first visible interface after the user starts up if occupying the first page, or different contacts can share the same page and be arranged according to different positions in the page), and share a communication operating program which is used as a basic function (and interface) and integrated in the operating system.

As mentioned above, here, the first contact option, the second contact option can be understood in two ways: 1) the first contact option and the second contact option correspond to a first contact interface and a second contact interface which are loaded on the display respectively by running the same communication program one by one; 2) the first contact option, the second contact option, … …, and the nth contact option are in a many-to-one correspondence with the communication program, while the N contact options are still in a one-to-one correspondence with the N contact interfaces. Aiming at the second understanding, the top layer of the user interface of the communication program is provided with N parallel interfaces which can be switched, and in a certain sense, the application software similar to WeChat and the like has four interactive interfaces of 'WeChat', 'address book', 'discovery' and 'I' which can be switched in parallel on the top layer of the user interface. Therefore, for the second case (simply referred to as top-level multi-interface, multi UI on top), in some embodiments, the step of switching multiple applications or the step of switching multiple interfaces, which is similar to "switching and outputting the multiple applications through the display in response to a user switching operation on an application currently presented on the display", may further include: sequentially outputting the plurality of applications (e.g., one by one) through the display in response to a swipe gesture to the left or right of a current interface of the current application. In other words, in response to a leftward or rightward swipe gesture for the first application through the display or the shift key, the next user interface of the first application or the user interface of the second application is sequentially switched and output through the display. The options provided, for example, at the bottom of the user interface of the application management program described above include an identification of a third party application, such as an icon of a WeChat application. Responding to the user clicking the icon, loading the WeChat program on the display through the application management program, and sequentially displaying three interactive interfaces of 'address list', 'discovery' and 'I' through the application management program along with the continuous 3-time leftward sliding gestures of the user for the display. Thereafter, in response to the user's gesture of sliding left again with respect to the display, the second application is toggled out on the display through the user interface of the application manager for the user to access the user interface of the second application. Similarly, the switching output steps of the programs or the interfaces are also suitable for the switching operation of the electronic equipment by the user through the physical operation keys. In addition, it can be understood that: each time the current interface is switched, for example, the address list interface of the wechat application is switched to the discovery interface, after the switching, the discovery interface is currently loaded on the display, and the current interface is changed to the discovery interface.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the at least one communication network comprises a plurality of communication networks, having different traffic properties, the key sets being respectively associated with the plurality of communication networks; and the communication information output step further comprises: a) establishing communication with a first contact through a plurality of communication networks to generate a plurality of communication information in response to the operation of the key group by the user; and b) outputting a plurality of communication information with different service properties through message region integration.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the plurality of communication networks comprises a plurality of wireless communication networks, the plurality of wireless communication networks comprising a mobile telephone network, a wireless data transmission network; the key sets are respectively associated with a mobile telephone network and a wireless data transmission network, and the communication establishing step further comprises: in response to a user's manipulation of the key set, communications are established with the first contact via the mobile telephone network and the wireless data transmission network, respectively, to generate a plurality of communications.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the wireless data transmission network comprises a mobile data network and a wireless local area network, and the related method further comprises the steps of: the set of keys is selectively associated with a mobile telephone network, a mobile data network or a wireless local area network, whereby the set of keys is operable to establish corresponding services based on the associated communication network, respectively.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the plurality of communications includes: at least two items of voice service information, short message service information and data service information; the communication establishing step further comprises:

when the key set is associated with the mobile telephone network, responding to the operation of the key set by the user, establishing communication with the first contact person through the mobile telephone network to generate voice service information and/or short message service information;

when the key set is associated with the wireless data transfer network, communication is established with the first contact through the wireless data transfer network to generate a data service message in response to user manipulation of the key set.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the first contact communication interface further includes a toggle option, and the selectively associating step includes: the key set is selectively configured to be associated with a mobile telephone network, a mobile data network, or a wireless local area network based on at least one of i) user manipulation of a switching option, ii) a connection status of the electronic device with the wireless local area network, or iii) communication network conditions available in the vicinity.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the step of selectively associating further comprises:

in response to the electronic device accessing the wireless local area network, configuring a key set on the communication function to be associated with the wireless local area network; and

the set of configuration keys are associated with the mobile phone network on the communication function in response to the electronic device being disconnected from the wireless local area network.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the first contact communicator is integrated into an operating system, and the interface or human interface resources of the first contact communicator are integrated as at least part of an operating system user interface component.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the corresponding cell phone number of the first contact in the mobile phone network and the corresponding identification code in the wireless data transmission network are configured integrally.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the corresponding mobile phone number of the first contact in the mobile phone network and the corresponding identification code in the wireless data transmission network are integrated and stored in the same program of the electronic device, and the communication establishing step further includes: and responding to the operation of the user on the key group, and establishing communication with the first contact person through the mobile phone number and the identification code respectively to generate a plurality of pieces of communication information.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the step of outputting the plurality of communication information further comprises the steps of: and integrating and outputting at least two items of voice service information, short message service information and data service information to a message area on the first contact communication interface.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the step of integrating output further comprises: a) outputting voice service information and/or short message service information through the message area when the key set is associated with the mobile phone network; and b) outputting the data service message through the message area when the key set is associated with the wireless local area network or the mobile data network.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the plurality of communication information outputting steps further include the steps of: the latest piece of the plurality of pieces of communication information is individually output in the message area in response to occurrence of the latest piece. In other words, the latest one of the plurality of communication information is continuously updated individually to the message area output on the first contact communication interface;

wherein the latest message comprises the latest message received from the first contact and the latest message sent to the first contact.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the outputting step further comprises: and in response to the occurrence of the latest one of the at least two items in the voice service message, the short message service message, and the data service message, outputting the latest one separately in the message area. In other words, the latest one of at least two items of the voice service information, the short message service message and the data service message is continuously updated and outputted to the message area separately.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the profile information of the first contact is configured separately outside of the message area and commensurate with the message area format; the method further comprises the steps of: expanding the message area and optionally abbreviating profile information; and collectively outputting the plurality of messages to the message area.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the profile information of the first contact is configured substantially centrally above and below the message area on the first contact communication interface, and the plurality of communication information outputting steps further comprise:

A) collectively outputting at least two items of voice service information, short message service information and data service information in a message area; or

B) Collectively outputting voice service information and/or short message service messages arranged in the occurrence order through the message area when the key group is associated with the mobile phone network; when the key group is associated with a wireless data transmission network, the data service messages arranged in the order of occurrence are collectively output through the message area.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the plurality of communication information output steps further include:

C) when the key set is associated with the mobile telephone network, integrating the voice service information and/or the short message service message to output the latest one of the voice service information and/or the short message service message in the message area;

D) when the key set is associated with a wireless data transmission network, outputting the message area only for the latest one of the data service messages in a continuously updated manner; wherein the data service message comprises one or more of: audio messages, video messages, picture messages, geographic locations, text messages, files, data.

Optionally, at least one information publishing interface is provided in the electronic device, and the method of some embodiments further includes: at least one information publication interface is presented on the display.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the step of switching to output the plurality of applications through the display further includes: e) and in the process of switching to output a plurality of application programs, at least one information publishing interface is output through the display occasionally. Or f) outputting the plurality of application programs interspersed with the at least one information publishing interface one by one through the display.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the plurality of options does not include an option corresponding to the at least one information publication interface.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the at least one information publication interface comprises a dynamic or static media publication interface, the interface elements of which include at least one of text elements, video elements, audio output elements, or a combination thereof.

Alternatively, the information publishing interface may be generated by running a corresponding media playing program, which is loaded on the display to form the information publishing interface to play relevant media, such as advertisements.

Optionally, in some embodiments of the invention, the first option in the menu area is a communication option for the first contact, the first option being associated with a communication program, the first option being operable to invoke the communication program to output a communication interface for the first contact through the display, in other words, in response to a user operating the first contact option, to run the communication application to present the communication interface for the first contact on the display, including the avatar etc. profile information for the first contact, and the message area. Establishing communication with a first contact through at least one communication network available to the electronic device to generate a plurality of communication information in response to a user operation on the communication key set; and outputting a plurality of communication information through the message area on the first contact communication interface.

Optionally, the first contact communication interface of the key group further comprises an expandable button, and the keys of the first part or all of the key group are arranged in a column on the right side of the interface, between the key column and the option area on the communication contact interface, namely, at positions below the key column and above the option area.

Optionally, the expandable buttons are located substantially in the same column as the key column. Correspondingly, the method of these embodiments further comprises the steps of: in response to a user selection operation (e.g., clicking) on the expandable button, an expanded menu is presented, optionally including a second portion of keys in the key set and/or emoticon options, social options (e.g., a red envelope button), etc., in a single row at the bottom of the display, above the options area. And when the second part of keys are activated, popping up a communication establishment interface, and when the expression options and the social options are activated, popping up corresponding expression or social interface elements for further operation of the user. And in response to the user completing the operation related to the selected second part key, the expression option or the social option, shrinking the expansion menu into an expansion button. In response to a user's clicking operation on the expand button, the expand menu is preferably presented in a single row in the lateral direction, with the expand menu and expand button being located at the bottom of the display, above the option area. And posting an object (e.g., the aforementioned red envelope, emoticon, photograph, etc.) selected by the user through the one or more options in the message area.

Optionally, the extended menu may further include a menu option for initiating a voice or video call with the current contact when activated, a menu option for initiating a short message service with the current contact when activated, a menu option for initiating a payment action for the current contact when activated, and a menu option for initiating a video conference with a group of contacts to which the current contact and the user of the electronic device belong together when activated.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the tab of the known contacts tab is operable to output the known contacts tab via a display for the electronic device, including arranging a plurality of abbreviated sets of known contacts communication records for display, each abbreviated set of known contacts communication records including a corresponding known contact and newly occurring communication information with the known contact, respectively. A tag of a known contacts tab operable to output the known contacts tab via a display for the electronic device, including arranging a plurality of abbreviated sets of unknown contacts for display, each abbreviated set of unknown contacts including a corresponding unknown contact and newly occurring communication information with the unknown contact, respectively. A tab of a dialing program tab operable to output a dialing interface through a display for an electronic device, the dialing interface comprising: virtual numeric keyboard, telephone number input box, calling option. For a dialing interface, the method of these embodiments further comprises the steps of: 1) responding to the click operation of a user through the virtual numeric keyboard, and presenting a corresponding telephone number in a telephone number input box; 2) in response to a user's operation of the call option, a communication targeted at a telephone number is established through the mobile telephone network.

In still another embodiment of the present invention, there is also provided an electronic apparatus including: the computer-readable medium may include, but is not limited to, a display, a processor unit, a memory, and one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the processor unit, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the operations of any of the methods of the present application.

In still another embodiment of the present invention, there is also provided an electronic apparatus including: a physical key set (or called a physical key set), a spring probe connector, and a communication device including a display, a processor unit, a memory, and one or more programs. The physical key set is detachably coupled to the processor unit through a spring probe connector; wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the processor unit, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the operations of any of the methods in the present application.

Optionally, in the electronic device of some embodiments, the electronic device further includes a base, the spring probe connector is a Pogopin connector, and the physical key group is configured on the base; the pin hole interface and the probe interface of the Pogopin connector are correspondingly arranged on the mobile communication device and the base and are respectively connected to the processor unit and the physical key group. The one or more programs include an operating system and/or an application manager that includes instructions for performing the operations of any of the methods in the present application.

Optionally, in the electronic device of some embodiments, the one or more programs further comprise a communication program comprising instructions for performing, in combination with the application manager, any of the methods of claims 18 to 34; the communication program is integrated with or independent of the operating system; the communication program is further executable by the processor unit to: the electronic device is switched between the wireless local area network and the mobile data network according to at least one of i) surrounding communication network conditions and ii) connection or disconnection of the connector.

Optionally, in the electronic device of some embodiments, the set of virtual keys corresponds in form to the set of physical keys.

Optionally, in the electronic device of some embodiments, the virtual key set and the physical key set have consistency with respect to at least one of: the number, layout, shape, appearance, orientation, color system, color, shape, pattern, and the plurality of virtual keys included in the virtual key set are configured in a column on the right side of the current interface in the current interface, and the plurality of physical keys included in the physical key set are configured in a column on the right side of the electronic device, for example, may be configured on the right side of the display, and are located outside the display but substantially on the same side of the electronic device as the display. Further, the key set may include: a plurality of virtual pressing keys or toggle keys arranged in a row at the right side of the current interface and/or a plurality of physical pressing keys or toggle keys arranged in a row at the right side of the display. The user may make input not only via the touch-sensitive display, the touch-sensitive surface, but also via physical/mechanical controls, such as knobs or buttons. For this reason, the description is omitted below.

A key in the keypad, when pressed, triggers the electronic device to generate a signal to operate, or activate, a Feature of an application program to perform a function of the application. The inventor has found through research that for common applications, the number of important functions or functions commonly used by the user generally does not exceed 5, for example 3 to 4. For example, an instant messaging program may include several primary communication functions: "send voice message", "listen to voice message", "online video/audio call", etc., while for photo album applications may include several major image processing functions: "take/record", "view pictures", etc. Thus, a corresponding number of keys, 3 or 4, may be provided in the electronic device, each operating an application to run these functions. Of course, preferably, the 3 or 4 keys may be centrally configured on the same layer of the interface of the application to facilitate the user to directly access them without having to open further interfaces, sub-interfaces or floats. Keys corresponding to other auxiliary functions (such as emoticons and red packet functions for the contact communication interface) can be collectively arranged in an extensible menu, and the extensible menu is abbreviated into an extensible button by default and is displayed in an extensible mode according to the needs of a user. That is, in response to the user's operation on these expandable buttons, an expanded menu including buttons corresponding to the emoticon, the red-icon, and other functions is presented (temporarily) above the menu area in the lateral direction, and in response to the user's operation on these buttons, the object (e.g., the red-icon, the emoticon, and other functions) selected by the user through these buttons is posted to the message area. Because some function keys are configured in the expandable menu on the interface, the expandable menu is contracted into an expandable button by default and is only displayed on the user interface as required, so that the structure of interface elements is simplified, and the occupation of other necessary or important interface elements on the user interface is increased; the visual effect is improved, so that the time cost of misoperation or selection in too many interface elements of a user is reduced, and the effects improve the accessibility, the interactivity and the interaction efficiency of the interface to the user to a certain extent.

Optionally, two or more keys having a corresponding relationship in function may be disposed in association on the current interface or on an entity of the electronic device, for example, disposed in close spatial proximity, so as to facilitate the user's cognition and operation. For example, "send voice message" and "listen to voice message" in the instant messaging program, "send short message" and "access short message" in the mobile phone application program, "play photo" and "pause play" in the album application program. While the functionally relatively independent keys, or keys with a higher frequency of use, such as the "online video/audio call" key for instant messaging programs, may be provided separately from the other keys in the key set. In some embodiments, the "online video/audio call" key may be spaced apart by a distance from the pair of keys (key pair) that "send voice message" and "listen to voice message".

Preferably, the key group comprises 2-5 (e.g. 3-4) operation keys, e.g. keys, which may operate the above-mentioned main features or functions of the application. The 3-4 operation keys correspond to 3-4 main functions of the application on the current interface. Wherein, various software capabilities of the application program on the current interface are integrated into 3-4 main functions for the user to operate the application program through the 3-4 operation keys. The design of 3 or 4 operating keys balances two factors: 1) corresponding to the main capabilities of the software on the current interface, 2) to the memory capabilities of the user, especially the elderly. Specifically, if the number of the keys is too large, difficulty may be brought to the user to learn the function of each key; if the number of keys is too small, for example 1, the main resources provided by a piece of software may not be fully utilized, and the provided Feature (Feature) or Feature (Feature) of the software is wasted to some extent. The design of 3 or 4 operation keys keeps the interchangeability of the application program, so that the capability of the application program is fully utilized, and simultaneously, the cognition and the operation of the application program by a user through the electronic device are relatively simplified. In the following description, it will be explained how the 3 operation keys of the electronic device support the user to operate the two applications to use their main software features, exemplarily by the communication application and the album application.

Optionally, in the electronic device of some embodiments, the one or more programs further include an album application, the operating system and/or the application management program further including instructions executable by the processor unit to cause the electronic device to: responding to a sixth switching operation of the user on the current interface, a seventh switching operation of an interface switching key or a selection operation of the user on an option corresponding to the album application interface in an area where the options are located, and outputting the album application interface on the display; and

in response to the album application interface being currently output on the display, the application operating section is correspondingly configured to be operable to run a plurality of characteristics of the album application.

Optionally, in the electronic device of some embodiments, the plurality of characteristics includes a photograph characteristic, a play characteristic, a pause characteristic; and the key group comprises a first key, a second key and a third key which are operable to invoke a photographing characteristic, a playing characteristic and a pausing characteristic of the album application respectively.

Optionally, in the electronic device of some embodiments, the operating system and/or the application management program further comprises instructions that, when executed by the processor unit, cause the electronic device to, in response to the first contact communication interface being currently output on the display, functionally reconfigure the first key, the second key, and the third key to be operable to respectively invoke the following characteristics provided by the first contact communication interface:

characteristic a): when the first key, the second key and the third key are associated with a wireless data transmission network, i) sending a voice message over the wireless data transmission network; ii) accessing a voice message received over a wireless data transmission network; iii) establishing an audio-video call over a wireless data transmission network; or

Characteristic B): when the first key, the second key and the third key are associated with a mobile phone network, a) sending a short message service through the mobile phone network; b) accessing a short message service received over a mobile telephone network; c) voice telephony services are established over a mobile telephone network.

In still another embodiment of the present invention, there is also provided an information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device having a display, including: apparatus for performing any of a number of methods in the present application.

In yet another embodiment of the invention, a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium is also provided, including one or more programs for execution by one or more processors of an electronic device, the one or more programs including instructions, which when executed by the one or more processors, cause the electronic device to perform the operations of any of the methods in the present application

Optionally, in accordance with a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium of some embodiments, the one or more programs include an operating system and/or an application management program including instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of the electronic device, cause the electronic device to perform the operations of any of the methods in the present application

Optionally, in a non-transitory computer readable storage medium according to some embodiments, the application management program is integrated with or separate from the operating system, the one or more programs further comprising a communication program comprising instructions that, when executed by the one or more processors of the electronic device in combination with the application management program, cause the electronic device to perform the operations of any of the methods in the present application.

Optionally, in a non-transitory computer readable storage medium according to some embodiments, the communication program is at least partially integrated with or independent of an operating system.

In still another embodiment of the present invention, there is also provided an electronic apparatus including: a display, a processor unit, and a touch-sensitive surface unit configured to detect a contact; wherein a processor unit is coupled to the display and the touch-sensitive surface unit, the processing unit being programmed to perform the steps of any of a plurality of methods herein.

Optionally, in the electronic device according to some embodiments, the one or more programs include an operating system program and/or an application management program configured to be executed by the processor unit, the operating system program and/or the application management program including instructions for performing operations of any of the methods in the present application.

Optionally, in the electronic device according to some embodiments, the application management program is integrated with the operating system, or the application management program is an application program independent of the operating system but installable to the operating system. The one or more programs also include a communication program comprising instructions that, when executed by the one or more processors of the electronic device in combination with the application manager, cause the electronic device to perform the operations of any of the methods in the present application.

Optionally, in the electronic device according to some embodiments, the communication program is at least partially integrated with the operating system, or is an application-level program that is independent of the operating system but installable to the operating system.

In addition, another embodiment of the present invention further provides a resource providing method for an electronic device, where at least one interface is configured in the electronic device and is capable of outputting through a display, where the display may be a part of the electronic device, and of course, the electronic device may not include the display, in other words, the display may be a separate display unit independent from the electronic device, such as a television, and the method includes:

presenting an interface for a first application of at least one interface on a display;

at least one option configured in an abbreviated form is provided on the display, respectively associated with the at least one interface.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the at least one option may be operable to output the at least one interface via a display in a one-to-one correspondence.

Optionally, wherein the at least one option may include a first option, corresponding to the first application interface. In particular, these options may also include graphical identifications, icons, etc. for contacts of the communication application interface, such as contact avatars; and icons for application programs, etc., which are not described in detail below.

Optionally, in some embodiments, at least one option is configured at the top/bottom of the display or beside the display, in other words, at least one option is configured at the peripheral area of the first contact communication interface or other interface currently presented on the display, and the method further includes the steps of: and at least one option is movably presented in response to the switching operation of the user for the at least one option.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the at least one option is at least partially arranged laterally at the bottom of the display, and the moving and presenting step further includes: and in response to the switching operation of the user for the transverse area, or the horizontal area and the strip area, where the at least one option is located, moving the at least one option to be presented part by part. For example, all or a portion of the at least one option may be arranged in a single row or in an array of two rows in a striped or lateral area along the bottom of the display.

Optionally, in some embodiments, at least one option may be presented by a bar area with the option divided into a plurality of parts equally, and each part includes the same number of options, and the same number is 3-6. For example, each section may include 5 options, or each section may include 4 options. The stripe-shaped area is located transversely at the bottom of the display and has a width in the longitudinal direction of 1.5cm to 2.5cm, preferably 1.8cm to 2.4cm, for example 2.0cm, 2.1cm, 2.2cm or 2.3 cm. The bar-shaped area with the size can enable users including old people to clearly identify various options (such as contact head portraits) without occupying too much of the main functional area of the display.

It should be understood that: optionally, all of the at least one option may also be considered as a special case of part of the at least one option. If at least one option includes only 4 options, optionally, all 4 options may be collectively configured into a bar at the bottom of the display. When the user performs a switching operation such as sliding on the bar-shaped area, the positions of the 4 options on the display are changed or moved by a certain amplitude, so as to generate a visual prompt for the user: no more options can be loaded subsequently.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the at least one option further comprises a second option; the resource providing method further comprises: in response to a user selection of the second option in the bar area, switching the first application interface to an application interface corresponding to the second option on the display, such as a communication application interface for multiple contacts in at least one interface configured in the electronic device, or a session interface for a single contact, such as a communication interface for a first contact, and synchronously differentiating the form of the second option in the bar area. The differentiation in the form may be, for example, highlighting the corresponding option, or adding a frame to the option, and changing the visual characteristics, such as enlarged display, dynamic display including blinking, and the like, relative to other options, which may not be described again.

Optionally, in some embodiments, at least one interface is configured sequentially, and the resource providing method further includes: and responding to a plurality of switching operations of the user aiming at the middle part of the display, and outputting the at least one interface through the display according to the configuration sequence of the at least one interface. Wherein, the middle part of the display may be: for example, an area of the display for presenting a user interface, such as the first application interface, may also be suitable for some embodiments described below, and may not be described in further detail.

Optionally, the resource providing method of some embodiments further includes: in response to a plurality of switching operations of a user aiming at the middle part of the display, for example, an area used for presenting the first application interface on the display, at least one interface is sequentially and correspondingly output through the display according to the sequence of at least one option in the bar-shaped area, and the corresponding option of the current interface in the bar-shaped area is presented in a differentiated mode.

Optionally, in some embodiments, if the user applies a single switch operation to the middle of the display as described above, an interface presented adjacent to the first application interface in the at least one interface is switched on the display in response to the single switch operation by the user for the first application interface. The "middle of display" may include a portion of the first contact communication interface, or an operation of a portion of the display other than the menu area or the single line/row area, which will not be described in detail herein.

Optionally, the method of some embodiments further comprises: in response to a single switching operation of a user for the first application interface, switching from the first application interface to an interface corresponding to an option adjacent to the first option in the at least one option on the display, and differently presenting the adjacent options in a form in the bar area.

Optionally, in some embodiments described above and in some embodiments below, the various switching operations such as the first switching operation, the second switching operation, the third switching operation, the fourth switching operation, the fifth switching operation, the sixth switching operation, and the like may include a drag gesture, a swipe gesture, a touch action, and the like for the display, and these predetermined interaction gestures are preferably single operations, and may also have a certain direction definition, for example, a swipe gesture to the left or the right on the display, and the like.

Since at least one option respectively represents at least one interface in an abbreviated form, the abbreviated menu item can present more options such as contacts, applications and the like for the user on a smaller scale on the current interface, so that the user can also globally know other available options through the current interface, and has a navigation function for selecting and positioning the customer in a plurality of application options configured by the electronic device. And a plurality of contact person options or application program options can be switched in batch part by part in response to the switching operation of the user, so that a man-machine interface for improving the efficiency of interactive operation is provided for the user, the operability of related electronic equipment and the accessibility of related information are improved, and the user can quickly browse or select an application program which the user desires to use or a contact person needing communication.

Optionally, in the resource providing method of some embodiments, the first contact communication interface includes a message area and communication option groups, and the communication option groups are respectively associated with at least one communication network. And the resource providing method of this embodiment further includes: in response to a user manipulation of the set of communication options, outputting a plurality of communications with the first contact via the at least one communication network in the message area.

Optionally, the at least one communication network comprises a plurality of wireless communication networks; the communication option groups are respectively associated with a plurality of wireless communication networks; the plurality of communication messages are attributed to at least two service properties. And, the communication information output step further includes: i) responding to the operation of a user on the communication option group, establishing communication with the first contact person through the plurality of wireless communication networks to generate the plurality of communication information; ii) outputting the plurality of communication information through a message area on the first contact communication interface.

It should be noted that: here, the interface layout of the contact interface with the communication function in the above embodiments, the composition of interface elements including a key group and a message area for communication included in the contact interface, and functions of the interface elements and a method for providing a resource for the communication interface, which are otherwise referred to as a resource providing method for the communication interface, may be described in detail in other embodiments in the present application, and all the communication interfaces and related resource providing methods may be combined with the communication interfaces to form a modified example, and are not described herein again.

Optionally, one or more interfaces of the at least one interface in the electronic device are configured to be configured locally to the electronic device, for example, a communication application corresponding to the contact communication interface is configured locally to the electronic device. The one or more interfaces belong to a single application or to associated multiple applications. The at least one interface is used as a system level User Interface (UI), referred to as system UI, of the electronic device and is integrated in a single application, so that one interface of the at least one interface is preferentially displayed on the display after the electronic device is started and loaded.

Optionally, communication interfaces for certain contacts in the at least one interface may be preferentially shown on the display after the electronic device is started, and other interfaces in the at least one interface, such as the album application interface, may also be switched to be presented on the display in response to a switching operation, such as a slide gesture, of the user. Preferably, at least one interface further includes an application integration interface. These application integration interfaces are similar to common desktop interfaces, and provide different operation entries, such as icons, shortcuts, etc., for a plurality of applications, with the division of function/function groups (function groups) as guidance.

In the prior art, a communication device such as a mobile phone belongs to a system-preferred or system desktop-preferred starting method in a starting and loading process, and a desktop interface is also provided with different entries such as icons and the like for a plurality of application programs by dividing functions into guidance.

However, the resource providing method in some embodiments of the present invention belongs to Individual application (Individual App) priority, such as contact priority, which improves the accessibility of resources that may be more interesting to the user, and preferentially provides application programs on the display where the user may have more interaction possibilities. For example, in some embodiments, the contact interface is preferentially displayed on the display after the electronic device is started, which constitutes a navigation method or an interaction method for contacts and related information based on the interpersonal relationship of the user, and can also be understood as a resource providing method guided by the social object of the user. Resources of the electronic equipment are configured by taking contacts and related information as guidance, but not taking programs and function groups thereof as guidance, so that the communication function or the social function based on communication of mobile communication devices such as smart phones is strengthened to a certain extent. In the past and at present, as a smart phone replaces a functional phone, diversified application programs are installed in the phone, the communication function of the phone is weakened on the whole, and the accessibility of the communication function and related information is reduced, so that the operability of the phone is reduced for users who pay more attention to instant messaging with objects in interpersonal relationships or social circles.

Optionally, as the user further operates, a plurality of application programs with different functions can be provided for the user through a subsequent application collection interface in the plurality of interfaces. Therefore, in the method or the device such as the smart phone according to some embodiments of the present invention, a user interaction with an individual application as a priority option is established for the user, and meanwhile, the accessibility of other application programs with a plurality of different functions is maintained for the user, and the preferentially configured individual application may include a video software application for a camera and a camera of a shooting fan, and a software application for a Wechat and a Wechat of an instant messaging fan, because the social fan needs to access the software applications such as the Wechat and the Wechat most of the time. Of course, if the common contacts are generally limited to several specific objects, the communication interfaces for several common contacts (one by one) may also be configured at the top of the software interaction hierarchy of the electronic device independently and preferentially one by one. The method is an interaction mode taking a single contact as a center, and is more suitable for users who are not suitable for multifunctional configuration, high-specialty configuration, high operation capability requirement or entertainment configuration of smart phones, such as middle-aged and elderly people.

According to the method or the device provided by the embodiment of the invention, a plurality of interfaces including a single contact person interface, an application program interface or a set interface further including an application program can be output to a display one by one through parallel switching operation modes, so that the interaction hierarchy of the electronic device is flattened, the efficiency of the interaction operation of a user is improved, and a new interaction entrance, interaction experience and interaction operation path are provided for the user. Meanwhile, the technical means in these embodiments also solve the technical problem that a smartphone whose functional architecture is designed in the form of "operating system + multiple applications" or "desktop + applications" lacks a fundamental (basical) resource configuration oriented to individual functions and individual objects, which also results in the inability to support a user to conveniently access more interesting application programs or information through simplified interactive operations, and this technical problem is brought by the thinking and technical prejudice in software design that are long-lived by those in the art.

In another embodiment of the present invention, a resource providing method for an electronic device is provided, wherein the electronic device includes a communication operation interface associated with at least one communication network, and the method includes the following three steps:

i) presenting a communication interface for a first contact or a first group of contacts on a display, including a message area;

ii) establishing communication with a first contact or a first contact group member through at least one communication network to generate a plurality of communication information in response to user operation of the communication operation interface; and

iii) outputting the plurality of communications via the message area on the first contact communication interface.

The communication operation interface is configured on the machine as a man-machine interface in a software or hardware form for a user to operate so as to establish/trigger communication of the electronic device. In a different scenario in some other embodiments, or also referred to as communication enabled elements, user interface elements, communication operation options, etc.

Optionally, the outputting step of the method of some embodiments further comprises: and in response to the occurrence of the latest item in the plurality of communication information, individually outputting the latest item in the message area, individually configuring the profile information of the contact corresponding to the message content at a position on the contact interface, which is outside the message area, and not displaying the profile information in the message area.

Optionally, the outputting in some embodiments further comprises: and continuously updating the message area output on the first contact communication interface or the first contact group by the latest one of the plurality of communication information, wherein the profile information is configured on the contact interface at a position outside the message area separately, and the profile information of the relevant contact is not shown in the message area.

Optionally, the latest message with the contact in some embodiments includes both the latest message received from the contact and the latest message sent to the contact. Specifically, a first message occurs between the first contact or the second contact at the last time and is displayed separately in the message area. Currently, a second message occurs with the first contact, and the latest message output step in the method of some embodiments further includes: in response to the second message being sent to or received from the first contact, the last message (i.e., the first message described above) is replaced with the second message for separate display in the message area. Similarly, the first message may be a message received from or sent to the first/second contact. Of course, it should be understood that: the second message may be a reply to the first message, or may be content or logically unrelated to the first message, which also applies to the case where the user of the electronic device communicates with a plurality of contacts in the contact group.

In the "receive → reply" scenario of some embodiments, the above-mentioned step of outputting the latest message separately through the message area may further include: sub-step a) in response to receiving a third message from the first contact, displaying the third message separately in the message area, and sub-step B) in response to the user activating a send button in the communication operation interface, sending a reply message to the third contact and displaying the reply message in place of the latest received message, i.e. the third message described above, separately in the message area. In yet another embodiment, in the "send → receive" scenario among scenarios in which the messages are continuously sent for the members of the contact group, the step of individually outputting the latest message through the message area may further include: substep C) in response to a user activating a send button in the communication operations interface on the first contact group interface, sending a fourth message for a third contact in the first contact group and displaying the fourth message separately in the message area, and substep D) in response to receiving a seventh message from the third contact or the fourth contact, displaying the seventh message separately in the message area in place of the fourth message. In yet another embodiment, in a scenario where the messages are continuously sent to members of the contact group, the step of outputting the latest message separately through the message area may further include: substep E) in response to a user activating a send button in the communication operation interface on the first contact group interface, sending a fifth message for a fourth contact in the first contact group and displaying the fifth message in the message area separately in place of the current message in the message area, and substep F) in response to a user activating a send button in the communication operation interface on the first contact group interface, sending a sixth message for a fifth contact in the first contact group and displaying the sixth message in place of the fifth message in the message area separately.

Optionally, before the latest message outputting step, a) the latest message sending step: and providing a message input interface in response to the operation of the communication operation interface or the message area by the user, and transmitting the message input by the user through the message input interface. The message input interface may include a soft keyboard and a message area as an input box, or the message input interface may also include hardware for audio capture, such as a microphone, and optionally may also include interface elements for prompting audio capture on the contact interface, and the like. And the latest message output step further comprises: b) and a latest message access step: in response to user manipulation of the communication manipulation interface or message area, the latest message is output audibly or textually through the message area, where the textual output of the latest message may be a complete and/or magnified output of the entire message.

Optionally, in some embodiments, wherein the at least one communication network includes a plurality of communication networks, the plurality of communication information corresponds to the plurality of communication networks, and has different business properties, the communication operation interface includes a key group provided virtually on the first contact communication interface and/or provided physically on the electronic device, and is associated with the plurality of communication networks.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the profile information for the first contact is configured separately outside the message area. A plurality of communication messages including at least two of voice service messages, short message service messages, and data service messages; the plurality of communication networks comprises a plurality of wireless communication networks, and the plurality of wireless communication networks comprise a mobile telephone network and a wireless data transmission network; and the outputting step further comprises: at least two items of voice service information, short message service message, and data service message are integrated to output the latest one of them separately and continuously updated in the message area.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the profile information and the message area on the contact communication interface are configured substantially centrally up and down, preferably, the profile information is located above the message area and the size, size (size) or breadth of the two is substantially equivalent, for example, the area occupied by the profile information on the display is about 40% to 120% of the area of the message area. Further, optionally, the area of the profile information may occupy 20-40% of the effective display area on the display, and again this ratio applies to the display area occupied by the message area on the display. The plurality of communication messages may include at least two of voice service messages, short message service messages, data service messages; the plurality of communication networks comprises a plurality of wireless communication networks, and the plurality of wireless communication networks comprise a mobile telephone network and a wireless data transmission network; and the outputting step further comprises: in response to the occurrence of a latest one of at least two items in the voice service information, the short message service message, and the data service message, the latest one is individually output in the message area.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the communication establishing step and the outputting step may respectively include the following conditional sub-steps for the key group to be associated with different communication networks in terms of communication functions:

when the keypad is associated with a mobile phone network, the communication establishing step comprises: in response to a user manipulation of the keypad, communication is established with the first contact over the mobile phone network to generate voice service information and/or a short message service message. Correspondingly, the outputting step further comprises: continuously updating and outputting the latest one of the voice service information and/or the short message service message in the message area;

when the key set is associated with a wireless local area network or a mobile data network, the communication establishing step comprises: and responding to the operation of the user on the key group, and establishing communication with the first contact through the wireless local area network or the mobile data network to generate the data service message. Correspondingly, the outputting step further comprises: only for the latest piece of data service message is continuously updated and output in the message area.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the profile information for the first contact is arranged substantially centrally on the first contact communication interface and above the message area, the profile information being of a size (size) comparable to the message area, e.g. the profile information occupies approximately 60% to 90% of the area of the message area on the display. Optionally, the method of this embodiment may further include the step of: expanding the message area and optionally abbreviating profile information above the message area; and the outputting step further comprises: collectively outputting a plurality of communication information to a message area, wherein the plurality of communication information includes at least two of voice service information, short message service messages, and data service messages.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the first contact communication interface is provided with profile information of the first contact, and further includes the steps of: expanding the message area and optionally abbreviating profile information above the message area; and the outputting step further comprises: when the key group is related to the mobile phone network, the voice service information and/or short message service information arranged according to the occurrence sequence are/is collectively output through the message area; when the keypad is associated with a wireless data transmission network, data service messages arranged in order of occurrence are collectively output through a message area.

Optionally, the method of some embodiments further comprises the step of: expanding the profile information and optionally reducing the message area in response to an operation on the profile information or the message area; and the outputting step further comprises: and outputting the latest one of the plurality of communication information separately in the message area, wherein the plurality of communication information comprises at least two of voice service information, short message service message and data service message.

Optionally, the method of some embodiments further comprises the step of: when the key group is related to the mobile telephone network, integrating the voice service information and/or the short message service message to output the latest one of the voice service information and/or the short message service message in the message area; when the keypad is associated with a wireless data transmission network, only the latest piece of the data service message is continuously updated and output in the message area.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the keypad is associated with a mobile phone network and a wireless data transmission network, respectively, and the communication establishing step further comprises: and responding to the operation of the user on the key group, and establishing communication with the first contact person through a mobile telephone network and a wireless data transmission network respectively to generate at least two items of voice service information, short message service information and data service information. Wherein the data service message comprises one or more of: audio messages, video messages, picture messages, geographic locations, text messages, files, data.

Alternatively, for data service messages or SMS service messages, etc., while individually outputting the latest one or collectively outputting a plurality of messages through the message area, in the electronic device, it is further possible to automatically output the audio message or the video message in an audio manner and/or a video manner (e.g., through a display, a message area on an interactive interface, a speaker) in response to the audio message or the video message being received by the electronic device. Therefore, the messages such as voice messages do not need to be acquired by the user through manual operation. For SMS text-type messages, the text-to-speech conversion is used first, and the message content is output audibly. This optional variation may also be applicable to any other embodiment of the present invention, and further description thereof may not be provided herein.

In addition, another embodiment of the present invention further provides a resource providing method for an electronic device, wherein the electronic device includes a communication operation interface associated with at least one communication network, and the method includes:

i) presenting a communication interface for a first contact or a first group of contacts on a display;

iii) outputting the plurality of communications via the first contact communication interface.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the at least one communication network includes a plurality of communication networks having two or more different business properties, and the communication operation interface includes a keypad provided virtually on the first contact communication interface and/or physically on the electronic device, associated with the plurality of communication networks.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the plurality of communication networks comprises a plurality of wireless communication networks, the plurality of wireless communication networks comprising a mobile telephone network, a wireless data transmission network; the keypad is associated with a mobile telephone network and a wireless data transmission network, respectively, and the communication establishing step further comprises: in response to a user's manipulation of the keypad, communications are established with the first contact via the mobile phone network and the wireless data transmission network, respectively, to generate a plurality of communications.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the plurality of communication information includes: at least two items of voice service information, short message service information and data service information; the above step of establishing communication via a mobile telephone network and a wireless data transmission network further comprises the following two substeps a), b):

a) when the key set is associated with the mobile phone network, a communication is established with the first contact through the mobile phone network to generate voice service information and/or a short message service message in response to the operation of the key set by the user. b) When the key set is associated with the wireless data transfer network, in response to a user operating the key set, communication is established with the first contact through the wireless data transfer network to generate a data service message.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the wireless data transmission network includes a wireless local area network and a mobile data network, the first contact communication interface further includes a switching option, and the method further includes the steps of: the keypad is selectively configured to associate with a mobile phone network, a mobile data network, or a wireless local area network based on at least one of i) user manipulation of a handoff option, ii) a connection status of the electronic device with the wireless local area network, or iii) communication network conditions available in the vicinity.

In addition, another embodiment of the present invention further provides a resource providing method for an electronic device, where at least one interface is configured in the electronic device and can output through a display, where the display may be a part of the electronic device, and of course, the electronic device may not include the display, in other words, the display may be a separate display unit independent from the electronic device, such as a television, and the electronic device includes a communication operation interface associated with at least one communication network, and the method includes:

presenting, on the display, a communication interface for the first contact of the at least one interface, including a message area;

in response to a user's manipulation of the communication manipulation interface, a plurality of communications with the first contact via the at least one communication network are output in the message area.

The message area (message area) is an area used for outputting communication information on the contact communication interface, and may be explicit or implicit, but the message area is present as long as there is communication information on the communication interface to be output.

Optionally, in some embodiments, at least one option configured in an abbreviated form is provided on the display, respectively associated with the at least one interface.

Optionally, the at least one option is operable to output the at least one interface in a one-to-one correspondence via the display. Wherein the at least one option may include a first option corresponding to the first contact communication interface. In particular, the options may be contact avatars, application icons, and the like.

Optionally, in some embodiments, at least one option is configured at the top/bottom of the display or at the side of the display, and the method further comprises the steps of: and at least one option is movably presented in response to the switching operation of the user for the at least one option.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the at least one option is arranged laterally in a bar-shaped region along the bottom of the display, and the moving step further comprises: and in response to the switching operation of the user for the bar-shaped area, moving the at least one option to be presented part by part. For example, all or a portion of the at least one option may be arranged in a single row or a two-row array in a striped area at the top/bottom of the display.

It should be understood that: optionally, all of the at least one option may also be considered as a special case of part of the at least one option. If at least one option includes only 4 options, optionally, all 4 options may be collectively configured into a bar at the bottom of the display. When the user applies a switching operation such as sliding to the bar-shaped area, the positions of the 4 options on the display are changed or moved by a certain amplitude, and a visual prompt is generated for the user by the way of moving/scrolling the 4 options: no more options can be loaded subsequently.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the at least one option further comprises a second option; the resource providing method further comprises: in response to a user selection of the second option in the bar area, switching the first contact communication interface to an interface corresponding to the second option on the display, and synchronously differentiating the second option in form in the bar area.

Optionally, in some embodiments, at least one interface is configured sequentially, and the resource providing method further includes: and responding to a plurality of switching operations of the user aiming at the middle part of the display, and outputting the at least one interface through the display according to the configuration sequence of the at least one interface. Wherein, the middle part of the display may be: for example, an area of the display for presenting a user interface, such as the first contact communication interface, or an area of the display for presenting an application interface, which is suitable for some embodiments described below, and may not be described in detail here.

Optionally, the resource providing method of some embodiments further includes: in response to a plurality of switching operations of a user aiming at the middle part of the display, for example, the area used for presenting the first contact person communication interface on the display, at least one interface is sequentially and correspondingly output through the display according to the sequence of at least one option in the bar-shaped area, and the corresponding option of the current interface in the bar-shaped area is presented in a differentiated mode.

Optionally, in some embodiments, if the user applies a single toggle operation to the middle of the display as described above, the interface presented adjacent to the first contact communication interface in the at least one interface is toggled on the display in response to the single toggle operation by the user for the first contact communication interface.

Optionally, the method of some embodiments further comprises: in response to a single switching operation of the user for the first contact communication interface, switching from the first contact communication interface to an interface corresponding to an option adjacent to the first option in the at least one option on the display, and presenting the adjacent options differently in form in the bar area.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the at least one communication network comprises a plurality of wireless communication networks; the communication operation interface comprises a key group which is virtually provided on the first contact communication interface and/or is physically provided on the electronic equipment, and is associated with a plurality of wireless communication networks; a plurality of communications attributed to at least two traffic properties; and the communication information output step further comprises: establishing communication with a first contact through a plurality of wireless communication networks to generate a plurality of communication information in response to the operation of the key group by the user; and outputting a plurality of communication information through the integration of the message areas on the first contact communication interface.

It is worth noting that: the electronic device may include one or both of 1) the virtual key set configured on the first contact communication interface and 2) the physical key set (or physical key set) configured in hardware. The virtual key set and the entity key set can be respectively associated with at least one communication network and can be operated to establish communication, communication links and communication channels between the electronic equipment and the electronic equipment of the first contact person through the communication networks, and the user can communicate with the first contact person through the communication resources to generate communication information. In addition, the at least one communication network may comprise a plurality of communication networks of different service properties, such as mobile phone networks, wireless data transmission networks, etc. The virtual key set on the first contact interface can be respectively related to a mobile telephone network and a wireless data transmission network in communication function, so that a user is supported to establish communication with the first contact by utilizing the mobile telephone network and the wireless data transmission network through operating the virtual key set. Similarly, the entity key set can be related to the mobile phone network and the wireless data transmission network respectively in communication function, so that the user is supported to establish communication with the first contact by using the mobile phone network and the wireless data transmission network through operating the entity key set. That is, the virtual key set and the physical key set may each independently enable establishment of communication between the user and the first contact.

In other words, while the virtual key set and the physical key set may have some consistency and similarity in form, the two may be independent in communication functionality. Specifically, a first association (association for enabling communication) that can trigger communication is provided between the entity key group and the communication network, and a second association (association) that can trigger communication is also provided between the virtual key group and the communication network, and the two associations may be independent, that is, a user may operate the virtual key group and the entity key group respectively to realize independent access to the associated communication networks to establish communication with the first contact. Other embodiments of the present invention can be seen in detail, and are not repeated herein.

In addition, the virtual key set described above may also be referred to as a communication option, a communication option set, a user interface element in some embodiments, and is configured in the form of buttons, keys, etc. of software on the contact interface. In particular, 1, 2, 3, 4 or more interface elements such as keys or buttons may be included. And the physical key set may be referred to as a physical operation part, a physical keyboard, etc. in some embodiments.

The virtual key set and the physical key set correspond in function, and may include 1, 2, 3, 4 or more physical keys, etc. Those skilled in the art will understand that: although the virtual key group and the physical key group have different implementation forms, in some embodiments of the present invention, the virtual key group and the physical key group belong to basically the same means, and achieve basically the same functions and basically the same effects. For avoiding redundancy, in some embodiments of the method or the electronic device of the present invention, the virtual key set is mainly used as an example for description, however, the physical key set can also be applied to the method and the electronic device in these embodiments.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the plurality of wireless communication networks comprises a mobile telephone network, a wireless data transfer network, the wireless data transfer network comprising a wireless local area network and a mobile data network; the keypad is associated with a mobile telephone network and a wireless data transmission network, respectively, and the communication establishing step further comprises:

in response to a user's manipulation of the keypad, establishing communication with a first contact via the mobile phone network and the wireless data transmission network, respectively, to generate a plurality of communications, including: communication information and data service messages of a mobile telephone network; wherein the communication information of the mobile phone network comprises: voice service information and short message service information; a data service message comprising one or more of: audio messages, video messages, picture messages, geographic locations, text messages, files, data.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the step of integrating output further comprises: at least two items of voice service information, short message service information and data service information are integrated and output to a message area.

Optionally, the step of integrating output in some embodiments may further comprise two sub-steps: i) when the key group is associated with the mobile phone network, outputting voice service information and/or short message service information through a message area on a first contact communication interface; ii) outputting the data service message through the message area on the first contact communication interface when the keypad is associated with a wireless local area network or a mobile data network.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the first contact communication interface is provided with profile information of the first contact, and the step of integrating and outputting further includes: the latest piece of the plurality of pieces of communication information is individually output in the message area in response to occurrence of the latest piece.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the first contact communication interface is provided with profile information of the first contact, and the step of integrating and outputting further includes the following two sub-steps: i) when the key group is associated with the mobile telephone network, in response to the occurrence of the latest piece of communication information of the mobile telephone network, individually outputting the latest piece of communication information of the mobile telephone network in the message area; 2) when the keypad is associated with a wireless local area network or a mobile data network, the latest piece of data service message is individually output in the message area in response to the occurrence of the latest piece of data service message.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the resource providing method further includes the steps of: in response to a user manipulation of the profile information or message area, the message area is expanded and, optionally, the profile information is arranged abbreviated above the message area. Wherein, the step of integrating and outputting further comprises: a plurality of communication information are collectively output to a message area in chronological order.

Optionally, the resource providing method of some embodiments further includes the steps of: in response to a user manipulation of the profile information or message area, the message area is expanded and, optionally, the profile information is arranged abbreviated above the message area. Wherein, the step of integrating and outputting further comprises: when the key group is related to the mobile telephone network, the communication information of the mobile telephone network is collectively output to the message area according to the time sequence; and when the key group is associated with a wireless local area network or a mobile data network, collectively outputting the data service messages to the message area according to the time sequence.

Optionally, the resource providing method of some embodiments further includes the steps of: in response to an operation on the profile information or the message area, the message area is reduced and the presentation profile information is expanded. Wherein, the step of integrating and outputting further comprises: outputting the latest piece of the plurality of communication information separately in the message area

Optionally, the resource providing method of some embodiments further includes the steps of: in response to an operation on the profile information or the message area, the message area is reduced and the presentation profile information is expanded. Wherein, the step of integrating and outputting further comprises: when the key group is related to the mobile telephone network, the latest piece of communication information of the mobile telephone network is output in the message area; when the key group is associated with a wireless local area network or a mobile data network, the latest piece of data service message is output in the message area separately.

In some embodiments, the communication resources associated with a plurality of communication networks of different nature are integrated on the communication interface for the first contact object, centred on the first contact object and its communication interface, in other words the different communication resources in these electronic devices are integrated or assigned to the first contact object interface, guided by the accessibility to communication of the first contact object (communication to a first contact). This is different from a case where a communication tool such as a different communication program is used as a center, and a contact is attached to one module of the communication tool (for example, an address book, a telephone directory, or the like for the contact) as one communication target to which the communication tool is applied. This shields the user from different communication tools/programs being run by the electronic device, different communication networks being accessed during communication with the first contact object, and in some embodiments, from the operating system of the electronic device, which improves accessibility/accessibility of communications to the first contact object at the electronic device, operability of communication resources between the user and the first contact object, and related user experiences.

Optionally, the one or more options provided across the interface on the display include one or more of a contacts option, a contacts group option, a subscription number option, an application option. Wherein the options for the application include a program name and/or a program icon. Options for a contact include an image (e.g., icon, avatar) and/or abbreviation of the contact. Further, the contact options further include an operating address of a communication application associated with the contact, a contact address of the contact, and at least one of: name, identity, relationship to the user of the second terminal, name to the user of the second terminal, nickname. The options for an application also include the running address, remote or local, of the associated application.

Optionally, the above-mentioned communication application program of the contact integrates some functions of the instant communication application and the communication application for the mobile phone network in the mobile phone. The corresponding mobile phone number in the mobile communication network or the corresponding identification code (ID) in the wireless data transmission network, such as WLAN, is stored in or mapped to the same program (such as the communication application program), and the communication application program in the electronic device, such as a mobile phone, used by the user establishes communication with the communication tool used by the current contact person through the mobile phone network and the wireless data transmission network, respectively, according to the mobile phone number and the unique identification number (or understandable as an instant communication address/instant message address) corresponding to the contact person in the communication network corresponding to the instant communication, thereby generating communication information. For users of electronic devices such as mobile phones, the application software belonging to the communication interface senses and experiences a single communication means and communication tool. Furthermore, the resources for communication information of different service properties in the communication process, including the communication interface of the communication network corresponding to different service properties, located at the lower layer of the software architecture, and the interactive interface for outputting a plurality of communication information, located at the upper layer of the software architecture, may all be integrated into the communication application.

In yet another embodiment of the present invention, another resource providing method for an electronic device is further provided, in which at least one interface is configured in the electronic device and can output through a display, where the display may be a part of the electronic device, and of course, the electronic device may not include the display, in other words, the display may be a separate display unit independent from the electronic device, such as a television, and the method includes:

presenting a communication interface for a first contact in at least one interface on a display, including a message area;

providing a set of communication options on the display, associated with at least one communication network,

in response to a user manipulation of the set of communication options, outputting, by the message area, a plurality of communications with the first contact via the at least one communications network. One or more communication options in the communication option group may establish a communication associated with each option in response to a user operation, or may also be referred to as a communication interface element, a communication operation interface. In particular, it may be provided in the form of a group of keys on a communication interface.

Optionally, the resource providing method of some embodiments further includes: at least one option configured in an abbreviated form is provided via the display, respectively associated with the at least one interface.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the at least one option is operable to output the at least one interface in a one-to-one correspondence via the display, wherein the at least one option includes a first option corresponding to the first contact communication interface.

Optionally, in some embodiments, a first set of the at least one option is arranged in a single row at the top/bottom of the display; or in a single column disposed at the side of the display, the resource providing method further includes the steps of: and in response to the switching operation of the user for the first group of options, switching and presenting a second group of options in the at least one option in the single-row area.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the switching operation is a sliding operation, and the switching presentation step further includes any one of the following three steps:

a) moving the first option group along the sliding operation direction and continuously presenting the second option group;

b) moving the first set of options in the direction of the sliding operation to cancel presentation of the first set of options section by section at the edge of the display, and subsequently moving the second set of options into a single row of regions following the first set of options;

c) the first set of options is moved out of the display in the direction of the sliding operation and the second set of options is moved into a single row of regions following the first set of options.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the communication key set includes a first key and a second key, and when the current access network of the electronic device includes a wireless local area network, the electronic device may send the data service message through the wireless local area network in response to an operation of the first key, and output the data service message received via the wireless local area network through the message area and/or the speaker in response to an operation of the second key by the user; or

When the current access network of the electronic equipment comprises a mobile telephone network and does not comprise a wireless local area network, responding to the operation of a user on a first key, collecting a voice signal of the user through a microphone of the electronic equipment and converting the voice signal into a short message service message, sending the short message service message to the current contact person through the mobile telephone network, and responding to the operation of a second key by the user, outputting the short message service message from the current contact person through the mobile telephone network by a message area and/or a loudspeaker.

Optionally, in other embodiments, the communication key set includes a third key and a fourth key, and when the communication key set of the electronic device is associated with the wireless local area network/mobile data network, the electronic device sends the data service message through the wireless local area network or the mobile data network in response to the operation of the third key, and outputs the data service message received via the wireless local area network or the mobile data network through the message area and/or the speaker in response to the operation of the fourth key by the user; or

When the communication key set of the electronic equipment is associated with a mobile telephone network, the short message service message is sent to the current contact person through the mobile telephone network in response to the operation of the third key by the user, and the short message service message from the current contact person received through the mobile telephone network is output through the message area and/or the loudspeaker in response to the operation of the fourth key by the user.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the step of sending the short message service message may further include, before the step of sending the short message service message, acquiring a voice signal by a microphone of an electronic device and converting the voice signal into the short message service message; and, the short message service message outputting step may further include: text content of the short message service message is converted into a voice signal and the voice signal is output through a speaker.

Optionally, in some embodiments, when the set of physical/virtual keys is associated with a mobile phone network during the first time period, the communication establishing step comprises: responding to the operation of the user on the entity/virtual key group, establishing communication with a first contact person through a mobile phone network to generate voice service information and/or short message service information; the outputting step further comprises: only the latest one of the voice service information and/or short message service messages is continuously updated and output in the message area. And when the entity/virtual key group is associated with the wireless local area network or the mobile data network in the second time period, the communication establishing step comprises: responding to the operation of a user on the entity/virtual key group, establishing communication with a first contact person through a wireless local area network or a mobile data network to generate a data service message; the outputting step further comprises: only for the latest piece of data service message is continuously updated and output in the message area.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the contact communication interface is loaded on the display after the electronic device is started, preferentially over other programs, as a first User Interface (UI) for a normal operating state of the electronic device.

It should be noted that: the other programs mentioned above may include, but are not limited to, at least one of the following: an application program and an operating system program outside the program to which the contact communication interface belongs. Optionally, a conventional operating system such as android may be customized to integrate the programs related to the contact Interface into the operating system of the electronic device to form a system-level single program, and the program components related to the contact Interface may be used as an operating system User Interface (UI). Alternatively, the program related to the contact interface may be a single application program independent of the operating system, and the single program is automatically run in the booting stage of the electronic device and is preferentially loaded on the display relative to other application programs. In this way, after the electronic device is started and the operating system user interface is presented, the single program to which the contact interface belongs is automatically loaded, and the display is exclusively occupied.

The selective configuration of keys for multiple communication functions on the same contact interface means that the multiple keys may be associated with different traffic properties of the communication networks, respectively, during the same time period. For example, the key group on the first contact interface includes four keys arranged in a column on the right side of the interface, and a first key and a second key of the four keys are respectively associated with a wireless data transmission network (WLAN or mobile data network), wherein the first key can collect audio/video signals of a user through a microphone and/or a camera and send the audio messages or video messages through the wireless data transmission network in response to the clicking operation of the user, and the second key can be operated by the user to output audio/video messages received through the wireless data transmission network through a loudspeaker and/or a display. The third key and the fourth key in the four keys are respectively associated with a mobile telephone network, wherein the third key can respond to the clicking operation of the user to establish the voice telephone service through the mobile telephone network, and the fourth key can respond to the clicking operation of the user to allow the user to input text content through the dialog box and establish the SMS service aiming at the text content through the mobile telephone network. The selective configuration of the key groups on the contact interface is also applicable to other related embodiments, and will not be described in detail below. Of course, the selective configuration of the key group on the contact interface may also include a case that the same key on the contact interface is respectively associated with communication networks with different service properties in different periods, and it can be detailed in the related embodiments that the method or the electronic device performs "time-sharing multiplexing" on the key group on the contact interface in response to the occurrence of different events (for example, connection or disconnection between the communication device host and the base) or a network switching operation of the user, which is not described herein again.

In yet another embodiment of the present invention, another resource providing method for an electronic device is further provided, wherein the electronic device includes a communication operation interface and at least one interface, the communication operation interface is associated with at least one communication network, and the at least one interface is output through a display, wherein the display may be a part of the electronic device, and of course, the electronic device may not include the display, in other words, the display may be a separate display unit independent from the electronic device, such as a television, and the method includes:

outputting a communication interface aiming at a current contact person in at least one interface through a display, wherein the current contact person communication interface comprises a message area;

providing profile information for the current contact on the communication interface,

and outputting a plurality of communication information with the current contact via at least one communication network in the message area in response to the operation of the communication operation interface by the user.

Wherein the current contacts are: the related information of the contact is currently loaded on a communication interface of the display, so that the contact, such as the first contact, with which the user performs communication interaction is provided. Of course, with the switching operation of the user on the communication interface, the current contact may also be a plurality of different contacts, such as a second contact, a third contact, and the like. Correspondingly, the communication interface for the current contact may also be a plurality of different communication interfaces, such as a communication interface for the second contact, a communication interface for the third contact, and the like, and each of the communication interfaces may belong to at least one of the interfaces described above.

In yet another embodiment of the invention, an electronic device includes a display, a touch-sensitive surface, optionally one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface, a processor unit, a memory, and one or more programs; the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the processor unit, and the one or more programs include instructions for performing the operations of any of the methods in the present application.

In some embodiments according to the invention, there is also provided a computer-readable storage medium having instructions stored therein, which when executed by an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and optionally one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface, cause the device to perform the operations of any of the methods of the present application.

In some embodiments according to the invention, there is also provided a non-transitory computer readable storage medium comprising one or more programs for execution by one or more processors of an electronic device, the one or more programs comprising instructions which, when executed by the one or more processors, cause the electronic device to perform any of the methods of the present application.

In some embodiments according to the invention, there is also provided a computer program product comprising instructions which, when run on an electronic device, cause the electronic device to perform any of the methods of the present application.

There is also provided, in some embodiments according to the invention, an electronic device, including: a display, a processor unit, and a touch-sensitive surface unit configured to detect a contact; wherein the processor unit is coupled to the display and the touch-sensitive surface unit, the processor unit being programmed to perform any of a plurality of methods herein.

There is also provided, in some embodiments according to the invention, an electronic device, including: a processor unit, memory, and one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the processor unit, the one or more programs including instructions that, when executed by the one or more processors, cause the electronic device to perform any of the methods of the present application.

Meanwhile, it should be noted that: although the method, electronic device, or non-transitory computer readable storage medium of some embodiments is described in the context of an electronic device that includes a display and/or a keyboard, in some embodiments, the electronic device may not include a display or a keyboard, and the processor unit is configured to execute operations or instructions of any of the methods of the present application to output the associated user interface via a display that is separate from the electronic device, or the one or more programs include instructions that, when executed by the one or more processors, cause the electronic device to perform any of the methods of the present application.

There is also provided, in some embodiments according to the invention, a system comprising:

one or more processors; and a memory having stored thereon computer instructions that, when executed by the one or more processors, cause the electronic device to perform any of a plurality of methods in the present application.

one or more processors; and a memory having stored thereon computer instructions which, when executed by the one or more processors, implement any of the methods in the present application.

In some embodiments of the resource providing method, a plurality of communication operation interfaces/user interface elements, such as a plurality of virtual keys, are collectively provided on the first contact communication interface, and the keys are respectively associated with different communication networks, such as a mobile phone network, a mobile data network/WLAN, and the like, so that different communication paths, different communication tools, and different communication means are all integrated on the same user interface, which is centered on a contact, and the integrated configuration of the communication resources is performed by taking simplification of interaction operations in the process of establishing communication between a user and the contacts as a guide, so that the electronic device or the communication apparatus is significantly improved in operability and accessibility of the communication resources or communication information. The improvement of the embodiments of the present invention reconstructs the functional architecture of the technical elements including the interactive interface elements in the mobile communication device, the mutual matching relationship among the technical elements and the redefined functions of some technical features, has certain development in the aspect of communication interaction, and has prominent substantive features compared with the mobile phone taking the functions as the guide in the prior art. To some extent, the methods or apparatuses in these embodiments overcome the thinking and technical prejudice of those skilled in the art of mobile communication apparatuses, especially smart phones, in resource configuration and solution design, which inherits the logical architecture of desktop computers and electronic devices, especially smart phones, mainly based on "platform/operating system + functional programs", and the corresponding software resource providing manner oriented by the differentiation of functions or function groups (function groups) of application programs.

In some embodiments of the resource providing method, the association relationship between the key group and the communication networks with different business properties is selectively defined by dynamically configuring the communication operation interface such as providing the key group on the first contact interface. This association is dynamically variable and may be reconfigured automatically or in accordance with a user's manual switching operation. This essentially shields the presence of multiple communication networks of different traffic properties between the user and the contact. In this way, the key groups can establish communication of different business properties respectively in response to the user's operation. Such as voice telephone service, SMS, data service, etc., may be provided to the user through a single interactive interface. For a user, switching and complex operation between communication software with different functions are not needed to obtain operation inlets with different communication functions, only a single interactive interface is needed to be used in the same software interface, all available communication resources of the electronic equipment can be conveniently used through simple one-two operations of a key group (or called communication option, communication option group and the like) and a mode switching option, the accessibility of the communication resources to the user is improved, and the operability of the electronic equipment accessed to the communication network is improved.

In addition, not only the instant messaging and mobile phone communication functions are integrated into a single program, but also information such as mobile phone numbers and identification codes of instant messaging applications, which correspond to the same contact in communication networks with different service properties, can be integrated into the single program. Therefore, only a single address book needs to be established in the electronic equipment, and information such as the address book and the communication record of the same contact person does not need to be redundantly stored in software with different communication functions. The user does not have to separately access these separate and redundant information. Moreover, the key group is directly associated with the mobile phone number and the identification code in the communication function, and the communication of the corresponding service property can be established by operating one key in the key group without inputting the mobile phone number and performing login operation according to the identification code by a user generally. The method shields the existence of contact ways such as mobile phone numbers, identification codes and the like for users, and the communication resources and the human-computer interaction configuration method which takes the contact person as the center or can also be regarded as the guide of the interaction experience of the users lead the interaction logic of the communication between the users and the contact person to be simplified and the touch to be accessible, and the logic distance between the users and the available communication network resources to be shortened.

The consistent form of the keypad while being dynamically associated, particularly automatically, selectively with different communication networks allows the interface elements presented to the user to be consistent despite the electronic device having multiple different available communication networks, further masking the existence of multiple communication networks with the contact. In some embodiments, when communicating with a contact through an SMS service, text content of a short message service message is converted into a voice signal through a microphone and a speaker of an electronic device, which is the same as reception and transmission of a voice message of a data service in terms of interaction with a user, thereby making the user unaware of changes in a currently used communication network and a corresponding difference in service properties, and the electronic device provides a normalized interactive process and interactive experience to the outside, improving operability of software and accessibility of related information.

In some embodiments of the above resource providing method, one or more of the voice service information, the short message service message, and the data service message are integrated so as to be output through the display and only a latest one thereof is output, and in response to occurrence of the latest one of the plurality of communication messages, the latest one just occurring is continuously updated and output in the message area. This focuses more on the round of round (round) of message reception and transmission during the communication interaction, with the presentation of the information being done one at a time. The single message only exists or can have a larger font, so that the user can conveniently identify and acquire the content of the message, the accessibility of the communication application and related information is improved, and particularly the access efficiency of the newly-occurred communication information is improved. Moreover, only aiming at the continuous updating output of the latest message, the message which occurs recently and is often needed to be paid attention can be directly accessed without identifying among a plurality of messages. This improves the operability of the newly generated communication information in the process of being accessed by the user, and further improves the availability (availability) of the newly generated communication information to the user.

Therefore, if the message area is used for displaying only a single message, the area occupied by the message area on the contact interface can be relatively reduced, and the recognizability of the message in the message area can be simultaneously increased. This well balances a pair of contradictory factors: in order to improve the identifiability of the message content, the message area and the font size of the message need to be enlarged, and conversely, the larger message area contains too many or somewhat disordered message records, and the display space of the individual (individual) message is also squeezed, and the identification degree is reduced. Therefore, the technical means in some embodiments of the present invention solves the technical problem of providing interface resources that people have eagerly but have not yet succeeded, and the technical problem in the industry is brought by the technical prejudice of those skilled in the art to a certain extent.

In addition, profile information such as icons, avatars, etc. of contacts are separately arranged outside the message area, for example, above the message area, and are not provided inside the message area. The occupation of the effective area in the message area is further reduced, and the identifiability of the message content in the message area is improved.

Furthermore, by configuring a larger area of the display of the profile information on the contact interface, for example, the breadth (size) of the profile information may be comparable to the breadth of the message area, and such a relatively larger area of the message area may allow the identity of the current contact to be easily recognized by the user, or in other words, may improve the recognizability of the sender or recipient of the current message.

In addition, this is not only applicable to a single contact interface, but also applicable to a contact group interface in combination with other means, as can be seen in the description of other related embodiments. Moreover, since the number of messages in the message area of the contact group is larger and more cluttered, the message area is only used for displaying a single message, and the profile information of the contact group is configured outside the message area, which can further improve the recognizability of the message content in the message area of the contact group while simplifying the whole contact group interface.

In addition, if the voice service information, the short message service information and two or three of the data service information are integrated and the latest one of the voice service information, the short message service information and the data service information is output through the contact person interface, the situation that a user accesses different communication applications respectively to acquire communication information with different service properties is avoided, and the accessibility of the communication information in the electronic equipment and the operability (operability) of the electronic equipment are further improved.

In some embodiments of the Interface resource providing method described above, in the switching process of the User Interface of the electronic device, by configuring a plurality of application interfaces including the communication application Interface in a mode that can be switched in parallel through the display, preferably, a conventional operating system such as android may be customized to integrate components related to the communication application Interface into the operating system of the electronic device to form a single program at a system level, and a contact Interface, or a communication application Interface, related components are used as an operating system User Interface (UI), so that the communication application component runs on the display of the electronic device in an exclusive manner. Correspondingly, by automatically running the single program in the starting stage of the electronic device, a plurality of interfaces such as contact communication interfaces configured in the electronic device are presented to a user at the first time after the starting is completed, and are positioned at the top layer of the software interaction level of the electronic device, and the plurality of interfaces can switchably occupy display resources of the electronic device. The communication interfaces with the contacts are loaded at the topmost layer in the interaction hierarchy of the software system in the electronic equipment after the electronic equipment is started, and are similar to the desktop of a common operating system, so that the accessibility of related communication resources and communication information is further increased. Moreover, the interface elements or the communication key groups configured on the multiple application interfaces and available for user operation can be respectively adapted to the functions of the respective application programs on each of the multiple interfaces, and consistency in operation, layout, perception and the like can be maintained to a certain extent among the multiple interfaces where the multiple application programs with different functions are located, which follows consistency of user experience to a certain extent, thereby enhancing operability of the application program with the communication function through the user interface.

Drawings

In order to more clearly illustrate the embodiments of the present invention or the technical solutions in the prior art, the drawings used in the description of the embodiments or the prior art will be briefly described below, and it is obvious that the drawings in the following description are some embodiments of the present invention, and those skilled in the art can also obtain other drawings according to the drawings without creative efforts.

Fig. 1a is a schematic structural diagram of a physical keyboard according to an embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 1b is a schematic diagram of an operation process corresponding to the physical keyboard provided in the embodiment shown in FIG. 1 a;

FIG. 2a is a schematic structural diagram of another physical keyboard according to an embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 2b is a schematic diagram of an operation process corresponding to the physical keyboard provided in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 a;

fig. 3 is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention;

fig. 4 is a schematic structural diagram of another electronic device provided in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention;

fig. 5 is a schematic structural diagram of another electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention;

fig. 6 is a schematic structural diagram of another electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a system architecture for establishing communication with a contact via a mobile terminal according to the prior art;

FIG. 8 is a flowchart illustrating a resource providing method according to an embodiment of the invention;

fig. 9A is a block diagram schematically illustrating a part of a program stored in a resource providing apparatus according to another embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 9B is a schematic diagram of an electronic device according to another embodiment of the invention;

FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the structure of an electronic device and a user interface thereof according to another embodiment of the present invention;

fig. 11 is a schematic view of a user interface in a resource providing method according to another embodiment of the present invention;

fig. 12 is a schematic view of a user interface for displaying the latest one or more messages in a resource providing method according to another embodiment of the present invention;

fig. 13 is a schematic view of a user interface of a providing button in a resource providing method according to another embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 14 is a flowchart illustrating a resource providing method according to another embodiment of the present invention;

fig. 15 is a schematic view of a user interface in a resource providing method according to another embodiment of the present invention;

fig. 16 is a flowchart illustrating an interface element providing method according to another embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 17 is a schematic layout diagram of physical operating parts and virtual user interface elements of an electronic device according to an embodiment of the invention;

FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram of an operational process of an electronic device according to one embodiment of the present invention;

fig. 19 is a schematic structural diagram of another terminal electronic device provided in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 20 is a schematic view of a user interface in a terminal electronic device according to another embodiment of the present invention;

fig. 21 is a flowchart illustrating a resource providing method for an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram of a correspondence between at least one interface configured in an electronic device and at least one option presented on a display, in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention;

fig. 23A and 23B are schematic diagrams illustrating switching between two interfaces configured in an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention;

FIGS. 24A-24I are schematic diagrams of some menu items and their associated applications or interfaces configured in an electronic device according to embodiments of the present invention;

fig. 25A to 25B are schematic diagrams illustrating network instant messaging and mobile phone network communication modes according to an embodiment of the present invention;

FIGS. 26A-26C are schematic diagrams of a first contact communication interface of a "single card display mode" and a "communication record display mode" that can be switched between according to a method of an embodiment of the present invention

Fig. 27 is a front view of a cradle and a separate terminal communication device not combined with a first mobile terminal according to an embodiment of the present invention;

fig. 28 is a front view schematically illustrating a cradle and a terminal communication device combined with a first mobile terminal according to an embodiment of the present invention;

fig. 29 is a rear view schematically illustrating a configuration of a terminal communication apparatus in which a cradle and a first mobile terminal are combined according to an embodiment of the present invention;

FIGS. 30A-30E are schematic views of an album application interface provided according to an embodiment of the present invention; the resource providing method of the related embodiment will be described below with reference to the group of drawings;

FIGS. 31A-31C are schematic diagrams of an application interface for providing a calendar, time and weather forecast according to an embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 32a is a schematic structural diagram of another physical keyboard according to an embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 32b is a schematic illustration of a detailed configuration of an alternative implementation of the toggle key shown in FIG. 32 a;

FIG. 32c is a schematic view of an operation corresponding to the toggle key provided in the embodiment of FIG. 32 a;

FIG. 33 is a diagram illustrating a structure of yet another physical keyboard according to an embodiment of the present invention;

fig. 34 is a schematic structural diagram of a direction key for selecting a contact according to an embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 35 is a flowchart illustrating a resource provisioning method according to an embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 36 shows a flow diagram of a resource provisioning method according to an embodiment of the invention;

FIG. 37 shows a schematic view of presenting multiple interactive interfaces simultaneously on a foldable display of an electronic device, according to an embodiment of the invention.

Detailed Description

In order to make the objects, technical solutions and advantages of the embodiments of the present invention clearer, the technical solutions in the embodiments of the present invention will be clearly and completely described below with reference to the drawings in the embodiments of the present invention, and it is obvious that the described embodiments are some, but not all, embodiments of the present invention. All other embodiments, which can be derived by a person skilled in the art from the embodiments given herein without making any creative effort, shall fall within the protection scope of the present invention.

The terminology used in the embodiments of the invention is for the purpose of describing particular embodiments only and is not intended to be limiting of the invention. As used in the examples of the present invention and the appended claims, the singular forms "a", "an", and "the" are intended to include the plural forms as well, unless the context clearly indicates otherwise, and "a plurality" typically includes at least two.

It should be understood that the term "and/or" as used herein is merely one type of association that describes an associated object, meaning that three relationships may exist, e.g., a and/or B may mean: a exists alone, A and B exist simultaneously, and B exists alone. In addition, the character "/" herein generally indicates that the former and latter related objects are in an "or" relationship.

The words "if", as used herein, may be interpreted as "at … …" or "at … …" or "in response to a determination" or "in response to a detection", depending on the context. Similarly, "when … …" or "when … …" in some embodiments may also be interpreted as conditional assumptions such as "if", "like", etc., depending on context. Similarly, the phrases "if determined" or "if detected (a stated condition or event)" may be interpreted as "when determined" or "in response to a determination" or "when detected (a stated condition or event)" or "in response to a detection (a stated condition or event)", depending on the context.

It is also noted that the terms "comprises," "comprising," or any other variation thereof, are intended to cover a non-exclusive inclusion, such that a good or system that comprises a list of elements does not include only those elements but may include other elements not expressly listed or inherent to such good or system. Without further limitation, elements recited by the phrase "comprising an … …" do not exclude the presence of additional like elements in a commodity or system that includes such elements.

Embodiments of electronic devices, user interfaces for such devices, and associated processes for using such devices are described. In some embodiments, the device is a portable communication device (such as a mobile phone) that also contains other functionality, such as PDA and/or music player functionality. Exemplary embodiments of portable multifunction devices include, but are not limited to, other portable electronic devices such as laptop or tablet computers with touch-sensitive surfaces (e.g., touch screen displays and/or touch pads). It should also be understood that in some embodiments, the device is not a portable communication device or communicator, but is a desktop computer with a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touch screen display and/or touchpad).

In some embodiments discussed below, an electronic device is described that includes a display and a touch-sensitive surface. However, it should be understood that the computing device may include one or more other physical user interface devices, such as a physical keyboard, mouse, and/or joystick.

In addition to communication applications such as telephony applications, video conferencing applications, or instant messaging applications, devices may support various applications such as one or more of the following: a note taking application, a drawing application, a presentation application, a word processing application, a health management application, a gaming application, an email application, an exercise support application, a photo management application, a digital camera application, a digital video recorder application, a web browsing application, a digital music player application, and/or a digital video player application.

In addition, the sequence of steps in each method embodiment described below is only an example and is not strictly limited.

Several headings of the present application, for example,"Menu interface universally suitable for switching various application interfaces", "interface and main interface configuration"Menu interface universally applicable to switching of various application interfaces"),"integrated interactive interface", "some embodiments of the first resource providing method", "some embodiments of the second resource providing method", "highly operable electronic device", "button and host separable design", "key/button layout and morphology and function thereof", "cross-interface graphic element providing method and device", "single card display", "integrally storing multiple communication network information for a contact in a single program", "split electronic device with a cradle", "switching between internet mode and mobile phone mode", "integrated communication over multiple networks", etc., respectively, describe several relatively independent aspects of some embodiments of the present invention or several relatively independent modules, which may be combined arbitrarily to form further variants, and only some of these variants are schematically illustrated in the present application, but not to preclude more diverse combinations among the several modules described above or with other embodiments of the invention. For example, all embodiments under the heading "integrated interactive interface", "some embodiments of the first resource providing method", etc., and the modules and variations of the modules involved therein, may be correspondingly applicable to other embodiments in the present application. The combination possibility between these embodiments and between the modules of the embodiments will not be described in detail.

Interface and Main interface configuration

The inventor finds that electronic devices such as mobile phones and software installed in communication devices in the prior art are diversified, and information such as contact information and contact group information in instant messaging software installed in the mobile phone and contact information stored in a dialing application built in a system is stored independently, or communication information generated by a short message service, a call record generated by the dialing application and communication information of a data service class generated by the instant messaging software are stored in different application programs. Information stored in the different applications is redundant in the mobile phone, and a user often needs to access the different software applications classified by functionality through different interaction portals, so that a variety of interaction portal interface elements, software resources such as functionality (functionality) and utility (utility), communication resources such as communication network capability (availability), and related information need to be integrated, thereby improving accessibility (accessibility) of communication information and application information in the mobile phone, and accessibility (accessibility) of applications and communication contacts in the electronic device, such as contacts in an independent contact or a contact group, applications of different functional categories and related information thereof, and also simplifying hierarchical interaction operations of electronic devices or communication devices loaded with diversified application software such as mobile phones, and improving operability of the electronic device or the communication apparatus. The prior art lacks of prejudgment and corresponding solving means for the technical problems or potential requirements.

Moreover, in the interaction of the electronic devices including the electronic device such as a mobile phone, which unifies and provides the redundant information for a single contact, high operability and accessibility are lacked, so that the user can access the communication information with the single contact through the single contact interface or establish communication with the single contact.

In one embodiment of the invention, a resource providing method for an electronic device is provided, wherein the electronic device comprises a communication operation interface associated with at least one communication network and at least one interface which can be output through a display. The resource providing method according to this embodiment includes two steps: step 1), presenting a communication interface aiming at a first contact group in at least one interface on a display, wherein the first contact group communication interface comprises a message area; and step 2), responding to the operation of the user on the communication operation interface, and outputting a plurality of communication information with the first contact group through the at least one communication network through the message area.

Optionally, the first contact group in the above embodiments may include only a single contact, or may also include two or more contacts. The former case corresponds to a communication interaction between the user of the electronic device and the first contact. This can be understood by referring to fig. 24C and 26C and the related embodiments thereof, and fig. 24B and 26A and the related embodiments thereof, which are described below.

In general, in the field of'integration interactive interface', 'single card display', 'integrated communication based on multi-network'In the methods according to some embodiments of the present invention, the communication between the user of the electronic device and the first contact is taken as an example, and a description is given to a related resource providing method, a configuration method of a communication interface of the first contact, or the electronic device. But it can be understood that: the following methods or apparatuses for the embodiments between the user and the first contact are also applicable to the communication interaction between the user and the first contact group, and the resource providing method, the configuration method of the communication interface of the first contact group, or the electronic apparatus involved in the communication interaction. Vice versa, the method or device for the embodiments between the user and the first contact group are also applicable to the resource providing method, the configuration method of the first contact communication interface or the electronic device for the communication interaction between the user and the first contact, and the resource providing method, the configuration method of the first contact communication interface, and the electronic device for the communication interaction.

Optionally, in general, in the context of'integration interactive interface', 'single card display', 'integrated communication based on multi-network'In some embodiments of the method according to the present invention, the communication operation interface configured in the electronic device, or may also be referred to as a communication interface element, may be implemented in hardware or software, and in some embodiments of the method according to the present invention, the communication operation interface may be a key set provided in the form of software on the first contact communication interface virtually or a key set provided in the form of entity on the electronic device, and functions of the two correspond to each other, and may be separately configured in software and hardware of the electronic device, or may be configured in the electronic device at the same time for a user to arbitrarily select hardware or softwareThe method is used for carrying out communication interaction with the electronic equipment. Specifically, the virtual key set of the former is generally a virtual key and a button on a communication interface, and the physical key set of the latter can be disposed on the electronic device housing in a hardware manner, and both of the two human-machine interfaces can be operated by a user to establish communication. And at least one communication may correspond to a communication of the same service nature, such as a communication of a data service, or may correspond to a plurality of communications of different service nature.

The resource providing method according to the embodiment of the present invention may be run in some electronic devices or communication apparatuses or be used in combination with application programs therein, and in some embodiments, a mobile phone, a smart mobile device, and the like will be taken as an example for description.

Although the architecture of an operating system, such as an IOS or android, applied to a mobile device, especially an intelligent mobile device, mostly originates from a computer operating system, that is, a logical architecture mainly based on a "platform + program", the architecture is closer to the technical essence of a computer, but a design framework that different independent applications are configured in a functional group-differentiated manner is adopted, and each application also corresponds to a different interaction operation level, and for users including but not limited to middle-aged and elderly people, the cognitive ability and the acceptance of the configuration logic of the application program of the virtual abstraction are sometimes low.

The resource providing method provided by the embodiment of the invention provides resource allocation of an interface by taking the user and the contact person thereof as the center and taking user interaction as guidance in an integrated mode. In some embodiments described below, simplified User Interfaces (UIs) and related functional components are constructed, in other words, the interaction operations and corresponding functions of the electronic device and the communication apparatus such as a mobile phone are redefined, and the interaction operation hierarchy is simplified by using "the User and the contact in the interpersonal relationship thereof" as a guide and using a wireless data transmission network and the internet as a main communication medium, so that the electronic device has high operability and usability for the User due to the operation of the resource providing method, and thus, the User also obtains accessibility (accessibility) for related information and resources.

Fig. 21 is a flowchart illustrating a resource providing method for an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention, and fig. 22 is a diagram illustrating a correspondence relationship between at least one interface configured in the electronic device and at least one option presented on a display according to an embodiment of the present invention. The following pair of FIGS. 21 and 22 includes"Single card display" and "multi-network based display Integrated communication of networks "The method of some embodiments of the present invention, including the title related embodiments, may include three steps: step 2501, step 2502 and step 2503.

In step 2501, a communication interface 26-Contact for a first Contact of at least one interface 2604 is presented on the display, wherein the first Contact communication interface includes a message area (not shown).

In step 2502, a plurality of communication information with the first contact via at least one communication network is output through the message area in response to a user's manipulation of a communication manipulation interface (not shown in the drawings). The plurality of communication information may include audio messages or video messages, the messages may be marked in a message area as a communication record and output externally through the message area for a user to browse or access, and furthermore, the audio messages may be further output to a loudspeaker to output externally in an audio manner in response to an access operation of the user to the audio messages through the message area.

In step 2503, at least one option 2603 is provided via the display, the at least one option 2603 being configured in an abbreviated form and being respectively associated with at least one interface 2604.

Optionally, compriseSingle card display and integrated communication based on multiple networks "In methods of some embodiments of the invention, including title related embodiments, the association between at least one option 2603 and at least one interface 2604 may be embodied as: the at least one option 2603 corresponds to the at least one interface 2604, and the at least one option 2603 can output the above through the display in response to the user's operationOf the at least one interface 2604. The correspondence of the at least one option 2603 and the at least one interface 2604 can refer to the association shown by the arrow in fig. 22, and the one or more interfaces 2604 can be substantially independent of each other.

In addition, since at least one option represents at least one interface in an abbreviated form respectively, the abbreviated menu item can present more options such as contacts, applications and the like for the user on a smaller scale on the current interface, so that the user can also globally know other available options such as communication contacts, application programs and the like through the current interface, and has a navigation function for selecting and positioning the client in a plurality of application options configured by the electronic device. Of course, alternatively, the program in the electronic device may also be executable by the processor unit to: the presentation of the at least one option is cancelled in response to a real-time response event occurring at the electronic device. When the real-time response event occurs, a plurality of options are not required to be displayed in a navigation mode at the bottom of the display, and the cancellation of the display of the plurality of options can also provide larger screen display space for the real-time response event. And after the online video or audio call is ended, the plurality of options for providing the navigation function at the periphery of the display can be recovered. Generally, the real-time response event includes an event that does not allow the user to perform a delayed response, such as an online telephone call, and the short message does not belong to the real-time response event because the processing can be delayed.

Of course, it is understood that other interfaces may be configured in the electronic device in addition to the at least one interface 2604, and that the other interfaces may not have corresponding options in the at least one option 2603, and vice versa. But this does not preclude the associative and further one-to-one correspondence between the at least one interface 2604 and the at least one option 2603.

Here, it should be noted that at least one of the interface 2604's associated resources is configured in the electronic device, or in a remote server, at least one of the options 2603 can be viewed as a shortcut-like icon presented on the display for selection by the user, while at least one of the options 2603 points to or is associated with the respective associated resource. Thus, when the user selects the at least one option 2603 on the display, the electronic device invokes or runs the associated resource associated with the at least one option 2603, thereby outputting at least one interface 2604 corresponding to the at least one option 2603 through the display. The related resource corresponding to each of the at least one option 2603 may also be referred to as at least one object (not shown in the figure). The at least one object is optionally an executable program resource located in a background or remote server of the electronic device, e.g., a first option of the at least one option 2603 may include addressing information such as a local storage path or a network address of the associated resource. When a first option, such as a first contact icon, of the at least one option 2603 is selected by the user, a first object, such as first contact related information or an (addressed) executable resource, of the at least one object is loaded, thereby outputting, via the display, a first interface, such as a first contact communication interface, of the at least one interface 2604. When the first option is a first contact icon and the corresponding first object is a communication program, the first option may further include a communication method of the first contact, or the first option is associated with the communication method of the first contact, such as a phone number or a unique Identification (ID) for instant messaging, which is also applicable to other embodiments. Of course, alternatively, the numerical arrangement of the telephone number, if unique, may also serve as an identification code, a login number, for instant communications, both being identical in form but used by the electronic device to establish communications via different communication networks. At least one interface 2604 is triggered by user selection of at least one option 2603 or user interface switching of a communication interface, application interface, etc., via output of the display.

In summary, optionally, the at least one option configured in the electronic device includes one or more of a contact option, a contact group option, a subscription number option, and an application option. Wherein the options for the application include a program name and/or a program icon. The options for the contact include an image and/or abbreviation of the contact. Further, the contact options further include an operating address of a communication application associated with the contact, a contact address of the contact, and at least one of: name, identity, relationship to the user of the second terminal, name to the user of the second terminal, nickname. The options for an application also include the running address, remote or local, of the associated application.

The at least one option 2603 has a ranking order on the display that is formed by a user interacting with the electronic device to add or sort the at least one option 2603, or by a backdoor program logged in by a server or another electronic device that is remote to set the ranking order of the at least one option 2603. Whether or not at least one option 2603 is presented to the user through, for example, the bottom region of the display, at least one object can be independently set in its output order through the display. For example, after outputting a first interface corresponding to the first object, for example, the interface 26-Contact, through the display, the other interfaces may be sequentially output in the predetermined order described above in response to the user switching operation through repeated sliding of the interface output area in the middle of the display, for example, in a single direction of an Arrow 26-Arrow in the figure. At least one interface 2604 has a one-to-one correspondence with at least one object stored locally or remotely. Optionally, the at least one object may include at least one contact information, and the at least one interface may also include at least one contact interface corresponding to the at least one contact information. Here, the relationship between the configuration order of the at least one option on the display, the at least one object, and the possible configuration order of the at least one interface may also be applied in the method or apparatus of some embodiments described below, and may not be described in detail herein.

At least one interface, such as interface 26-Contact, interface 26-Album, interface 26-Group, etc., that may be output via the display 2601 of the electronic device 2600, resources from at least one object configured in the electronic device represent the at least one object (not shown) in a visual manner on the display 2601. And the at least one object may include, but is not limited to: contact information for communication, contact group information, various applications, such as a system-built applet like a photo album, or access entry information or link information for a third party independent program, etc. These one or more options may be output via the display 2601 in the form of respective corresponding interfaces, such as a first Contact communication interface 26-Contact, an Album application interface 26-Album, a Contact Group communication interface 26-Group, and so forth.

Optionally, compriseSingle card display and integrated communication based on multiple networks "In the method or the electronic device according to some embodiments of the present invention including the title-related embodiment, the method may further include: in response to a user's switching operation for at least one option 2603, the at least one option 2603 is presented on the display 2601 part by part (a part by part). It is to be appreciated that the toggle operation for the at least one option 2603 can include a swipe gesture or the like for the region in which the at least one option 2603 is located.

Optionally, compriseSingle card display and integrated communication based on multiple networks "In some embodiments of the method or electronic device of the present invention, as shown in fig. 22, at least one option 2603 is arranged in a single row (single row) at the top/bottom of the display or in a single column beside the display, wherein the horizontal bar-shaped area occupied by the options of the single row on the display can be referred to as a menu area or a single row area 2602. Taking at least one option 2603 arranged in a single row, as shown in fig. 22, the single row of options is disposed laterally at the bottom of the display, and the method of this embodiment further comprises the steps of: in response to a user's switching operation for the single-line region 2602, at least one option 2603 is presented by moving the single-line region 2602 uniformly portion by portion.

Optionally, compriseSingle card display and integrated communication based on multiple networks "Methods or electronic devices of some embodiments of the invention including title-related embodiments, the at least one option 2603 may be divided substantially equally into a plurality of groups, with a first group of options first arranged in a single row at the bottom of the display, in response to a user toggling for the single row region 2602In this way, the plurality of sets of options sequentially move in the direction of the user's slide operation or the like, and are presented to the user sequentially through the single-line region 2602. As shown in fig. 22, the first set of options includes a first option 26a, a second option 26b, a third option 26c, and a fourth option 26d, wherein the first option 26a corresponds to the communication interface 26-Contact of the first Contact, the second option 26b corresponds to the Album application interface 26-Album, the third option 26c and the fourth option 26d also correspond to two interfaces (not shown in the figure) of the at least one interface 2604, respectively, and the fifth option 26e corresponds to the Group communication interface 26-Group. The first set of options is arranged in a single row region 2602 at the bottom of the display; or in a single column (not shown) arranged beside the display, in response to a user switching operation for the first group of options, a second group of options of the at least one option is switched and presented in a single row of regions, the second group of options including the fifth option 26e and three options (not shown in the figure) subsequent to the fifth option. The switching operation here may be a sliding operation to the left or the right, which will not be described in detail below. Specifically, the step of switching and presenting the first group of options and the second group of options in the at least one option through the single-row area may include: the first option 26a, the second option 26b, the third option 26c, and the fourth option 26d are collectively moved in the direction of the sliding operation of the user indicated by directional Arrow 26-Arrow in fig. 22, thereby successively presenting the second group of options, i.e., the fifth option 26e and three options subsequent thereto. From another aspect, the step of switching and presenting the first group of options and the second group of options in the at least one option through the single-line region may further include: moving the first option 26a, the second option 26b, the third option 26c, and the fourth option 26d in the direction of the sliding operation shown by the Arrow 26-Arrow to cancel the presentation of the first option 26a, the second option 26b, the third option 26c, and the fourth option 26d one by one at the edge of the display, and continuing with the first group of options, moving the second group of options, headed by the fifth option 26e, part by part into the single row region 2602. In yet another aspect, the step of switching the presentation of the first set of options and the second set of options in the at least one option through the single-line region further comprises: the first option 26a, the second option 26b, the third option 26c, and the fourth option 26d are visually displayed in the direction of the sliding operation indicated by the Arrow 26-ArrowUp, the display area of the display is sequentially moved out, and the second group of options, headed by the fifth option 26e, is moved into the single row region 2602 following the first group of options.

Of course, the option 26d is the last option in the first group, and if the current interface is the interface corresponding to the option 26d and the option 26d is presented differently in form as the current option, in this case, the electronic device may also, in response to a switching operation of the user for sliding left on the communication interface or the application interface corresponding to the option 26d, switch to present a second group of options in at least one option in the single-line region, differentiate the first option 26e of the second group of options in form as the current option, and load the communication interface or the application interface corresponding to the option 26e in the interface.

It is worth noting that: comprises thatSingle card display and integrated communication based on multiple networks "In some embodiments of the method or electronic device of the present invention including the title related embodiment, the plurality of options may be arranged in a single row and moved and presented on the display Portion by Portion (the Portion by Portion), wherein the speed of the moving process may correspond to the speed of the user operation gesture, and the unit of the movement is a Portion (Portion) or a group of the plurality of options, which allows the user to clearly distinguish the next group of non-browsed options from the previous group of browsed options and browse all the options regularly. Meanwhile, the above set of options or a part of the options may include 1 to 10 options, and for a general mobile phone, optionally 3 to 6 options, such as 4 options in the above embodiment. For mobile terminals such as tablet computers configured with larger displays, each set or portion of options may include a greater number of options. Of course, the number of options included in each section or each group is preferably the same.

Alternatively, the single row of region 2602 may be a region at the top or bottom of the display where the plurality of options configured as a single row are located. Alternatively, the single line region 2602 can also be understood as a region within the outline (outline) of the pixels or locations covered by the plurality of options on the display, which does not substantially vary with the plurality of options, such as a lateral direction at the bottom of the displayA strip-like region having a width in the longitudinal direction (as indicated by the arrow in fig. 22) of about 0.5 cm to 3.5 cm, preferably 1.5cm to 2 cm. The single line region 2602 is located laterally at the bottom of the display and does not occupy the main display or interaction area of the display, and also facilitates the user's hand-held operation without interfering with the user's main interaction behavior. Through the single-line region 2602, the user can apply a switching operation including a slide operation to one or more options at the bottom of the display, and the switching operation of the user to the main display region or the interactive region of the display and the switching operation to the single-line region have different effects, as described in detail in the following"Menu interface universally applicable to switching of various application interfaces"),Description in related embodiments under the heading "interface and Main interface configuration". The "main display area of the display" or the "main interaction area" may include a portion of the first contact communication interface, or a portion of the display other than the menu area or the single line/single line area, which will not be described herein again.

Alternatively, the single-line region 2602 may be used explicitly (explicit) or implicitly (explicit) as a menu region, and correspondingly, at least one of the

options

26a, 26b, 26c, 26d may be defined as four menu items accommodated in the menu region. Furthermore, it should be understood that some of the menu areas provided on the display herein and some of the interface elements of the methods or devices of some of the embodiments described below that are configured on the display are virtual rather than physical and are not described in detail below. Most of the embodiments herein are that the electronic device moves the multiple options presenting the menu area in response to an operation gesture such as sliding of the menu area by a user, and as a modification, the electronic device may also move the multiple options presenting the menu area in response to an operation of a directional key provided on an entity of the electronic device by a user, and a specific modification may be referred to in this application' is provided with Separable electronic apparatus of base "The following description of the embodiments is entitled. And will not be described in detail herein.

It can be understood that: the motion is relative, although from a sensory point of view a set of serialized (a series of)

options

26a, 26b, 26c, 26d is presented in the menu area moving in the direction of the switching operation in response to the switching operation by the user, and can be viewed as a slidable window of the menu area moving relative to the string of options in the opposite direction to the switching operation to present the string of options part by part. Correspondingly, in another aspect of the above embodiment, the menu region or the single row region 2602 disposed laterally at the bottom of the display can be regarded as a sliding window relative to the plurality of options, first queue the first four

options

26a, 26b, 26c, 26d in the sliding window, and then the electronic device can slide and present the first four

options

26a, 26b, 26c, 26d and the subsequent other options beginning with the option 26e through the sliding window in response to the user's switching operation for the sliding window. Of course, the option 26e and its subsequent options are also presented part by part in a queue through a sliding window, and these

options

26a, 26b, 26c, 26d, 26e form a sort order after being queued in the menu area or single row area 2602 at the bottom of the display.

Alternatively, the user's switching operation for the sliding window may be a sliding operation on the single-row region 2603, and the size of the sliding window is the same as the step size of the sliding, and each of the sliding window is 3 to 6 options, for example, 4 contact options or 5 application options.

Comprises thatSingle card display and integrated communication based on multiple networks "In some embodiments of the method according to the present invention, the thumbnail menu items are disposed at the bottom of the display, and the communication interface or the application interface is disposed in the middle of the display and has a corresponding relationship. The communication application interface and the first application interface can be generally positioned in the middle of the display, occupy larger area, and provide a main area for a user to identify and operate, the communication interface can be slid to switch one content at a time, and the focus option in at least one option in the menu area, namely the current option, is synchronously changed to correspond to the currently displayed interface in the middle of the display.

The bottom or lower part of the screen is a menu area, one page of options in the menu, for example, 5 menu items, can be switched left and right by sliding the menu area on the screen, the option clicked by the user can be determined as a new focus option in the menu area or the single-line area 2602 in response to the click operation of the user, and a corresponding communication interface or application interface is loaded in the middle of the display. The abbreviated menu items can present more options of contacts, applications and the like to the user in a small scale, have a navigation function, and can switch a plurality of contact options and application options in batches by taking a group as a unit in response to one sliding operation of the user, so that the method is beneficial to the user to quickly browse or select the contacts and the like which the user desires to communicate.

Comprises thatSingle card display and integrated communication based on multiple networks "In methods or electronic devices of some embodiments of the invention, including title-related embodiments, the at least one option 2603 further includes a second option 26 b. In the method: in response to the user's selection of the second option 26b in the single line region 2602, the first Contact communication interface 26-Contact corresponding to the first option 26a is switched on the display to the interface 26-Album corresponding to the second option, and synchronously the focus display is shifted from the first option 26a to the second option 26b, i.e., the second option is differentiated in form in the single line region.

Of course, the above-mentioned focus options and current interface switching are also applicable to the cross-Group option selection, for example, the user switches the first Group option to the second Group option with 26e as the head in the single-row region 2602 by a sliding operation, and at this time, the first Contact communication interface 26-Contact corresponding to the option 26a in the first Group option may still be displayed in the interface 2601, where the electronic device may switch the first Contact communication interface to the Contact Group interface 26-Group corresponding to the option 26e on the display in response to the user clicking the fifth option 26 e. And synchronously, the option 26e is presented in a single-line region in a differentiated manner as a focus option, or a current option, that is, an option corresponding to the interface currently displayed on the display.

Fig. 23A and 23B are schematic diagrams illustrating switching between two interfaces configured in an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in fig. 23A, according to the personal relationship between the current contact and the user, the nickname of the current contact is "son", and 5 options are provided in a single row in a thumbnail form in a menu area laterally arranged at the bottom of the display, wherein a first option 2703-1 corresponding to "son" is highlighted, for example, an outline of a thumbnail of the option is highlighted. The current contact communication interface 2701 is also loaded with profile information for "son". Virtual communication keys 2702 associated with one or more communication networks are also provided on the current contact communication interface 2701 for operation by a user to establish communication through the one or more communication networks to generate communication information, and a message area 2704 is also provided on the current contact communication interface 2701 for outputting communication information between the user and the "son".

Comprises thatSingle card display and integrated communication based on multiple networks "In some embodiments of the method or the electronic device according to the present invention, the plurality of objects have a plurality of interfaces corresponding to the plurality of objects one to one, for example, a first contact object and a corresponding first contact communication interface, an album application object and a corresponding album application interface, and the like. These interfaces are generally output through the middle of the display, occupy a large area, and form a main area for the user to recognize and operate. The multiple objects are relatively independent, the multiple corresponding interfaces are output on the display to provide users with access to the objects, deep functions of the corresponding objects are called according to the operation of the users on the interfaces, and further operation and skip sub-interfaces are presented on the display. The interfaces corresponding to the objects can be basically independent from each other and can be switchably output on a display for a user to access. The switching between these interfaces, in some of the above embodiments the method, is performed by the user by manipulating a menu area of the navigation function. In some embodiment methods described below, switching between multiple interfaces is performed by enabling a user to directly apply a switching operation to a communication interface, an application interface and the like.

Comprises thatSingle card display and integrated communication based on multiple networks "In some embodiments of the method according to the above-mentioned embodiments, the electronic device may switch the current contact communication interface to an interface corresponding to an adjacent object of the current contact in the at least one object in response to a single switching operation of the user with respect to the communication interface of the current contact, for example, a single leftward or rightward sliding gesture operation. Wherein an output order in which the at least one object is output in the form of an interface through the display in response to a predetermined gesture by the user has been predefined. And if a menu area is provided on the display, when the communication interface of the current contact person is switched by the electronic equipment, the corresponding options of the switched latest current contact person in the menu area can be set in a differentiated mode basically and synchronously. Preferably, the current options in the menu area may be differentiated in form, so that the user may more conveniently recognize from the menu area.

Comprises thatSingle card display and integrated communication based on multiple networks "In some embodiments of the method of the present invention, including the title related embodiments, the electronic device may toggle the second contact communication interface, which is presented on the display corresponding to the second option 2703-2 adjacent to the first option 2703-1 in the single line area 2703, as shown in fig. 23B, in response to a single toggle operation by the user for the first contact communication interface 2701, such as a slide operation to the left as shown by the arrow in fig. 22, with a daughter profile loaded on the communication interface of the second contact, which is nickname "daughter" and may include a nickname of "daughter", a head portrait, a photograph, a telephone number, etc., according to the relationship of the second contact to the user. Correspondingly, message area 2704 is also used to display communication information with "daughter". In response to the switching of the current contact communication interface, the differentiation means in the form of focus presentation, etc. is transferred from the second option 2703-2 to the second option 2703-2 corresponding to "daughter" in the 5 options in the single row area 2703.

Optionally, if the second option 2703-2 for "daughter" is the last valid option in the single-line region 2703, a configuration option is also provided in the single-line region 2703, for example, may be located at a position (not labeled in the figure) after the second option 2703-2. The electronic device may respond to user manipulation of the configuration option to add an icon or the like of a new application, such as a communication application interface for a third contact or an album application, to a blank location (not labeled) in the single row area 2703. When the user selects the newly added option in the single row area 2703, the user interface of the newly added application in the active state may be output via the display for access by the user. Of course, these options and the applications associated with these options may be managed or scheduled by an application manager, which may be launched by a user from a desktop of the electronic device (not shown in the figures) to provide the user with his user interface through the application manager, whose UI may include interface elements such as the single-line area 2703 for accommodating the thumbnail options. The user may launch the associated application or application interface by manipulating these options. The application manager may be configured in the electronic device as a separate application program independent of the operating system.

Here, it should be noted that: in some embodiments, the user of the electronic device configured with the plurality of applications or the plurality of contact information may be an elderly person. Thus, optionally, the installation portal for these applications is deployed at a remote second terminal, the second electronic device is operated by a professional user of the other electronic device (e.g., a young adult who is a child of the elderly person) and the plurality of applications in the electronic device of the embodiments of the present invention are remotely installed, uninstalled or otherwise maintained through a communication link between the electronic device and the second electronic device (optionally via a server). Of course, after installing/deleting an application program in the electronic device or adding contact information, the professional user may also perform corresponding settings such as adding and deleting for menu items presented on the display of the electronic device used by the elderly by operating corresponding interfaces and entries on the second electronic device, in which case, configuration options for adding menu items do not need to be provided in the option area in the embodiment. Of course, in addition to remotely configuring menu items, other information in the electronic device may also be edited, customized, and configured remotely. The method further shields the user of the electronic equipment from the Operating System (OS) of the electronic equipment, reduces the cognitive difficulty of the electronic equipment, and improves the accessibility of application programs and information in the electronic equipment.

It should be understood that: regardless of whether the single row area 2703 field and the plurality of options therein are configured as a navigation menu in fig. 23, a plurality of objects (not shown in the drawings) in the electronic apparatus can be independently configured in a predetermined order to be output through the display, based on which the electronic apparatus can respond to a single interface switching operation from the user, such as a left/right sliding operation, and a plurality of interfaces corresponding to the plurality of objects one by one are output according to a predetermined order for user interaction, in other words, in response to a single switching operation of a user for the communication interface of "son", a communication object next to the loading object is switched to a neighboring object of the communication object of the nickname "son" among the plurality of objects configured in advance in sequence, i.e., the "daughter" communication object, and a communication interface corresponding to the "daughter" communication object is presented on the display, as shown in fig. 23B. In summary, a plurality of application interfaces or a plurality of objects provided in the electronic device in association therewith may be arranged in a predetermined order. By applying a continuous switching operation to the communication interface or the application program interface on the display by the user, for example, repeating the above-described leftward sliding gesture on the display, the electronic device outputs a plurality of interfaces one by one through the display in a "predetermined order". The predetermined order may be an output order that the plurality of interfaces are previously given in the electronic device if the menu area or the single line area and the plurality of options therein are not provided on the display; if the display is provided with a single row of regions and a plurality of options therein as a navigation menu, the predetermined order described above may be the order in which the plurality of options are arranged in a single row of the queue. For example, as shown in fig. 22, the current interface is the interface 26-Contact corresponding to the option 26a, and when the user performs a repeated switching operation on the middle portion of the display 2601, for example, a leftward sliding switching gesture, the electronic device 2600 sequentially displays, through the display 2601, the 26-Album corresponding to the option 26b, the interface (not shown in the figure) corresponding to the option 26c, the interface (not shown in the figure) corresponding to the option 26d, and the 26-Group interface corresponding to the option 26 e.

Preferably, after each interface switching on the display, the corresponding options of the currently loaded communication interface or application program interface in the single-row area are presented differently in form, so as to facilitate the user to identify the current options.

Optionally, compriseSingle card display and integrated communication based on multiple networks "In the method or the electronic device according to some embodiments of the present invention, including the title-related embodiment, the objects corresponding to the options one by one may include, but are not limited to: communication information/parameters for one or more contacts and related communication applications, photo album applications, daily information applications, etc., and the plurality of interfaces are interactive interfaces of the corresponding applications.

As above, the multiple options in the single row area 2703, similar to the shortcut, can also be edited by means of foreground interface or back door login to compose the options, or to arrange the order of the configured options. In other words, the method of the above or below embodiment may further include the step of: in response to the user's option add operation, a first contact is added in the electronic device and an identification of the first contact is presented in the single row area 2703 as a navigation menu.

This customization of the contents of the menu area or single line area 2703 allows for extensibility of the contents therein, thereby enhancing navigation of the area. As a contact option, a parameter for the first contact may be included, for example, a unique identification number of the first contact in the electronic device or a software system running therein, or may further include, for example, a telephone number, and a unique identification number (ID) used for instant messaging. At the same time, the first contact option in the menu area is associated with a communication program provided locally or remotely to the electronic device, the first contact option may be located at the top level of the interaction of the entire software system of the electronic device for direct user operation, similar to a shortcut, thus, in response to a user manipulation of the first contact option in the menu area, a corresponding communication application configured within the electronic device is invoked via the shortcut, meanwhile, some parameters for identifying the contact person identity are transferred to the related communication application program, the communication application program is started and the related communication function is executed aiming at the first contact person corresponding to the transferred parameters, so that the related information of the first contact, including the profile information and the communication information between the user and the first contact, etc., is presented through the communication interface on the display. The above-mentioned parameter for identifying the contact identity includes, but is not limited to, the item mentioned under the heading "integrally store multiple communication network information for a contact in a single program", and of course, in addition to the information/parameters mentioned in the heading, such as a contact telephone number applicable to a mobile telephone network, an identification code (ID) applicable to instant messaging software, and the like, other parameters or information representing a contact may be set, and one of the purposes of these parameters/information is to enable a communication application program to load a communication interface of a corresponding contact according to these parameters/information, so as to enable a user to establish communication with the contact through the communication interface, and the specific form of the parameter/information does not limit the present invention.

Optionally, compriseSingle card display and integrated communication based on multiple networks "In some embodiments of the method or electronic device of the present invention, including the title-related embodiments, at least one interface 2604 or at least one option 2602 belongs to a single program, or at least one interface 2604, although partially deployed in a remote server, is ultimately provided by a program call to a single program in the electronic device. A conventional operating system such as android can be customized to integrate part of programs related to the communication interface into the operating system of the electronic device to form a single program at a system level, and a program component to which the communication application interface belongs is used as an operating system User Interface (UI), and a plurality of interfaces in the single program are presented to a user at the first time after the completion of the startup. The single program may be run during a startup phase of the electronic device, thereby including the first contact communication interface as described aboveAt least one interface 2604 including the album application interface and the like is automatically loaded in a switchable manner at the top layer of the interaction hierarchy of the whole software system of the electronic device for the user to directly operate after the electronic device is started, which improves the accessibility of the communication resource and reduces the interaction complexity of the user in the interaction process of obtaining the related communication resource and application resource. As shown in fig. 22, a plurality of interfaces 2604 are automatically loaded on the interactive top layer of the electronic device after the electronic device is started, and are directly operated by the user after the electronic device is started, and are switched in parallel between the interface 26-Contact, the interface 26-Album, the interface 26-Group, and the access to the different applications through horizontal sliding and other switching operations. This provides a new way for the user to access the application and gives the user a new interactive experience.

Optionally, one or more options at the head of the queue (head) of the at least one option may each be set as a Contact option, and correspondingly, the first interface 26-Contact in the at least one interface 2604 not only appears in the top-level interaction of the electronic device, but also is loaded as a Contact communication interface in the electronic device as the first interface after the electronic device is normally operated after being turned on. The accessibility of the communication resources is further improved, and the interaction complexity of the user in the interaction process of acquiring the related communication resources and application resources is reduced.

Comprises thatSingle card display and integrated communication based on multiple networks "Title related embodiments methods or electronic devices of some embodiments of the present invention, including title related embodiments, also support user communication to a group of contacts. Fig. 24A and 24B are schematic diagrams of two switchable interfaces configured in an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention. The plurality of options accommodated in the single row field 2803 in this embodiment includes option 2803-4 for the first group of contacts, option 2803-2 for the second contact. Correspondingly, electronic device 2600 can also toggle presentation of a communication interface (not shown) for the second contact on the display responsive to user selection of option 2803-2 for the second contact or option 2803-4 for the first group of contacts, respectivelyOut) or a communication interface for the first contact group as shown in fig. 24B or fig. 24C. The communication interface of the second contact and the communication interface of the first contact group correspond to the first contact communication interface in form and function, for example, both having

profile information

2805a, 2805b, and a message area 2806 is also provided on each interface for outputting communication information with the second contact or members of the contact group. It should be noted that: comprises "Single card displayThe method or steps for providing interface resources for configuring a communication interface and an application interface for a single contact, which are proposed in the method or device according to the embodiment of the present invention under the heading, can be applied to the contact group herein, and a special case of the contact group includes only two members, namely, a user (user) of an electronic device and a contact.

In fig. 24C, a plurality of pieces of information between the user and the group members of the contact group are output in the message area 2806, and in order to make the relationship between the output interface elements more explicit, the association between the profile information of the first member of the contact group, such as the avatar, and the communication information from the first member in the message area 2806 can be prominently presented on the communication interface, for example, as shown in fig. 24C, the avatar of the second member in the contact group is highlighted in blue, correspondingly, the communication record of the second member, such as the 2 nd, 3 rd and the latest communication record at the bottom in the figure, are also highlighted in blue, since the corresponding communication record and avatar are both highlighted in the same/similar color, thereby enhancing the expression of the relationship between the two to the user, the user can conveniently identify the group members and the corresponding messages. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 24B, message area 2804 is shown for only the latest one of all communication records in the outgoing group, see detail "Single card display"resource providing method, interface configuration method of embodiment under heading. Assuming the most recent communication record is from the group member corresponding to the top-left avatar in profile information 2805b, the avatar 280c of the member in the contact group is usedAnd is displayed near the perimeter of message area 2804 to prompt the user for the sender of the latest communication record. Alternatively, in fig. 24B, as a modification example in which the association between the profile information of the first member and the communication information of the first member is made significant, in response to occurrence of the latest one communication record with the first user, the profile information of the first member of the contact group, for example, the avatar 280c, may be presented in an area where the profile information 2805B is located in an enlarged manner or in a dynamic manner such as a flickering with respect to the avatars of the other members of the contact group (not shown). Relative to the first member, the avatars of other members of the contact group are then presented, either abbreviated or static, in the circular or bar-shaped area in which the profile information 2805b is located, whereby the user may be prompted to: the sender or recipient of the communication record presented in the message area 2804 is the first member. Optionally, the message area 2804 may show, and only shows, the latest communication record from the first member of the contact group from among all the communications with the contact group.

As another variation of the dynamic nearby display of the contact and the corresponding communication record, it is assumed that a latest message in the message area 2806 is always located at the top of the message area 2806, that is, a communication record 2806-1 closest to the position of the profile information 2805a, and correspondingly, in the electronic device, the icons in the profile information 2805a may be dynamically arranged in sequence, and the sender of the latest communication record 2806-1 is always arranged at the first position 2805a-1 of the icon queue in the profile information 2805a, that is, at the leftmost position of the icon queue on the screen, and this position is relatively short from the latest communication record 2806-1, so that the user can visually associate the latest communication record 2806-1 and the corresponding sender's icon or identity information. Of course, it should be understood that alternatively, the latest message may always be located at the bottom of the message area 2806, the avatar queue for the profile information may be located at the bottom of the communication interface, and the avatar of the sender of the latest communication record may be dynamically configured to always be arranged at the first position of the avatar queue to be close to the presentation position of the latest communication record in the message area.

Optionally, compriseSingle card display and integrated communication based on multiple networks "In some embodiments of the method or electronic device of the present invention, including title related embodiments, the single row of menu area 2803 further includes an option for the first application alone (individual) or an option for a set of applications (not shown in the figure); the electronic device may respond to the selection of the option of the first application by the user, and correspondingly switch to the first application interface on the display, as shown in fig. 24D and 24E, which are an application interface for daily information such as time/weather and a photo/photo album application interface, respectively. The electronic device can correspondingly switch to an application collection interface on the display in response to selection of an option of the application collection by a user, and the entries of a plurality of different application programs are collectively shown.

Specifically, through the first application interface on the display in fig. 24D, the electronic device may visually output calendar information and weather information through the first application interface middle region 2904 in response to user operations with respect to the first virtual key in the lower portion and the second virtual key in the middle portion of the first application interface right virtual key group 2902, respectively. And, the electronic device may also output time information audibly or visually through the first application interface middle region 2904 in response to user operation of a third virtual key on the top of the set of virtual keys 2902 on the first application interface.

Specifically, the camera of the electronic device may also be enabled for the user to take a photo or a video in response to the user operating the third virtual key on the upper portion of the virtual key group 2902 on the second application interface through the second application interface for taking a photo/album on the display in fig. 24E. And, in response to user operations on a first virtual key in the lower part and a second virtual key in the middle part of the key set 2902 on the first application interface, respectively, playing related photos or videos through the middle area 2904 of the first application interface, and stopping playing the photos or videos. Optionally, comprise"Single card display", "based on more Integrated communication for networks "Title photoIn the method or the electronic device according to some embodiments of the present invention, a distance between the third virtual key and the first virtual key is greater than a distance between the first virtual key and the second virtual key. The first virtual key and the second virtual key are adjacently arranged. The key layout corresponds to a virtual or physical key group included in the communication operation interface in some other embodiments, which is beneficial to consistency of user experience in performing interaction operations on different interfaces in the method and the electronic device of the related embodiments.

FIGS. 30A-30E are schematic views of an album application interface provided according to an embodiment of the present invention; the resource providing method of the related embodiment will be described below with reference to the set of drawings.

The interface shown in fig. 30A may be used as a main interface for album function, and the interface has a sliding function bar 3603 including a plurality of contacts and a plurality of operable options, such as a virtual key group 3602, for a user to trigger operations related to an album; triggering a play operation option on the interface shown in fig. 30A, for example, a key at the lowest part of the virtual key group 3602, switching to enter the album photo play interface shown in fig. 30B, wherein a plurality of operation options, for example, the virtual key group 3602, are still maintained in the interface for the user to trigger the operation related to the album, and a return option is provided for the user to trigger a return to the album function homepage interface; triggering an album selection option on the interface shown in fig. 30B or fig. 30A to enter the interface shown in fig. 30C for selecting an album to be played, wherein the interface has a plurality of albums for the user to select to play, and providing a return option for the user to trigger to return to an album function homepage interface or an album photo playing interface; triggering a shooting option in the interface shown in fig. 30B or fig. 30A to enter the shooting interface shown in fig. 30D, wherein the interface has options for confirming shooting and switching a camera, and has a return option for a user to trigger to return to an album function homepage interface or an album photo playing interface; fig. 30E shows an interface of a photo storage interface after the interface shown in fig. 30D triggers and confirms the shooting option, where the interface has a storage option for the user to trigger to store the shot photo, and a return option for the user to trigger to return to the shooting interface for shooting again. The white boxes in the above views represent head portraits of single or group contacts, function bar mark pictures, photos, photo album thumbnails, photo shooting pictures and the like.

Comprises thatSingle card display and integrated communication based on multiple networks "In some embodiments of the method or electronic device of the present invention, including the title related embodiments, an album application function may be provided in the first application interface. Correspondingly, the three keys included in the virtual key set 3602 may also be functionally redefined with respect to the functional attributes of the camera interface in the camera application.

Optionally, compriseSingle card display and integrated communication based on multiple networks "In some embodiments of the present invention methods, including the title related embodiments, the electronic device may enable a camera of the electronic device for a user to take a picture or video in response to a user operating a third virtual key located at the uppermost portion of the group of virtual keys 3602 on the first application interface 3604. In response to a user operation on a first virtual key in the lower portion of the virtual key group 3602 on the first application interface 3604, a photo/video is played through the first application interface 3604, and in response to a user operation on a second virtual key in the middle portion of the virtual key group 3602 on the first application interface 3604, the photo/video is stopped playing on the first application interface 3604. Preferably, the photo album application provided by the first application interface 3604 is used to automatically play photos/videos in a slide show manner, and the photo resource of the electronic device can be re-enabled to allow the user to take photos and take photos in response to the user's operation on the third virtual key located at the uppermost portion in the virtual key group 3602 on the first application interface 3604 at any time.

Specifically, the above-mentioned function configuration and interaction manner of the virtual key group 3602 in the triple-key mode can be further explained as follows:

and (3) photographing: in the slideshow state, the camera may be called out in response to the user operating the third virtual key for the uppermost portion of the virtual key group 3602, and the photographing view state is entered as shown in fig. 30D. After the camera is exhaled, this third virtual key of the uppermost set of virtual keys 3602 may be functionally redefined as a take shutter button. In response to the user's operation of the "back" button on the bottom of the first application interface shown in fig. 30D, the slide show of the photo/video shown in fig. 30B may be re-presented on the display, and after pressing the third virtual button redefined as a shutter to take a picture, the third virtual button may be further functionally redefined as a "save picture", where the captured picture may be saved or the photo viewfinder interface of fig. 30D may be rendered without being released in response to the user's operation of the third virtual button labeled "save" shown in fig. 30E or the "back" button on the bottom of the first application interface, respectively.

Pausing: the slide show of the photos/videos is paused. In response to a user operation on a second virtual key located in the middle of the virtual key group 3602 on the first application interface 3604, the photos and videos are paused on the first application interface 3604.

And (3) playing: the slides are automatically launched and the photos in the photo folder are cyclically designated. In response to a user operation on a first virtual key in the lower portion of the virtual key group 3602 on the first application interface 3604, a photo/video is played through the first application interface 3604

In addition to the three keys in the virtual key group 3602, a button 3605 is provided on the first application interface 3604, located between the middle key and the upper button of the virtual key group 3602, substantially in the same column (column) as the three keys of the virtual key group 3602. In response to clicking on the button 3605, or the like, a folder option may be provided at the first application interface 3604, as shown in FIG. 30C. The folder option is used for the user to select the related photo or photo folder targeted by the play interface of the photo/video in fig. 30B, and supports multiple selections of the photo or photo folder, and the photo folder can be created and managed according to parameters such as the shooting date.

FIGS. 31A-31C are schematic diagrams of an application interface for providing a calendar, time and weather forecast according to an embodiment of the present invention; the resource providing method of the related embodiment will be described below with reference to the set of drawings.

The interface shown in fig. 31A may be used as a time function main interface, where the interface has a sliding function bar 3703 that includes a plurality of contacts, and also has a plurality of operable virtual key sets 3702 that include time signals for a user to trigger related operations, and the user triggers a time signal option located above three keys of the virtual key set 3702 to perform voice broadcast on the current time; the weather viewing option in the middle of the interface trigger virtual key set 3702 shown in fig. 31A enters the interface showing the local current weather condition shown in fig. 31B, and a voice broadcast option key may be configured around the current weather condition information in the interface for the user to trigger to perform voice broadcast on the local current weather condition. The interface shown in fig. 31A or 31B triggers a calendar option, such as the lowermost button of virtual button set 3702, to switch to the interface showing the calendar shown in fig. 31C. The white boxes in the above views represent the head portrait of a single or group contact, the tab mark picture, the clock picture, and the like.

In some of the resource providing methods according to the embodiments of the present invention, the first application interface may provide applications of life information and daily information such as weather forecast, calendar and time.

Calendar information 3701 is visually output through a first application interface 3704 in response to a user's operation of a first virtual key on a lower portion of a virtual key group 3702 on the first application interface 3704. Weather information may also be visually output through the first application interface 3704 in response to a user's operation of a second virtual key in the middle of the set of virtual keys 3702 on the first application interface 3704.

Alternatively, in response to a user's operation of a third virtual key on the upper portion of the first application interface 3704, the time information is outputted in an audio broadcasting manner or visually outputted through the first application interface 3704. Further, the time information may reside in the upper half of the first application interface 3704 in a visual manner, as shown in fig. 31A and 31B, and may be further outputted to the user in an audio broadcasting manner in response to the user's operation of the third virtual key on the upper half of the first application interface 3704.

Furthermore, before detecting the operation of the user on the first application interface 3704, prompt information of functions corresponding to the three keys of the virtual key set 3702 may be presented in the middle of the first application interface 3704, and of course, the calendar information in the resource providing method according to the above embodiment may also be displayed in the middle of the first application interface 3704 in response to the operation of the virtual key set 3702 by the user, and the calendar information may occupy most of the area of the middle of the first application interface 3704, and at the same time, the position and the coverage area of the time information on the first application interface 3704 may be dynamically adjusted, for example, to be smaller, as shown in fig. 31C.

The application programs such as the photo album, the weather and the like correspond to independent application options in a plurality of options in a menu area, and are called independent items for short, and independent application interfaces in a plurality of interfaces. In addition to individual items, the plurality of options of the menu area may also include an application collection option, referred to as a collection item.

The independent items, namely contacts, groups, small programs built in the system, such as photo albums, third-party programs, such as YouKu and YouTube, are independent elements, and the user enters the independent items and then enters the corresponding independent programs.

The collection items, and the program (collection item program) associated with a collection item, after being executed, may output a collection item interface through the display, where the interface includes the aforementioned collection of all types of individual items, the number of individual items in the collection is generally 2 or more, and at most, does not generally exceed the area range of a whole page of the mobile phone screen, and after the user enters a collection item, the user expands some individual item lists in the electronic device in the form of an array lattice such as 3x4 or 3x3, as shown in fig. 24F. In conjunction with fig. 22, the collection item interface (also referred to as an identification collection program interface, an icon collection interface, etc. in other embodiments) shown in fig. 24 may be preferentially output through the operating system UI after the electronic device is started, instead of the 26-Contact interface, among the plurality of interfaces arranged on the top of the operating system UI of the electronic device shown in fig. 22. Of course, the item-set interface may also be configured at a subsequent interface position, for example, instead of 26-Group, in association with the option 26e, so that after the electronic device is started, the electronic device preferentially outputs the 26-Contact interface through the display, and the current interface is continuously updated in response to the user's continuous leftward sliding operation on the current interface. After the user completes the 4 th leftward swipe, the Collection item interface is output on the display as the latest current interface. As described above, the collection item program is loaded on the collection item interface generated on the display, similar to the home screen user interface of a general mobile phone, which includes a plurality of application launch icons corresponding to a plurality of applications.

Optionally, in the method or the electronic device according to the embodiment of the present invention described above or below, a single row of menu area 2803 further includes an option for an unknown contact (not shown in the figure); the electronic device may, in response to a user selection of the unknown contact option, switch to present a communication interface for the unknown contact on the display, as shown in fig. 24G, the unknown contact communication interface including a plurality of sets of communication 288 arranged for display, the plurality of sets of communication 288 including 5 sets of communication, each set of communication corresponding to one or more unknown contacts, respectively. For example, the communication set 288-1 may be generated by communicating with a first unknown contact over a communication network, including one or more communication records with the first unknown contact. If the user clicks on the communication set 288-1, the communication interface shown in FIG. 24I is switched on the display and a plurality of communication records between the user and the first unknown contact are output in the message area 284.

Optionally, compriseSingle card display and integrated communication based on multiple networks "In some embodiments of the method or electronic device of the present invention including the title related embodiment, the plurality of options further includes an option for a third set of pages, and correspondingly, the plurality of resources available to the electronic device also includes a third set of pages, the third set of pages being presented by a collective category mainly for communication related options including communication entries and/or dialing application entries for the contacts. Wherein the contact communication portal comprises a communication portal for known contacts and communication of unknown contactsAn inlet. Specifically, as shown, the third aggregated page includes known contacts tab, unknown contacts tab, tags of known contacts tab (text in the figure is identified as: contacts), tags of unknown contacts tab (text in the figure is identified as: strangers), and tags of known contacts tab and unknown contacts tab are arranged in parallel at the top of the third aggregated page.

Optionally, the third aggregated page may further include a tab of a dialer tab, which may be arranged side by side on top of the third aggregated page (not shown in the figure).

Optionally, the third collection page may also include a life number tab, the tab of which may also be configured on top of the third collection page in parallel with the "contacts", "strangers" tab, as shown.

By integrating multiple contacts or multiple contact tabs on the same album leaf, the third album leaf is configured as an overall portal for all contacts to avoid not having an individual contact (e.g., a third contact) separately provided in the options/menu area, in which case the electronic device user cannot directly access the communication resources for the third contact through multiple options in the options area at the bottom of the display. Here, the sum of the options provided by the known contacts tab and the unknown contacts tab, covering a majority of the contacts that may be accessed by the user of the electronic device, may be used as a supplement to one or more of the contact options individually exposed (potentially with high frequency communication needs) in the options area, including options for other contacts than the plurality of contact options individually exposed in the options area of the electronic device configuration.

Optionally, in the illustrated embodiment, the "contacts" tab of the known contacts tab is operable to output the known contacts tab via a display of the electronic device, including a plurality of known contact communication record thumbnail sets displayed in a predefined priority order or in an order such as a time of occurrence of a latest message, each of the known contact communication record thumbnail sets respectively including a corresponding known contact icon/avatar and a latest occurring communication with the known contact. A "stranger" tab of an unknown contact tab operable to provide, via the display, an unknown contact tab including a plurality of abbreviated sets of unknown contacts in an arrangement, each abbreviated set of unknown contacts including an icon of a corresponding unknown contact (e.g., four digits after the unknown contact's phone number and a background color uniquely corresponding to the four digits) and a most recent occurrence of communication with the unknown contact. Similarly, the label of the life number tab is operable to provide the life number tab via a display, the life number tab listing one or more commonly used contacts, typically non-related contacts, including, for example: police, 120 emergency services, etc.

Optionally, the third set of pages includes a dialer tab in addition to the known contacts tab and the unknown contacts tab. Optionally, a tab (not shown) of the dialer tab is juxtaposed on top of the third aggregated page interface with a "contacts" tab and a "strangers" tab operable to output a dialer interface via the third aggregated page, the dialer interface comprising: virtual numeric keyboard, telephone number input box, calling option. To a dial interface.

Optionally, when one of the plurality of abbreviated collections of communication records of the known contact (for example, the communication record of the contact corresponding to the second item at the top in the collection list) on the tab of the known contact is selected (for example, clicked) by the user, the user interface switches to the communication interface corresponding to the contact, for example, the communication interface shown in the figure.

Alternatively, the dialer tabs (not shown), or dialer interfaces, may not be integrated into the third set of pages, but rather configured as a separate user interface. The corresponding dialer options may be configured at a particular location in the option area at the bottom of the display, e.g., at the end of the option area. At the electronic device, the dialing program option is operable by a user to output a dialing interface via the display, as shown, the dialing interface including: virtual numeric keyboard, telephone number input box, calling option. In addition, if the dialing program is configured as a separate user interface, optionally, dialing interface entry options may be configured around the known contact tabs and the unknown contact tabs, and the dialing interface entry options may be operated by the user to turn to a separately configured dialing program interface as shown in the figure for the user to perform operations such as dialing calls.

Optionally, corresponding to the above-mentioned dialing interface, the method of some embodiments further includes the steps of: 1) responding to the click operation of a user through the virtual numeric keyboard, and presenting a corresponding telephone number in a telephone number input box; 2) in response to a user's operation of a call option, a communication targeted/targeted at a telephone number is established through the mobile telephone network.

A diagram illustrating switching between a first contact communication interface at an electronic device and a first contact communication interface with an extensible menu is shown, according to one embodiment of the invention. A first option of the plurality of options is an option for a first contact (e.g. a daughter of a user of the electronic device), the option being associated with a communication program, the first option being operable to invoke the communication program to output a communication interface for the first contact through the display, in other words, in response to operation of the first contact option by the user, to run a communication application to present the communication interface for the first contact on the display, including profile information such as an avatar for the first contact, and a message area. Establishing communication with a first contact through at least one communication network available to the electronic device to generate a plurality of communication information in response to a user operation on the communication key set; and outputting a plurality of communication information through the message area on the first contact communication interface.

Optionally, the first contact communication interface further comprises an expandable button, all keys in the group of keys or a first part of keys or a column arranged in the middle of the right side of the interface, as shown in the figure. The expandable button may be located between a key column formed by a first portion of keys on the communication contact interface and the option area, i.e., below the key column and above the option area. In addition, after the extensible button in the first contact communication interface shown in the figure is operated by the user, the first contact communication interface with the extensible menu shown in the figure is changed into the first contact communication interface with the extensible menu.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the expanded buttons are located in substantially the same column as the key column. Correspondingly, the method of these embodiments further comprises the steps of: in response to a user's selection operation (e.g., clicking) on an expandable button, an expanded menu is presented, which optionally includes at least one of a second part key in the key group, an emoticon option, an album/photo option, a social option (e.g., a red-envelope button), and the like (not labeled in the figure), and objects (e.g., the red envelope, emoticon, photo, and the like described above) selected by the user through the one or more options are all posted in the message area, and these options may be set, for example, at two positions on the left side among the four menu units of the expanded menu. In response to a user's clicking operation on the expand button, the expand menu is preferably presented in a single row in the lateral direction, with the expand menu and expand button being located at the bottom of the display, above the options area, as shown. The second part of keys of the key group included in the expanded menu pop up a communication setup interface when activated, such as an SMS message collection box on the SMS interface as shown in the figure and a "send message" button for sending the collected short message and an online call interface as shown in the figure. When the expression options and the social options are activated, corresponding expression bars or social interface elements are popped up for further operation of the user, as shown in the figure. And in response to relevant operations such as clicking of a second part key, an expression option or a social option by the user, shrinking the expansion menu into an expansion button.

Optionally, the extended menu may further include a menu option for initiating a voice or video call with the current contact when activated, and a menu option for initiating a short message service with the current contact when activated. In other words, the menu option may allow the user to enter text content through a dialog box and establish an SMS service for the text content through the mobile phone network in response to the user click operation. And, the expanded menu may further include a menu option (not shown in the figures) that, when activated, initiates a payment action for the current contact, a menu option (not shown in the figures) that, when activated, initiates a video conference with the current contact and a group of contacts to which the user of the electronic device personally belongs. Here, the second part of keys are configured in the expanded menu, and the expanded menu is contracted into expandable buttons, so that the second part of keys or other social function keys are only presented on the user interface as required, and after the user completes corresponding operations through the keys, the keys can be hidden along with the contraction of the expanded menu. The method reduces the occupation of the display area on the user interface, improves the overall display effect of the elements on the user interface, reduces the complexity of the presentation of the interface elements, keeps the communication entries accessible as much as possible through the user interface, and improves the accessibility of the user interface to a certain extent. Of course, the first part of keys included in the key column on the right side of the user interface may be displayed by the regular premises without being hidden, and the first part of keys may also be provided at an unchanged position on the display across different contact interfaces and even different application interfaces, so that the user can interact with the user interfaces through the first part of keys respectively.

Alternatively, keys of multiple communication functions on the same contact interface may be selectively configured to be associated with different communication networks, which means that multiple keys on the same contact interface may be respectively associated with communication networks of different traffic properties within the same time period. For example, a first key and a second key in a key column formed by the first part of keys are respectively associated with a wireless data transmission network, such as the internet of things, the WLAN or a mobile data network, and the first key and the second key are functionally corresponding. For example, a first key may capture a user audio/video signal via a microphone and or camera in response to a user tap operation and send the audio or video message via a wireless data transmission network. The second key is operable by a user to output an audiovisual message received over the wireless data transmission network via the speaker and/or the display. In addition, a third key of the key column is associated with the mobile telephone network, and the voice telephone service can be established through the mobile telephone network in response to the user clicking operation. The selective configuration of the key groups on the contact interface is also applicable to other related embodiments, and will not be described in detail below.

Optionally, in the method or the electronic device according to the embodiment of the present invention described above or below, the notification region 289 is configured laterally at the top of the display to at least partially present one or more unread notification messages associated with one or more options in the single-line region 283, specifically, some or all of the unread notification messages are communication messages belonging to multiple business properties from a contact, a group of contacts, or the unknown contact mentioned above in multiple options, or some of the unread notification messages may also be messages such as an upgrade alert of an application in multiple options. At least a portion of this unread notification information is presented in the notification area 289, preferably in a manner that presents the most recent one, or in a rotating manner that presents each one, or some number of pieces. Correspondingly, in response to a user's operation of the notification area 289, the notification area 289 is extended on the display in a longitudinal direction as indicated by an arrow in the drawing to form an enlarged notification area 285 to collectively present a plurality of or all of the unread notification information, as shown in fig. 24H. If the user clicks on any of the lines of notification information in the communication collection 285, the communication interface shown in fig. 24I is also switched on the display if the notification information comes from a contact or a group of contacts, and a plurality of communication records between the user and the contact are output in the message area 284. The main area on the display is used to display a communication interface or application interface for the current contact within a certain period of time, and the notification area 289 provided above the display may enable the user to know some communication information, update information, of other contacts or applications than the current contact in time. The notification area or notification bar 289 may include: the format of the notification bar can comprise head portraits and names describing information sources, information abstracts, and information type icons, including information, notifications and the like.

By arranging the notification bar 289 in the top area of the display above the communication interface and the application interface, after unread notification information is received, reminding and accumulating are performed in the notification bar, optionally, the accumulation mode is the newest at the top and the oldest at the bottom, a user can expand all notification information by gestures such as pulling down and clicking the notification bar 289, the clicked information can view the information in an enlarged mode (not shown in the figure) by borrowing the whole display range of the display, and the message can be cleared when the information returns from the message enlarged mode. A soft button 'read all' 285-0 can be provided on the notification bar 289 or on the periphery thereof, all unread messages can be read one by one in order, and the read message can be cleared after the reading is finished; in response to a user dragging/sliding or scrolling a single message to the left through the display, a normally hidden "reply/delete" function entry 285-9 may be displayed, and clicking a "reply" button in the notification bar function entry 285-9 may move to the interface of the contact, group, or applet corresponding to the sender of the message, and in response to a user clicking a "delete" button in the function entry 285-9, the corresponding notification message may be deleted directly from the

notification bar

285, 289, but without deleting the background communication record with the relevant sender. Alternatively, for the external output form of the notification information in the

notification columns

289 and 285, the text or voice-type notification information may directly use the original content, for example, "the technology application software of the companion me has a new version, i.e., is about to be updated for the mobile phone". Other media type notification message content is converted to text for brief reminder, e.g., a message for a video category, which can be presented in text for the video, e.g., "your patent advisor mr. phoenix, Zhao, (contact: 13761182252) sent a video to you," in notification columns 285,289.

The inventor finds that all the instant communication schemes in the prior art require a user to perform complicated hierarchical interactive operation on the communication device and application software therein, but lack a scheme for realizing instant communication through simple hardware operation, and such a missing scheme can allow the user to operate a physical keyboard to trigger a corresponding software program to be executed so as to establish instant communication. Such deletion schemes are schematically illustrated by the following examples.

Key/button layout and its form and function

Fig. 1a is a schematic structural diagram of a physical keyboard according to an embodiment of the present invention, as shown in fig. 1a, the physical keyboard includes a first key 5a21 and a second key 5a22, and optionally, the first key 5a21 and the second key 5a22 are detachable with respect to a communication device main body, such as a mobile phone, and can be disposed on a separate base (not shown in the figure) and connected to a processor in a terminal communication device through a physical interface (not shown in the figure) of a connector between the communication device main body and the base.

The first key 5a21 and the second key 5a22 may be disposed adjacent to each other on the first surface (front surface) or the second surface (side surface) of the housing, for example. The two physical keys can be in the shape of square or round. Of course, the first keys 5a21 and the second keys 5a22 may be disposed separately, for example, one on the first surface of the housing and one on the second surface of the housing; alternatively, the first keys 5a21 and the second keys 5a22 are provided on the same surface of the housing in a dispersed manner. In other alternative variations, the first key 5a21 and the second key 5a22 may be connected together or integrally disposed, and the key arrangement mentioned herein may also be applied to other embodiments of the present invention above or below, and further description thereof will not be repeated.

Wherein the first key 5a21 may issue the first trigger signal to the processor 12 in response to a first single action by the user. At this time, the processor 12 collects a first media signal shorter than a preset time period through the media collecting unit 13 in response to the first trigger signal, and transmits the first media signal through the wireless data transmission network through the wireless data transmission unit 15. Wherein the second key 5a22 may issue a second trigger signal to the processor 12 in response to a second single action by the user. The processor 12 outputs a second media signal received by the wireless data transmission unit 15 via the wireless data transmission network through the media playing unit 14 in response to the second trigger signal.

Wherein the first media signal and the second media signal may respectively include a voice message and/or a video/image message having a duration shorter than a preset duration.

As illustrated in fig. 1a, the first key 5a21 and the second key 5a22 may be keys, and may be coupled to the processor directly or via a physical interface (not shown) and may be detachable from the handset via the physical interface. Thus, in the present embodiment, the first single action may be a long press operation (one press but the duration of the press is long, for example, at least 2 seconds), and the second single action may be a simple operation such as a single press operation (one press and the duration of the press is short, for example, not more than 1 second), a rapid plurality of consecutive press operations, and the like.

In this embodiment, the two physical keys are set so that the user can respectively operate the two physical keys to achieve different communication requirements, such as sending a first media signal and playing a received second media signal.

It should be noted that, in this embodiment, the collection and sending of the first media signal enable the user to realize the communication requirement for the voice message or the audio/video message of the contact through one-key operation, at this time, the processor 12 may respond to the first trigger signal to collect the first media signal with a duration not exceeding a preset duration through the media collection unit 13.

In particular, the processor 12 may control the maximum collection time (i.e. the preset time) for which the media collection unit 13 works once, for example, 1 minute, so that the user can only send the first media data to the contact for 1 minute at most each time, and when the user needs to continue sending, the first operation may be triggered again to the first key 5a 21. In practical applications, taking the first single action as the long-press operation as an example, the user may perform a long-press operation on the first key 5a21 to trigger the collection of the first media data (taking voice as an example), and the user may start speaking after pressing the first key 5a21, at which time the media collection unit 13 starts collecting the voice of the user under the control of the processor 12, and if the user releases the key when the pressed time length has not reached the maximum collection time length, the media collection unit 13 stops collecting under the control of the processor 12, and sends the collected voice to the processor 12. Conversely, if the user has not released the button when the pressed time has reached the maximum collection time, the media collection unit 13 may also stop collection under the control of the processor 12 and send the collected voice to the processor 12.

In this example, after the user performs the first single action on the first key 5a21, the media capturing unit 13 may record the first media signal for a certain time, and then the processor 12 sends out the recorded first media signal, that is, the user may leave a message to the contact in voice.

In practical application, during the process of sending the first media signal, the processor 12 may first perform compression coding processing on the first media signal by using a certain coding standard, such as h.264, further encapsulate the compression coded first media signal according to a certain network transmission protocol, such as a transmission protocol like TCP, UDP, and the like, and send the encapsulated data packet to the opposite-end contact.

In this embodiment, in addition to the first key 5a21 and the second key 5a22 being individually operable to trigger the capturing and sending of the first media signal and the playing of the second media signal, respectively, optionally, the first key 5a21 and the second key 5a22 may issue a third trigger signal to the processor 12 in response to a third operation, the processor 12 initiating an audio-video call via the wireless data transmission network through the wireless data transmission unit 15 in response to the third trigger signal. Wherein the third operation may be a pressing operation simultaneously applied to the first key 5a21 and the second key 5a 22.

Specifically, after the user selects a certain contact in the communication application, the third operation, i.e., the simultaneous pressing of the first key 5a21 and the second key 5a22, is applied to the first key 5a21 and the second key 5a 22. At this time, the first key 5a21 and the second key 5a22 respectively send third trigger signals to the processor 12, and the processor 12 receives the third trigger signals sent by the first key 5a21 and the second key 5a22 respectively at the same time or within a short time interval, so as to initiate an online audio/video call to the corresponding contact.

It is understood that if the contact answers the audio/video call, the processor 12 may control the media collecting unit 13 to start collecting a media signal (referred to as a third media signal) of the user, and send the third media signal collected in real time to the contact side, where the third media signal may be an audio/video signal collected by a microphone and a camera.

To more clearly illustrate that different operations on the first key 5a21 and the second key 5a22 correspond to different communication procedures, as shown in fig. 1b, a correspondence between different operations on the first key 5a21 and the second key 5a22 and different communication procedures is illustrated: the first key 5a21 is pressed for a long time, a first media signal which is shorter than a certain time length is triggered and recorded, and the first media signal is sent after the first media signal is released; performing short-time pressing operation, namely single-time pressing operation on the second key 5a22 to trigger and play the received second media signal; pressing the first key 5a21 and the second key 5a22 simultaneously initiates an audio video call.

Of course, optionally, another key disposed adjacent to the first key 5a21 and the second key 5a22 may also be included in the physical keyboard, and the initiating of the audio/video call may be implemented by performing a short-press operation on the another key.

In summary, the two physical keys (the first key and the second key) provided in the embodiment enable a user to implement communication requirements of voice message leaving, message playing receiving, and online audio/video call by simple operations on the two physical keys.

Fig. 2a is a schematic structural diagram of another physical keyboard according to an embodiment of the present invention, and as shown in fig. 2a, the physical keyboard includes a third key 6a 31.

In this embodiment, the third key 6a31 may send the first trigger signal and the second trigger signal to the processor 12 directly or through a physical interface in response to the first single action and the second single action, respectively.

The processor 12 responds to the first trigger signal, collects a first media signal shorter than a preset time length through the media collecting unit 13, and sends the first media signal through the wireless data transmission network through the wireless data transmission unit 15. The processor 12 outputs a second media signal received by the wireless data transmission unit 15 via the wireless data transmission network through the media playing unit 14 in response to the second trigger signal.

Optionally, the third button 6a31 may also issue a third trigger signal to the processor 13 in response to a third single action. The processor 12 initiates an audio video call via the wireless data transmission network through the wireless data transmission unit 15 in response to the third trigger signal.

In this embodiment, through a single action operation on one physical key, a user can meet the communication requirements of sending a section of media signal, playing the received media signal, and initiating an online audio/video call.

Alternatively, as shown in fig. 2a, the third key 6a31 may be a key, so that the operation performed on the key may include, for example: single press operation, relatively continuous multiple press operation, long press operation. Thus, alternatively, the first operation, the second operation, and the third operation described above may be a long press operation, a single press operation, a multiple press operation, respectively. The response processing logic of the processor 12 after the user triggers different operations may refer to the description in the foregoing embodiments, which is not repeated.

When the third key 6a31 is implemented as a key, to more clearly illustrate that different operations performed on the third key 6a31 correspond to different communication procedures, as shown in fig. 2b, a corresponding relationship between different operations performed on the third key 6a31 and different communication procedures is illustrated: the third key 6a31 is pressed for a long time, a first media signal which is shorter than a certain time length is triggered and recorded, and the voice message is sent after the first media signal is released; performing short-time pressing operation, namely single-time pressing operation on the third key 6a31 to trigger and play the received second media signal; and performing multiple short press operations on the third key 6a31 to initiate an audio and video call.

In summary, with the physical keyboard 11 provided on the communication device according to the embodiment of the present invention, the user only needs to perform simple operations on at least one physical key included in the physical keyboard 11, so as to implement different communication requirements, and while the operation is convenient, the timeliness and reliability of sending a communication message to a contact and the instantaneity of receiving a communication message sent by a contact are also ensured.

Alternatively, as shown in fig. 32a, the third key 6a31 may also be a self-resetting toggle key, comprising at least: the toggle lever, an elastic member supporting the toggle lever below the toggle lever, such that the first operation may be a toggle in a first direction, the second operation may be a toggle in a second direction, and the third operation may be a press in a third direction.

Wherein, toggling in the first direction, toggling in the second direction, and pressing in the third direction along the elastic member may trigger different electrical states on the input port of the processor 12, respectively, so that the processor 12 identifies what operation the user currently triggers.

A specific structure of a toggle key is illustrated in fig. 32b, the toggle key comprising: the driving device comprises a driving lever, an elastic piece supporting the driving lever below the driving lever, a pair of metal contacts positioned on the first side of the driving lever, a pair of metal contacts positioned on the second side of the driving lever, and a pair of metal contacts positioned on the third side of the driving lever. The poking in the first direction enables the pair of metal contacts on the first side to be in contact conduction, the poking in the second direction enables the pair of metal contacts on the second side to be in contact conduction, and the pressing in the third direction enables the pair of metal contacts on the third side to be in contact conduction.

Wherein, the elastic component is made of metal. Optionally, the toggle key may further include a rotating shaft supporting the elastic member, and the toggle lever is fixedly connected to the rotating shaft. Wherein each pair of metal contacts may be a metal sheet having a volume.

The poking key is accommodated in a cavity, and the cavity limits the dialing range of the poking key. Alternatively, a pair of metal contacts may be disposed on each of the three sides, one of the metal contacts may be disposed on the inner wall of the cavity on the corresponding side, and the other metal contact may be symmetrically disposed on the elastic member. Each metal contact arranged on the inner wall of the cavity can be connected with the processor 12, so that the poking in the first direction can enable the pair of metal contacts on the first side to be contacted and conducted to send a first trigger signal to the processor 12; toggling in a second direction may cause a pair of metal contacts on the second side to contact and conduct to send a second trigger signal to processor 12; pressing in the third direction may cause a pair of metal contacts on the third side to contact and conduct to issue a third trigger signal to the processor 12. Therefore, when the metal contact on one side is conducted, the connection with the processor 12 is conducted, so that the processor 12 knows which direction of the dialing or pressing operation is currently triggered by the user, and the processor 12 performs the subsequent corresponding communication process.

The third key, for example, the metal contacts corresponding to the three directions, may be connected to the processor 12 in a direct connection manner, so that when a user applies different operations, a level state change may occur in an interface directly connected to the processor 12, for example, a certain GPIO port. Of course, the third key may also be connected to different GPIO ports of the processor 12 through other circuit structures, such as a logic processing circuit, so that different level states are generated on the corresponding GPIO ports of the processor through the logic processing circuit according to user-triggered operations.

Since the toggle key can be toggled or pressed in different directions to meet different communication requirements, generally, the toggle key is a self-resetting toggle key. That is, after the user performs the dialing in the first direction, the dial may be automatically reset after releasing the dial, so that the user may perform the next operation in a certain direction.

When the third key 6a31 is implemented as the toggle key illustrated in fig. 32a and 32b, to more clearly illustrate that different operations performed on the toggle key correspond to different communication procedures, as shown in fig. 32c, a corresponding relationship between different operations performed on the toggle key and different communication procedures is illustrated: the toggle key is toggled to the left, a first media signal which is shorter than a certain time length is triggered and recorded, and the voice message is sent after the first media signal is released; the toggle key is toggled to the right to trigger the playing of the received second media signal; and pressing the toggle key downwards at the reset position to initiate the audio and video call.

Fig. 33 is a schematic structural diagram of another physical keyboard according to an embodiment of the present invention, and as shown in fig. 33, the physical keyboard includes a fourth key 3941, which is capable of responding to a fourth operation to send a fourth trigger signal to the processor 12. The processor 12 initiates an audio group call or a video group call to a member of the emergency contact group via the internet or the public switched telephone network through the wireless data transmission unit in an alternative manner in response to the fourth trigger signal.

Alternatively, a call may be made via another network if one network fails.

In the embodiment of the present invention, the user can realize the communication requirement of emergency call in emergency, in addition to the transmission of the first media signal and the playing of the second media signal in the foregoing embodiments through the physical keyboard 11.

Specifically, the physical keyboard 11 may include a fourth key 3941, and the fourth key 3941 may be a key, so that, in order to facilitate a user to implement an emergency call more directly in an emergency, the fourth operation may be a single-action operation such as a single press or 2 to 3 consecutive presses.

It should be noted that the fourth key 3941 and the plurality of physical keys provided in the foregoing other embodiments for transmitting the first media signal and playing the second media signal coexist on the physical keyboard 11, for example, the physical keyboard 11 may include the first key 5a21, the second key 5a22 and the fourth key 3941, for example, the physical keyboard 11 may include the third key 6a31 and the fourth key 3941. Illustrated in fig. 33 is a case where the physical keyboard 11 includes a third key 6a31 and a fourth key 3941.

In practice, the fourth key 3941 may be spaced apart from other keys, such as the first key 5a21 and the second and third keys 5a22, 6a31, by a predetermined distance. Such as illustrated in fig. 33: the third key 6a31 is located on the right side of the lower region of the front face of the housing and the fourth key 3941 is located on the left side of this region, spaced a greater distance from the third key 6a 31.

Alternatively, the fourth key 3941 may also have a different shape and/or size than the other keys, such as the first key 5a21, the second key 5a22, the third key 6a31 being rectangular and the fourth key 3941 being circular. Alternatively, the fourth key 3941 may have a different logo from other keys, such as a logo corresponding to the third key 6a31 illustrated in fig. 3 as L/T and a logo corresponding to the fourth key as E.

In practical applications, an emergency contact group may be preset in an instant messaging application program in the terminal communication device, where the emergency contact group includes at least one contact, and generally, in order to ensure that a user can successfully contact an emergency contact in an emergency, the emergency contact group generally includes at least two contacts.

Based on this, when the user encounters an emergency, only some preset operation on the fourth key 3941 is needed to trigger the processor 12 to initiate an audio group call or a video group call to a member of the emergency contact group through the internet or the public switched telephone network. In which an online video call can be made via the internet and an audio call can be made via the public switched telephone network.

Optionally, since the fourth key 3941 is a physical key used by the user to initiate an emergency call in case of an emergency, in order to ensure that the user can more conveniently locate the fourth key 3941 in case of an emergency, the size and the arrangement position of the fourth key 3941 can be distinguished from other physical keys, such as being spaced apart from other physical keys and having a larger size.

Several alternative implementations of the physical keyboard 11 provided in embodiments of the present invention have been described above. In fact, optionally, a prompting lamp reflecting the communication state of the terminal communication device may be further disposed on the physical keyboard 11 or the housing. The warning light may be independently provided on each physical key, or one or more warning lights may be provided on the physical keyboard 11 without one-to-one correspondence to each physical key. For example, a notification light for notifying receipt of a communication message, such as the communication status notification light illustrated in fig. 3, may be included, which may be flashed or highlighted upon receipt of a message, such as the aforementioned second media signal, to notify receipt of the communication message.

In summary, with the physical keyboard 11 provided on the terminal communication device according to the embodiment of the present invention, the user only needs to perform simple operations on at least one physical key included in the physical keyboard 11, so as to implement different communication requirements, and while the operation is convenient, the timeliness and reliability of sending a communication message to a contact and the instantaneity of receiving a communication message sent by a contact are also ensured.

On the basis of several implementations of the physical keyboard 11, the terminal communication device provided herein may further include one or two pairs of direction keys for the user to select display contents on the display, such as contact related information displayed through the communication application. That is, the selection of the contact may be achieved through the direction key.

Alternatively, the pair of direction keys are provided on both sides of the first key 5a21 and/or the second key 5a22 in the horizontal direction, or on both sides of the third key 6a31 in the horizontal direction. May be provided adjacent to or integrated with at least one of the first key 5a21, the second key 5a22, the third key 6a31 in appearance. As shown in fig. 34, fig. 34 illustrates that direction keys 4032 are provided on both the left and right sides of the third key 6a 31.

In some embodiments, after the terminal communication apparatus is started, the profile information or the interactive interface of the first contact, or the contact group in which the first contact is located, is presented on the home interface, and at this time, the processor 12 may switch to present the profile information or the interactive interface of the second contact, or the contact group in which the second contact is located on the screen in response to the user pressing the direction key on the right side of the first key.

Optionally, the first contact is the contact that the user contacts most frequently in a statistical sense, and then the second contact and the third contact are used less frequently in the statistical sense.

Similarly, the processor 12 may also switch the profile information or the interactive interface of the second contact or the contact group where the second contact is located to be presented as the profile information or the interactive interface of the first contact or the contact group where the first contact is located on the screen in response to the user pressing the direction key on the left side of the first key, which is not described herein again.

When the user selects a contact, for example a second contact, on the display by means of the arrow keys, the user may then continue to press the second key 5a22 to play a voice message from the second contact, or may send a voice message to the second contact by pressing the first key 5a 21. Of course, the user may also initiate an audio-video call to the second contact through the internet by pressing the first key 5a21 and the second key 5a22 in a coordinated manner or by pressing the third key 6a31, which will not be described in detail herein.

In some embodiments, after the user presses the direction key on the right side of the first key 5a 21/second key 5a22 the nth time, the contact related information or the commonly used application program entry is displayed on the screen; the processor 12 can respond to the N +1 th pressing of the direction key on the right side of the first key 5a 21/second key 5a22 by the user to switch into the normal interface of the mobile phone desktop on the screen, including resources such as a plurality of application icons, and the user can run various applications by means of the normal interface of the mobile phone desktop, and operate the terminal communication device in the operation mode of the mobile communication equipment such as the commonly used mobile phone.

Optionally, whether the interactive interface is located in the profile information of the contact, the interactive interface, or the contact group in which the contact is located under the operation of the user, and the running interfaces of various applications are entered through the above normal interface of the desktop of the mobile phone, the processor 12 may switch to a predetermined interactive interface in response to a predetermined gesture applied on the screen by the user, for example, the processor may switch to a predetermined interactive interface on the screen, for example, the profile information interface of a specific contact, or rollback to display the power-on initial interface, or the like, in response to a "Z" shaped sliding gesture or a sliding gesture along a diagonal line of the screen applied on the screen by the user.

Several implementations of the physical keyboard 11 on the communication device have been described above, and in practical applications, the communication device may have different implementations. For example, the communication apparatus may be implemented as a communication terminal such as a smart phone, a tablet computer, or the like, may be implemented as a portable terminal device, may be implemented as a remote controller, or the like. Several specific implementations are described below in conjunction with the following examples.

Button and host machine separable design

In an alternative embodiment, as shown in fig. 3, the communication device is embodied as a communication terminal such as a smart phone, a tablet computer, and the like. The physical keyboard illustrated in fig. 3 comprises the third key and the fourth key mentioned in the previous embodiments, wherein the third key is illustrated as a key with an L/T character and the fourth key is illustrated as a key with an E character. At this time, the front surface of the communication device further includes a display with a larger size, the display supports a trigger operation, and therefore, may also be referred to as a touch screen, and may be used for displaying interface elements such as the contact interaction interface illustrated in fig. 3. The physical keyboard is illustrated in fig. 3 as being located below the display, but the physical keyboard may be located, for example, on the left or right side of the display, but not limited thereto.

In addition, in some optional embodiments, a warning light for reflecting the operation state of the communication device, such as a warning light for reflecting whether the power is sufficient (e.g., a power warning light illustrated in fig. 3), may be further disposed on the housing of the communication device, and may flash or light up when the power is low to prompt the user to charge the communication device; such as a warning light (e.g., the network warning light illustrated in fig. 3) reflecting the network connection status, and flashes or lights up when the network quality is abnormal to warn the user that the network is not good.

In addition, as shown in fig. 3, a power key and a volume adjustment key may be further provided on the side of the communication device.

In another alternative embodiment, as shown in fig. 4, the communication device is embodied as a remote control for use with some kind of intelligent terminal. The remote controller and the intelligent terminal can establish communication in a wireless or wired mode, for example, communication is established in a Bluetooth, infrared and other communication modes.

The physical keyboard described in the foregoing embodiments may be provided in the remote controller. However, optionally, a physical keyboard may be disposed in the intelligent terminal, and in addition, the instant messaging application mentioned in the foregoing embodiment may also be installed in the intelligent terminal.

The physical keyboard in the remote control illustrated in fig. 4 comprises a first key, a second key and a fourth key, wherein the first key is illustrated as a key with an L-shape, the second key is illustrated as a key with a T-shape and the fourth key is illustrated as a key with an E-shape.

In a further alternative embodiment, as shown in fig. 5, the communication device is embodied as a portable terminal device in which the physical keyboard and one or several digital displays described in the previous embodiments can be arranged.

The physical keyboard located in the terminal device illustrated in fig. 5 comprises a first key, a second key and a fourth key, wherein the first key is illustrated as a key with an L-character, the second key is illustrated as a key with a T-character and the fourth key is illustrated as a key with an E-character.

The terminal device illustrated in fig. 5 is provided with two digital displays, each of which has two switching buttons associated therewith. The first digital display is used for displaying contact person information in a switching mode, and the second digital display can display the number of unread messages corresponding to the contact persons displayed on the first digital display and display the unread messages in a switching mode.

It should be noted that, in the foregoing embodiment, the "recording voice message and/or video/image message with identification" is mainly embodied in the present embodiment that the contact information, the number of unread messages of a part of types and unread messages are displayed through the digital display, and the part of types may be voice messages and text messages.

In yet another alternative embodiment, as shown in fig. 6, the communication apparatus is embodied as a terminal device having a detachable controller. The physical keyboard described in the foregoing embodiment may be provided in the controller, and the controller is connected to the terminal apparatus main body through the connection interface. That is, the physical keyboard is a separate physical component that is detachably disposed on the housing of the communication device and communicatively coupled to the processor 12 via a wired and/or wireless interface.

The physical keyboard in the controller illustrated in fig. 6 comprises a first key illustrated as a key with an L-shape, a second key illustrated as a key with a T-shape and a fourth key illustrated as a key with an E-shape.

Of course, it should be noted that: the communication apparatus or the electronic device according to any of the embodiments of the present invention is not limited to a device such as a mobile phone or the like integrally equipped, and the respective functional units of these communication apparatus or electronic device may exist independently in a distributed manner. For example, the display included in the electronic device may be a physically independent display unit, such as a television set or the like. Also for example, a physical keyboard including one or more keys in the embodiment of fig. 6 may also be separate from and communicatively coupled, either wired or wirelessly, to the processor unit in a detachable manner.

Integration interactive interface

It should be understood that: in "Integration interactive interfaceAny methods or apparatus according to embodiments of the invention mentioned hereinafter may be used with the preceding including, but not limited to "Key/button layout and its form and function”“The push button is separated from the main machine Meter"etc. are combined with or seek to implement means, etc. from the descriptions in methods or apparatuses according to embodiments of the present invention.

During the research on electronic devices, such as mobile terminal devices like mobile phones, the inventor finds that in the software system and the communication system of the prior art, different applications independently receive and present data and utilize communication resources; the applications also design independent interactive operation, and there is no possibility of integrating data and resources of each application for use by users, and there is an unrecognized need in the prior art, and accordingly, there is a lack of related solutions. Under the existing operating system software and application software architecture, users need to perform independent interaction respectively for different application programs in the process of accessing required data through an interactive interface of the electronic device, which reduces the efficiency of accessing data or information stored in different application programs.

The following electronic devices according to some embodiments or electronic devices with communication functions, such as communication devices like mobile phones, will be used as examples to describe methods or apparatuses according to embodiments of the present invention. Fig. 7 is a schematic diagram of a system architecture for establishing communication with a contact through a mobile terminal in the prior art, and the following will describe how to reduce the inefficiency of a user in acquiring data from multiple applications through human-computer interaction with reference to fig. 7. As shown in fig. 7, the existing human-computer interaction, the access relationship between human and program can be clearly expressed. The prior art is directed to configuring communication resources by using a plurality of communication applications in an operating system, which makes it necessary for a user to access different application programs 1101, 1102 and the like, respectively, even if a plurality of communication messages, such as Short Messages (SMS) and voice messages, for the same contact person, respectively correspond to different services, and may come from different communication networks, or respectively occur through different communication networks or corresponding network interfaces (ocur). Such as a mobile phone network 1108 and a WLAN (Wireless Local area network) network 1107 respectively, the configuration of the distributed communication resources for the same contact 1103 is due to the diversified development in the evolution process of the communication network on the one hand and the diversified development of the application program development ecology in the software technology development process on the other hand, and certainly there may be other reasons, but in any case, this results in that the information of the contact 1103 is dispersedly stored in different applications and the various communication information similar to the above-mentioned communication information of the contact needs to be processed by different applications and dispersedly stored in different applications. In addition, such a situation also causes the user 1104 to have to access different applications, such as the application 1101 and the application 1102, respectively, and perform different or somewhat repeated, massive and multi-level interactive operations for each application, respectively, to obtain corresponding information. And each application program has an independent interactive interface and an information presentation mode, and the possibility of integrating the applications by the interaction of users and the guidance does not exist.

Some users also desire that some applications in the electronic device be easily accessible, for example, at the first level of the interaction hierarchy of the software system of the electronic device, to gain access to those applications intuitively. For an electronic device for communication, a user may also desire to provide more consistency or correspondence between a user interface of the communication function of the electronic device and an interface of an application program providing other functions such as photographing or photo album, so as to enhance operability of the user across interfaces during use of the electronic device, and even provide a consistent user interface across software and hardware.

Cross-interface graphic element providing method and device

Based on the inventors' discovery of the drawbacks of the prior art and the corresponding potential needs; in an embodiment of the present invention, a resource providing method for an electronic device is provided, which may be optionally executed at an electronic device having a processor unit, a memory, and a display, and fig. 16 is a flowchart illustrating an interface element providing method according to the embodiment of the present invention, as shown in fig. 16, the interface element providing method includes:

in step 2001, a first interactive interface is displayed on the electronic device.

In step 2002, a plurality of communication information corresponding to at least one communication network is output integrally through a first interactive interface.

Wherein the plurality of communication information is generated by communication via at least one communication network, such as a voice message, a video message transmitted by the at least one communication network, or a call recording of an incoming/outgoing call through the at least one communication network, or the like.

In step 2003, the second interactive interface is switched and displayed on the electronic device in response to the switching operation.

Wherein first and second user interface elements corresponding formally or functionally are provided on the first and second interactive interfaces and, for the first interactive interface, the first user interface element is associated with at least one communication network.

Correspondingly, in another embodiment of the present invention, there is also provided an electronic device, including: a display; a processor unit; a memory; and one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured for execution by the processor unit to: i) displaying a first interactive interface on the electronic equipment; ii) outputting a plurality of communication information corresponding to at least one communication network through the first interactive interface; iii) responding to the switching operation, and switching and displaying the second interactive interface on the electronic equipment. User interface elements are correspondingly and respectively provided on the first interactive interface and the second interactive interface; wherein the user interface elements on the first interactive interface are associated with at least one communication network. As an interface element, the user interface element may be operable by execution of the processor to establish a plurality of communications via a plurality of communications networks available to the electronic device in response to a user operation.

In addition, for users, the elderly and some ordinary users who desire to simplify human-computer interaction, they are more concerned about a certain communication object in an electronic device such as a mobile phone, and the content of communication information itself generated between the user and the communication object can be accessed conveniently, but the communication information is not provided by which application or communication channel, for example, in the usage scenario of the mobile phone, some users are more concerned about communication with a contact in the mobile phone, such as short messages sent and received through a mobile phone network, making/receiving calls, or voice messages sent or received through a wireless data transmission network, network phones for incoming and outgoing calls, and the like; however, these contact information and the communication information with the relevant contacts are dispersedly stored in different applications, for example, in the existing smart phone, it is necessary to store the contacts in the phone address book and also store the contacts in the internet communication tool, although in many cases, two contacts correspond to the same contact, which causes redundancy of information. This is determined by the software architecture of the multi-application plus operating system as described above and will not be described further herein.

As described above, this potential technical problem is caused in part by the fact that a technician cannot predict a technical problem that needs to be solved and cannot be solved under the existing technical architecture because a plurality of existing application software independently developed by different vendors are installed and run in the technical architecture on an operating system.

The potential needs in the above-described scenarios have not been identified in the prior art, and based on the above-described research efforts and the discovery of solutions to the deficiencies of the prior art, the inventors believe it would be beneficial if the accessibility (accessibility) of users to communication information or user interfaces for communication during interaction with electronic devices could be improved. This means that there is a need to propose a method for redesigning the interactive interface or man-machine interface of the electronic device, which is oriented by the user interaction, rather than the architecture of "operating system + multiple applications" in the prior art.

Some embodiments of the first resource providing method

Based on the inventors' discovery of the drawbacks of the prior art and the corresponding potential needs; in one embodiment of the present invention, a resource providing method for an electronic device is provided, which may be optionally executed at an electronic device having a processor unit, a memory, and a display, and fig. 8 is a flowchart illustrating the resource providing method according to the embodiment of the present invention, as shown in fig. 8, the resource providing method includes:

in step 1201, communication is established with a first communication object over at least one communication network available to the electronic device to generate a plurality of communication information.

In step 1202, a plurality of communications are provided to a user of an electronic device via at least one interactive interface integration of the electronic device.

From the perspective of the user's interactive operation, the step 1202 may be understood as configuring the communication resource and the communication information on the interactive interface during the communication process between the user and the first communication object through the electronic device with the first communication object as a guide, or may be considered as reconfiguring the communication resource on the interactive interface during the communication process between the user and the first communication object through the electronic device with the first communication object as a center (centric), which also improves the accessibility of the plurality of communication information to the user. This is completely different from the configuration of communication resources in communication applications in the prior art, which is often guided by communication resources such as communication functions, communication applications, and communication channels.

At the same time, it should be noted that: the first communication object mentioned in the above steps may be a company or an individual as a communication object, or a virtual object such as a robot or chat application software. And in particular to establish communication with the first communication object, it may actually be to communicate with the first object via a communication facility associated with the first communication object, the communication facility having access to the at least one communication network.

The communication tool associated with the first communication object may be understood as a hardware-form communication device used by the first communication object, such as a mobile device with or without an operating system for communication, a User Equipment (UE), or the like, or a software-form communication tool running on a physical communication device, such as instant messaging software running on a physical electronic device.

Alternatively, in some embodiments of the present invention including the embodiments under the heading "cross-interface graphic element providing method and apparatus", the at least one communication network may include a plurality of wireless communication networks, or may further include one or more wired communication networks, and in some embodiments, the resource providing method in the embodiments of the present invention may be described by taking as an example a scenario in which a user establishes communication with a certain (individual) contact (for example, mr. zhao) using a mobile terminal connected to the plurality of wireless communication networks. For example, a first contact uses two electronic devices, namely a mobile phone and a tablet computer accessing the internet, one of the communication tools corresponding to the first contact in at least one communication network is: the mobile phone corresponding to mr. zhao, the first contact in the mobile phone network is provided with a phone number, e.g., +86-13761182252, in the mobile phone network, through which the communication is addressed in the network. If Instant Messaging (IM) software is installed in the tablet computer, another communication tool corresponding to the first contact in at least one communication network is the IM software; the tablet computer is allocated with address information such as an IP address and a port number on the internet, and the instant messaging software can be addressed to communicate through the address information. Certainly, the user may change the communication tool, for example, another computer, such as a computer, a smart phone, a tablet, or the like, logs in the instant messaging software, at this time, the communication network and the network address (IP, network segment) where the user is located may also change, and the electronic device of the user may communicate with the first contact through the communication network based on the changed address information.

Here, the person skilled in the art will understand that: a user communicates with a contact via a mobile terminal, in fact via an electronic, optoelectronic or photonic medium/channel or network, with a communication device or communication means associated with the communication object or contact, and the communication address used is also typically the destination address assigned to the communication device on some kind of network, or network information similar to a communication means that enables the user to be identified and located on the communication network. Details of such communication may not be repeated hereafter. In some embodiments of the invention described above or below, the following may be described in simplified form: communication or communication information that occurs between the user and the communication object, the contact, or the user establishes communication with the communication object or the contact through the mobile terminal, etc.

In the resource providing method of some embodiments of the present invention including the embodiments under the heading "graphic element providing method and apparatus across interfaces", the plurality of communication information may have a plurality of different attributes, such as a plurality of different media types, services belonging to different properties, communication networks from different service properties, etc., and the first communication object may be a first contact as a communication object to be stored in the mobile terminal by a user (not shown in the figure), and the step 1201 of providing by integration may further include the steps of: and outputting the plurality of communication information to at least one interactive interface aiming at the first contact person in an integrated mode. Wherein the number of the at least one interactive interface is less than the number of the plurality of different attributes. The at least one interactive interface, if it comprises a plurality of interactive interfaces, for example, a plurality of interactive interfaces for the first contact, may be continuously present in the interactive interface sequence of the communication apparatus, or may be independently present at different positions in the interactive interface sequence of the communication apparatus due to a plurality of unrelated operations of the user.

Optionally, on the same level (hierarchy) of the interactive interface, only one interactive interface may be set for the same contact, and for this case, the first contact interface is hereinafter referred to as the first contact interface for communication interaction with the first contact. It is of course also possible to provide a plurality of interactive interfaces, for example, two interactive interfaces may be configured in the mobile terminal of the user, and the first interactive interface, which may also be referred to as the first communication recording interface, may integrate the voice message with the first contact, the record of the video/voice call through the wlan/mdn, the short message received and sent through the mobile phone network, and the second interactive interface may integrate the video message with the first contact through the wireless data transmission network, the GPS location information, the record of the phone call dialed/answered through the mobile phone network/voice network, and so on. Of course, the examples herein only show that the communication information distributed in different communication interaction interfaces includes communication information via different communication networks, and the communication information distributed in different communication interaction interfaces can be switched between the first communication interaction interface and the second communication interaction interface to be presented to the user for viewing in response to the switching operation of the user. Similarly, the first communication interactive interface and the second communication interactive interface may also include different or the same communication information that is received, sent, received and processed by different communication application software via a plurality of communication networks, and details of these similar embodiments are not repeated herein.

At the same time, it should be noted that: in the above step 1201, the mobile terminal of the user may establish communication with the first contact through only one communication network, or may establish communication with the first contact through a plurality of communication networks, but may generate a plurality of communication information with different attributes or different types. Referring to the above examples of short messages transceived through a mobile phone network and making/receiving calls, in the resource providing method of some embodiments including the embodiments under the heading "graphic element providing method and apparatus across interfaces", a user can communicate with a first contact only through a mobile phone network to which a mobile terminal is connected, thereby obtaining two kinds of communication information, such as a call making/receiving record and a short message. This case also belongs to the scope of the method of this embodiment, and the following embodiments will not be described in detail for the case of obtaining multiple kinds of communication information through a single network.

The communication information, the communication content or the communication data displayed in the communication interface is not limited to the content with diversified attributes/types, and the different attributes of the communication information may also include different network sources, for example, from networks with different service properties, such as a mobile communication network, a fixed communication network, a wireless data transmission network, a WLAN represented by WIFI, a mobile phone network, a mobile data network, and the like. In other words, a plurality of communication information is generated (ocur) based on a plurality of communication networks or corresponding communication interfaces, respectively. Furthermore, while the electronic device is capable of connecting a plurality of communication networks of different service properties, the generated communication information occurs (ocur) based on interfaces of the plurality of communication networks corresponding to the different service properties, respectively, which are communication interfaces complying with the communication protocols of the plurality of communication networks described above, or simply, the plurality of communication network interfaces. Taking an Open System Interconnection Reference Model (OSI) based wireless data transmission network interface as an example, the wireless data transmission network interface may be divided into a plurality of parts, for example, may include an interface belonging to a physical layer; an interface belonging to a data link layer, or a data link interface, can also be included; the system can also comprise a network layer interface, and specifically can comprise software and/or hardware resources such as a communication address, a port number, a hardware chip and a corresponding driver; interfaces corresponding to services carried by the network, or simply service interfaces, may also be included. As part of the wireless data transmission network interface, the communication interfaces, such as data link interfaces, in the layers may be implemented at least partially in the electronic device, or may be distributed among multiple network devices including switches and servers, and provide calling interfaces, such as system calling interfaces or network calling interfaces, for the applications running in the electronic device. As another part of the ensemble of wireless data transfer network interfaces, some of the higher layer interfaces in OSI may be implemented in the operating system of the electronic device, or in applications running therein. Similarly, in the electronic device of this embodiment, the voice interface and the short message interface for the mobile phone network may also be managed by an operating system such as Android or underlying software, and may be indirectly provided to the application program of the instant messaging class after being encapsulated, and the wireless data transmission interface may also be directly or indirectly provided to the application program of the same instant messaging class. Such configurations and arrangements of multiple communication network interfaces are also applicable to the methods or apparatuses of the above or below described other embodiments, and will not be described in detail hereinafter.

Those skilled in the art will appreciate that the specific embodiments of these communication network interfaces are numerous and that the specific embodiments do not constitute a limitation of the present invention. For example, the short message interface and the voice interface managed by the operating system for the mobile phone network and the data link interface of the wireless data transmission network supporting the instant messaging function can be integrated and encapsulated into the same application program through the redevelopment of the operating system interface. Furthermore, it should be noted that the interface resources of the multiple communication networks of the electronic device of the present embodiment are all integrated and provided to the same instant messaging application directly or indirectly, in other words, the instant messaging application in the electronic device of the present embodiment may invoke the interfaces of multiple different communication networks, such as the voice interface, the short message interface, and the wireless data transmission network interface of the mobile phone network, so as to send and receive data through the multiple different communication network interfaces, which is different from the interface of the communication network in the prior art, which is utilized by multiple independent applications respectively.

Based on this, optionally, in the resource providing method of some embodiments, the communication establishing step 1201 further includes establishing communication with the network address corresponding to the first contact through the mobile phone network and the wireless data transmission network to generate a plurality of communication information having different service properties. In some embodiments, including the embodiments under the heading "method and apparatus for providing graphic elements across interfaces", the step 1202 of integrating and outputting further comprises a step of arranging and displaying a plurality of communication arrangements having different service properties for the first contact through the mobile phone network and the wireless data transmission network on the first contact interface.

Optionally, in some embodiments including the embodiments under the heading "cross-interface graphic element providing method and apparatus", the plurality of communication information corresponding to different service properties may be generated by corresponding network protocol interfaces among the interfaces of the plurality of communication networks, respectively. Correspondingly, the communication establishing step 1201 may further include the step of establishing communication with the first contact through a plurality of communication network interfaces by the user to generate a plurality of communication information with different business properties. The aforementioned configuration and display step may further include integrating and outputting a plurality of communication information for different service properties of the first contact via a plurality of communication networks to the first contact interface.

Optionally, in some embodiments, including embodiments under the heading "graphical element providing method and apparatus across interfaces", the plurality of communications of different service properties includes, for example, i) voice service information, ii) short message service messages; iii) a data service message comprising at least one of: audio messages, video messages, picture messages, geographic locations, text messages, files, data. Here, by integrating and displaying the plurality of communication information from one or more communication networks bearing different communication services, the accessibility of the plurality of communication information corresponding to the plurality of service properties is enhanced, and the interaction complexity of the user in the process of accessing the information is reduced, for example, the user does not need to access different application programs such as a call management program, a short message management program and the like in a mobile phone respectively to obtain two different communication information respectively; similarly, it is not necessary to access different application programs such as short message management program and instant messaging program in the mobile phone to obtain two kinds of communication information with different service properties such as short message and voice message.

The arrangement display step further includes: at least two items of voice service information, short message service information and data service information of the first contact are displayed in the first message area according to the occurrence time sequence arrangement.

Optionally, in the first message area, only the latest 1 or 2-3 records of the at least two items of the voice service information, the short message service message, and the data service message for the first contact may be displayed, so that if the first message area is only used for displaying 1-3 communication records, the font of each communication record may be relatively large, and the visual presentation effect for the user is relatively good.

In some embodiments, the communication information may be originated from a plurality of communication function modules or communication protocol interfaces, that is, the communication information is processed by or transmitted through the communication function modules, and the communication function modules are configured in the electronic device and may respectively conform to different communication protocols to be compatible with different communication networks. Correspondingly, the resource providing method in the embodiment of the invention may further include the step of providing the communication function module: a plurality of communication function modules are provided in the electronic device that are compatible with at least one communication network for establishing communication with a communication facility of the at least one communication network associated with the first contact. And, the communication establishing step 1201 may further include the sub-steps of: establishing communication with a first contact through at least one communication network by a plurality of communication function modules to generate a plurality of communication information.

FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the structure of an electronic device and its interactive interface according to another embodiment of the present invention; the first contact interface and the communication information that may be provided therein are further explained in conjunction with fig. 10. In this embodiment of the present invention, the at least one interactive interface for a single (single) first contact may include, in the interface hierarchy, only one layer of interactive interface for the first contact, that is, the first contact interface for providing a plurality of types of communication records to the user as described above, or an interface layer referred to as a communication record with the first contact. Of course it is not excluded that the first contact interface comprises, in addition to the interface layer of the communication record, further interaction interface layers, such as a first contact profile interface layer, positioned at a higher level than the interface layer of the communication record.

The step 1202 of integrating and outputting the resource providing method of this embodiment may further include the steps of: and integrating and outputting the communication information aiming at the first contact person through the communication network to the first contact person interface. For example, in the above embodiment, the different types of communication data distributively integrated in the first communication interactive interface and the second communication interactive interface may also be alternately displayed only on the first contact interface in the resource providing method of this embodiment, instead of being respectively displayed on the first communication interactive interface and the second communication interactive interface. In other words, in the resource providing method of this embodiment, different sets of communication data with different attributes or types may also be switched on the first communication interface and provided to the user in response to the switching operation of the user. Of course, in another alternative embodiment, the communication information or communication data with multiple different attributes or types may be all integrated and displayed in the first contact interface without the user switching the communication information with different media types/service types of the presentation packets in the first contact interface, as shown in the first contact interface in fig. 10.

And the method is further oriented to the contact person, configures communication resources and communication information, and improves the accessibility of the communication information to the user. This reduces the interaction complexity for some users who are more concerned about communicating information with a communication contact and desire to have access to such information with a simple operation. The resource providing method reconfigures the communication information at an interaction layer by taking a contact person as a center so as to integrate output, so that prejudgment (anticipate) meets the requirements which do not exist in the prior art and solves the corresponding technical problem.

In some embodiments of the present invention, including the embodiments under the heading "method and apparatus for providing graphical elements across interfaces", the at least one communication network described above comprises a wireless communication network, and the wireless communication network further comprises two networks: mobile telephone networks, wireless data transmission networks. Correspondingly, the plurality of communication function modules include a mobile phone network communication function module and a wireless data transmission network communication function module, and the step 1201 of communicating through at least one communication network further includes: the mobile phone network communication function module and the wireless data transmission network communication function module are respectively connected to a mobile phone network and a wireless data transmission network, and communication is established with a first contact through a communication tool associated with the first contact through the two networks so as to generate a plurality of communication information; and, the step 1202 of integrating output further comprises: arranging and displaying a plurality of communication information aiming at a first contact person through a mobile telephone network and a wireless data transmission network on a first contact person interface; the arrangement sequence can be longitudinal or transverse, such as a mobile phone operated on a transverse screen.

Fig. 11 is a schematic view of an interactive interface in a resource providing method according to another embodiment of the present invention, and the resource providing method in this embodiment is further described with reference to fig. 11. In the resource providing method according to this embodiment of the present invention and the embodiments under the heading "graphic element providing method and apparatus across interfaces", the first contact interface includes a first message area 1502, the mobile phone network communication function module includes a voice interface and a short message interface configured in the mobile terminal 1500, and the plurality of communication information respectively transmitted/processed include, but are not limited to: i) voice call record, ii) short message text; the plurality of communication information processed or transmitted by the wireless data transmission network communication function module correspondingly comprises one or more of the following items: audio messages, video messages, picture messages, geographic locations, text messages, files, data. And the arranging and displaying step further comprises: at least two of the three types of information, i) voice call service information, ii) short message text, and iii) data service message, for the first contact are integrated and displayed in the first message area 1502 according to occurrence time sequence arrangement, as shown in fig. 11. Here, by integrating and displaying the plurality of communication information from one or more communication networks bearing different communication services, the accessibility of the plurality of communication information corresponding to the plurality of service properties is enhanced, and the interaction complexity of the user in the process of accessing the information is reduced, for example, the user does not need to access different application programs such as a call management program, a short message management program and the like in a mobile phone respectively to obtain two different communication information respectively; similarly, it is not necessary to access different application programs such as short message management program and instant messaging program in the mobile phone to obtain two kinds of communication information with different service properties such as short message and voice message.

In the method of the above embodiment, the method may further include the step of: in response to the selection operation of the user, the various audio and video type messages presented in the first message area 1502 are output to the user through a display or a speaker in a visual or audible (audible) manner, and optionally, when the network to which the mobile terminal is connected is a mobile data network, in this case, the various audio and video type messages may be downloaded through the mobile data network when the user selects to play. Of course, text information such as additional short messages may be automatically downloaded by the mobile terminal over the network and presented in the first message area 1502 of the display.

Fig. 12 is a schematic diagram illustrating switching of an interactive interface for displaying one or more latest messages in a resource providing method according to another embodiment of the present invention, as shown in the drawing, in this embodiment, the time sequence arrangement displaying step further includes: in at least two of the three types of message queues for the first contact, i) voice call records, ii) short message text, and iii) data service messages, only the most recent record or records, or information such as a timestamp of the displayed message, are selected for display in the first message region 1602-a, 1602-B, wherein the data service message includes one or more of the following: audio messages, video messages, picture messages, geographic locations, text messages, files, data. For the optional content of the data service message here, details are not described below. Because the displayed information is relatively small, the display space in the first contact interfaces 1603-A, 1603-B can be fully utilized, which is beneficial for the user to easily see the information clearly.

Alternatively, in the resource providing method of all embodiments of the present invention including the embodiments under the heading "graphic element providing method and apparatus across interfaces", the first contact interface belongs to a single program, which means that a plurality of communications are integrally displayed in a same application or associated programs, and the following cases are not included: the first application program displays first communication information or interactive content on a display of the electronic equipment, and a second application program independent of the first application program temporarily pops up second communication information or interactive content such as a notice on a screen, so that the display area of the whole display is shared with the first application program. In this regard, the embodiments described above and below can be applied, and the description thereof is omitted. In addition, a conventional operating system such as android can be customized to integrate partial programs related to the communication application interface into the operating system of the electronic device to form a single program at a system level, and program components related to the communication application interface are used as an operating system User Interface (UI), and multiple interfaces such as a contact communication interface in the single program are presented to a user at the first time after the completion of the startup. Correspondingly, the step of establishing communication through the communication network may further comprise: and running a single program to which the first contact person interface belongs in the starting stage of the electronic equipment so as to load the interface aiming at the first contact person on the top layer of the software interaction hierarchy of the electronic equipment. In some Android operating systems, the communication application may be set to be a launch (Launcher) level application under the ROOT authority of the operating system, so that, along with the launch of the operating system, the processor unit 12 loads and displays a single program to which the first contact interface belongs on the display, whereas any other application program cannot be accessed by the user through the display in the conventional desktop. In this activated mode, the communication application may be specifically executed by the processor 12 to exclusively occupy display resources on the display, so that the first contact interface and other interfaces configured in the single program, such as the second contact interface, the first application interface, etc., may be presented "on screen" on the display, and these interfaces configured in the single program may be switched to each other at the top level of the software interaction hierarchy of the electronic device. Through the exclusive resource integration providing mode, a plurality of communication information or communication resources such as user interfaces aiming at the communication network are preferentially integrated and configured at the middle and upper layers of the interaction hierarchy by taking the communication contact as the center or taking the communication contact as the guide, thereby greatly facilitating the accessibility of the relevant information of the contact and the man-machine interface of the communication.

The resource providing method according to the above embodiment of the present invention may further include the steps of: user interface elements are provided on the first contact interface that are associated with the communication network to form a communicative coupling to establish or terminate a corresponding communication, such that a user may initiate/accept a communication request over the corresponding communication network by manipulating the user interface elements on the first contact interface. On the one hand, these user interface elements are respectively associated with a plurality of communication networks, while on the other hand, the functional operation (functional operation) of these user interfaces is also respectively triggered by a plurality of different operations from the user. Correspondingly, the step of establishing communication through the communication network further comprises: in response to a user manipulation of the user interface element, a communication is established with a first contact over a communication network to generate a plurality of communication data.

It should be noted that: the operation of the user interface element by the user mentioned herein generally refers to a single-action operation, wherein the single-action operation is explained in the foregoing, and here, the user can establish the communication on the single interface by the single-action operation, and generally does not need to perform two or more independent operations, or even two or more switching of the interactive interface. Further, on the one hand, the one or more user interface elements may be responsive to a plurality of operations by the user, and on the other hand, the one or more user interface elements are respectively associated by the processor with the one or more communication networks, so that communication via this/these communication networks may be established for the communication device by the processor, e.g. a first user interface element may trigger the processor to establish communication with the wireless data transfer network of the contact for the mobile terminal in response to a first operation by the user, and a second user interface element may trigger the processor to establish communication with the mobile telephone network of the contact for the mobile terminal in response to a second operation by the user. The association relationship among one or more user interface elements, one or more communication networks, and one or more user operations described herein may be applied to the methods, apparatuses, and devices in the previous and subsequent embodiments, and will not be described in detail in other embodiments.

Fig. 13 is a schematic view of an interactive interface of providing buttons in a resource providing method according to another embodiment of the present invention, in which user interface elements include a first button 1706 and a second button 1707. The first button 1706 and the second button 1707 or still other buttons included in the user interface element may be respectively responsive to different operations by the user, such as a single press of the first button 1706, a double press of the first button 1706, or a single long-time press of the second button 1707, to establish communications over different 2 or 3 communications networks, such as a wireless data transfer network or a mobile phone network, respectively, to transfer communication data or information of various different media types conforming to communication protocols of the networks, online or offline, including online video, online voice, text information, audio information, video information, data information, etc., via communications of the networks; the data information may also include GPS address location, files, data, etc., and calls, short messages, etc. of the mobile phone network.

Correspondingly, the step of establishing communication via the communication network further comprises: in response to independent operation of the first button 1706 and the second button 1707, respectively, the mobile terminal may be enabled to send audio messages and/or video/image messages and/or text messages over the wireless data transfer network and output audio messages and/or video/image messages and/or text messages received over the wireless data transfer network on the first contact interface 1703.

Optionally, the first button and the second button may be disposed relatively adjacently (not shown in the figure), and the establishing communication via the communication network step further comprises: and in response to the synchronous pressing of the first button and the second button and other associated operations, the mobile terminal can be enabled to initiate audio and video calls through the wireless data transmission network.

Optionally, the step of establishing communication through the communication network further comprises: a plurality of communications are conducted with a first contact over a communications network to generate a plurality of communication data, respectively in response to a plurality of user operations on a user interface element. In other words, the user may enable the mobile terminal to perform various types of communication with the first contact through one or more mobile communication networks by applying different operations and gestures to one interface element to generate a plurality of communication data.

Alternatively, user interface elements such as a first button and a second button on the first contact interface may switch the functions of the buttons in response to a switching operation by a user. In some embodiments, the first button and the second button may be automatically and dynamically redefined when the mobile terminal is connected to a different communication network, or redefined in response to a user's switching operation. For example, when the mobile terminal is connected to a mobile phone network, the first button and the second button can respond to a single press to make a voice call and send a short message to the first contact person through the mobile phone network. And when the mobile terminal is connected to the indoor WLAN, the first button and the second button can respond to a single press to send a voice message to the first contact and listen to the voice message from the first contact.

Fig. 15 is a schematic view of an interactive interface in a resource providing method according to another embodiment of the present invention. The user interface elements in the resource providing method according to this embodiment include a first key 1902, a second key 1903, a third key 1904, and a fourth key 1905. As another variation of the user interface element of the present embodiment, the four keys may be associated with the communication functions of the mobile phone network and the wireless data transmission network, respectively. For example, the first key 1902, the second key 1903 may respectively send a short message to a first contact over a mobile phone network or listen to a short message from the first contact via the mobile phone network in response to a single press. The third button 1904 may collect a voice message of the user and send the voice message to the first contact in response to a long-time pressing operation, and the fourth button 1905 may listen to the voice message from the first contact in response to a short-time single-time pressing operation. All of the above-described records of the voice message transmitted and received, the short message transmitted and received, the incoming/outgoing call, and the like are displayed in the first message area 1906. The mobile phone can provide sending and receiving of a plurality of communication information such as short messages of short message service and audio messages in data service on the same interface, the accessibility of the communication information and interface elements is further improved, and the complexity of user interaction is reduced.

Of course, it should be understood that: the specific implementation manner of sending the short message, or called short message, to the first contact through the mobile phone network in response to a single press is various, for example, a soft keyboard may be provided on a display of the mobile terminal in response to a single press by the user for the user to edit the short message, and the edited short message is sent out through an SMS short message interface in the mobile terminal through the mobile phone network in response to a sending operation of the user. Or, the user may also collect the audio signal of the user through a microphone in response to a single press of the user and convert the audio signal into short message content by using a software conversion module of "voice → text" in the mobile terminal, and then, in response to a sending operation of the user, send the converted short message content out through an SMS short message interface in the mobile terminal via a mobile phone network, where specific implementation forms are not enumerated.

In the above embodiment, when the key group on the contact communication interface is associated with different communication networks, the consistency is always maintained in form, so that the different networks used by the electronic device to establish communication are consistent with interface elements presented by a user, in the angle of use of the user, the interface elements are equivalent to the multi-network-in-one, the user cannot be aware of the diversity of the communication networks, a uniform user interface is provided for the outside under the condition of the coexistence of the multiple networks, and the user experience of 'using a single network' is given to the user. Furthermore, in the process of establishing communication by using the SMS service, conversion of "voice → text" or "text → voice" is used, allowing the user to acquire the SMS message in an audio manner and send the SMS message in an audio manner, whereby the interactive operation required by the electronic device for the outside of the SMS service is equivalent to the interactive operation required for receiving and sending the voice message in the data service. This makes the user unaware of the changes in the communication network or communication service used, improves the operability of cross-network communication of the electronic device, and the multiple network resources have consistent accessibility to the user.

Optionally, the user interface element may further comprise another third button (not shown in the figure); and establishing communication via the wireless communication network further comprises: in response to operation of the third button, an online audio group call or video group call is initiated in an alternative manner via the mobile telephone network or the wireless data transmission network. In other words, when the user operates the third button, if the network environment of one of the mobile phone network, the mobile data network, or the wireless lan is not good enough and may affect the call quality, or even the call cannot be made, the resource providing method of this embodiment may support the mobile terminal to automatically switch the network to the network with better network signal, so as to ensure the call quality.

Preferably, in all of the foregoing or following embodiments, user interface elements similar to the first button 1706, the second button 1707 and the third button (not shown in the figures) in the present embodiment corresponding to various communication means, such as sending a voice message to a contact, making a call, etc., may all be provided in a persistent manner in a directly visible portion of an interactive interface of a single hierarchy, such as the first contact interface 1703 shown in fig. 13. On one hand, the user interface elements continuously and stably exist in the same (identified) partial area on the interface, so that the user is prevented from needing to make the user interface elements reappear on the interface through additional operation when the user interface elements are automatically hidden; on the other hand, with this configuration of the user interface elements, during the communication process between the user and the first contact through the electronic device 1700, the user can collectively (collectively) provide the user with the interface resources used by the interactive interface, such as the first button 1706, the second button 1707 and the third button (not shown in the figure), which are integrated in the single interactive interface or the directly visible portion of the single user interface, without the user crossing different levels of interactive interfaces or additional operations to access all the user interface elements, in other words, this configuration of the user interface elements does not require the user to click some entry buttons to enter the next level of interface or a sub-interface of the current level of interface to access the second communication means/user interface elements after accessing the first communication means/user interface elements through the current level of interface, this further improves the accessibility of the plurality of communication resources in the same communication network or in different communication networks to the user or the efficiency of the interaction of the user in communicating with the first contact.

The resource providing method according to some other embodiments of the present invention further includes: responding to the switching operation of the user, switching and showing the second contact person interface or the application program entrance from the first contact person interface, and enabling the user to switch the contact person or switch to other function interfaces through a single action, so that the interaction complexity is reduced, as shown in FIG. 4, and the aforementioned titles are the same "Key-press Button layout and form and function thereof"the various buttons and other user interface elements referred to in the embodiments can be combined or re-used with the embodiments described herein and above. Of course, the switching operation may also include a simple set of interactive operations, i.e., switching contacts or switching to other functional interfaces through multiple actions, such as first displaying a first contact profile interface by a first gesture moving back from the first contact interface to a previous interaction level, then switching to display a second contact profile interface by a second gesture,then, a third gesture is performed to enter a next interaction layer to display a second contact interface or an application, which may refer to the interface interaction diagram shown in fig. 3. As for the functions of the user profile interface described above, they have been described previously and may not be described in detail.

In addition, the application program entry may be a first function interface corresponding to an application other than communication interaction, the first contact interface, the second contact interface and the first function interface all belong to or are associated with a single program or associated programs, and the first contact interface, the second contact interface and the first function interface are all located at the top level of interaction of the single program, so that the interaction interfaces may be switched with each other at the first level of interaction of the application in response to a switching operation by a user. Also, in some embodiments described above or below, a single program or associated programs may run a single program during the startup phase of the electronic device to load the first contact communication interface on top of the software interaction hierarchy of the electronic device, such that the first contact interface, the second contact interface, and the first functional interface are on top of the interaction of the entire software system including the operating system after the system of the communication apparatus is started. As previously described, the user may access the contact interface and other functional interfaces through a first level of interaction of the software system of the communication device. For the user, the contact interface involves interactive operations, and thus, the contact interface is also called a contact interactive interface, and for this, the details may not be repeated. The first contact interface may comprise a single level of interactive interface, i.e. a communication record interface between the user and the contact. Of course, the first contact interface may also include two levels of interactive interfaces, such as a user profile interface and a user-to-contact communication record interface, in which case, typically, after system startup of the communication device, the user profile interface in the first contact interface will be loaded on top of the interaction of the entire software system for direct access by the user after startup of the communication device. In summary, this is a resource configuration that is oriented to communication with a contact, or a resource configuration that is centered on contact-related information, which greatly increases the accessibility of the contact-related information and the resources surrounding the contact, such as various available communication functions, to the user. This is completely different from the prior art resource configuration that is oriented by the differentiation of the application, the function/group of the software (function group).

It is worth noting that: the first functional interface may belong to or be associated with a single program of the communication device, but the first functional interface or the content provided by the first functional interface, such as an application program, may be developed by a third party, for example, may be a plug-in developed by the third party, or a separate third party application program running outside the system of the communication device or outside the operating platform of the communication device. Shortcuts to these plug-ins or third party applications are provided to the user at the communication device through the first functional interface. If the third party application is launched, the interaction interface of the third party application is presented at the communication device, but if the third party application exits, the first interaction hierarchy of the software system of the communication device, such as the first contact interface, the second contact interface, and the first functional interface, will still be presented on the display of the communication device.

Optionally, the profile interface may include an avatar picture of the first contact and a display area for displaying a single piece or a few pieces of latest information in turn, the latest information including weather, stock market, health information, latest instant message, or reminder information (reminder).

Some embodiments of the second resource providing method

In another embodiment of the present invention, a resource providing method for an electronic device is provided, which may be optionally executed at an electronic device having a processor unit, a memory, and a display, fig. 14 is a flowchart of a resource providing method according to another embodiment of the present invention, and as shown in fig. 14, in step 1801 of the resource providing method, the electronic device is provided with a plurality of communication resources that can respectively establish communication with a first contact, the plurality of communication resources are operable to generate a plurality of communication information through at least one communication network, wherein the at least one communication network is associated with the plurality of communication resources, for example, in a communication coupled (communicative) manner. Here, the plurality of communication information have different service properties, for example, the plurality of communication information may be respectively classified into two or more service properties, including a voice service and a short message service carried by a mobile phone network, a data service carried by a WLAN, and the like; and in step 1802, integrating and configuring user interfaces corresponding to the plurality of communication resources to an interactive interface corresponding to the first contact. Step 1801 and step 1802 have no chronological order.

From the perspective of the user's interaction, the above step 1802 may be understood as "configuring the communication resource with the first contact person as a guide", in other words, performing reconfiguration of the user interface of the communication resource with the first communication object as a center (central), so that the user can establish access to the corresponding communication resource with the first contact person through fewer interactions, which improves the accessibility of the plurality of communication resources.

Optionally, the plurality of types of communication information includes, but is not limited to: communication information of online connection, such as online video, online voice, etc.; or call information generated by communication over a mobile telephone network, Short Message Service (SMS), or text information, audio information, video information, picture information, and other types of data information generated by communication over a wireless data transmission network, which may further include address location information, files, data, and the like.

Optionally, the first contact interface belongs to a single program or a plurality of associated programs configured in the electronic device, the plurality of communication resources include a plurality of interfaces corresponding to at least one communication network, and the plurality of communication resource providing step 1801 further includes: a plurality of interfaces corresponding to at least one communication network are provided integrally to a single program or associated programs.

The at least one communication network and the plurality of interfaces corresponding to the at least one communication network respectively follow different communication protocols. Any of a plurality of communication network interfaces operable to communicate over a communication network corresponding to the interface to generate at least one of a plurality of communications of different traffic properties.

Optionally, the at least one communication network comprises a plurality of wireless communication networks having different service properties corresponding to a plurality of communication information, for example comprising a mobile telephone network and a wireless data transmission network, and the electronic device is a mobile communication terminal. It should be noted that: a single communication network may correspond to multiple service properties, for example, here a mobile telephone network may correspond to two different service properties: short message service, voice telephony service, or simply, voice service. Thus, it can be understood that: communication over a single mobile telephone network can generate two different communications, namely, short message and incoming/outgoing call recorded voice telephone information. Here, the correspondence between a single communication network and a plurality of service properties or a plurality of communication information with different service properties, which is described by taking a mobile phone network as an example, may be applied to the methods, apparatuses, and devices of all the embodiments of the present invention before and after including the related embodiments under the heading "method and device for providing graphic elements across interfaces", and thus, further description may not be repeated in other embodiments. In addition, the wireless data transmission network includes a WLAN and a mobile data network, and the plurality of communication resources include a mobile phone network interface, and may further include a cellular module, a voice interface, a short message interface, and a corresponding hardware chip and a driver thereof. The plurality of communication resources may also include a mobile data network interface, a communication interface of a WLAN, etc.

Optionally, the first contact interface preferably comprises only a single interface, but may also comprise a plurality of interfaces. A single interface or multiple interfaces may all belong to a single program or to associated multiple programs. Generally, multiple programs referred to previously or hereafter as related programs may be developed and packaged for distribution by the same company or by multiple related companies.

Optionally, the plurality of user interfaces in the resource providing method of the above embodiment include a plurality of input interfaces that can respectively respond to a plurality of different operations of the user to enable communication through a plurality of communication networks. In the resource providing method of some embodiments, the plurality of user interfaces further include a first message region, the plurality of communication networks have different service properties corresponding to the plurality of communication information; the resource providing method further comprises: in response to a plurality of operations applied to the plurality of input interfaces, communicating with a first contact through a plurality of wireless communication networks to generate a plurality of communication information of different business properties respectively; and integrating a plurality of communication information aiming at different business properties of the first contact to provide in the first message area. By the resource providing method of the embodiment, the user interface and the input interface of the plurality of communication networks which can be used for the user to access different service properties are integrated on the interactive interface, so that the accessibility of the plurality of communication networks and the plurality of communication information to the user is further improved.

Alternatively, the communication network is a wireless communication network, correspondingly, the electronic device is a mobile terminal, and the communication resources are compatible with the wireless communication network so as to be communicably accessible to the wireless communication network. The plurality of input interfaces includes a first button and a second button.

Establishing communication over a plurality of wireless communication networks may include: in response to the operation of the first button, a data service message is transmitted through the wireless data transmission network, and in response to the operation of the second button, the data service message received through the wireless data transmission network is output. Or the step of establishing communication via a plurality of wireless communication networks may further comprise: in response to an operation of the first button, a telephone call is initiated to or received from the first contact through the mobile phone network, and in response to an operation of the second button, a short message service is established with the first contact through the mobile phone network or a short message from the first contact received through the mobile phone network is output.

In the following embodiments, the resource providing method in the embodiments is described by taking an example in which the wireless communication network includes a mobile telephone network and a wireless data transmission network.

Alternatively, the input interface is a virtual interface implemented in software, which is respectively associated with a plurality of communication networks on the one hand and corresponds to a plurality of different operations from the user on the other hand, in other words, the input interface can establish communication by connecting the mobile telephone network and the wireless data transmission network through the mobile telephone network interface and the wireless data transmission network interface respectively in response to the plurality of different operations applied by the user, thereby respectively generating a plurality of communication information of different service properties,

the operation of the plurality of communication resources may be controlled in response to a plurality of operations to enable communication of the plurality of communication resources through a respective plurality of communication networks. Such an input interface is not limited to a specific implementation form and may be, for example, one or more software buttons or the like. Variants of the input interface being referred to by headings "Key/button layout and its form and functionThe description below, and the interface elements of the user interface in the embodiment of fig. 15 and 13, are not repeated here.

In the resource providing method of another embodiment, the plurality of user interfaces further include a first message area as an interface for outputting or presenting communication information to the outside, which may also be understood as: the single program or the associated plurality of programs described above may be executed by the processor unit to implement part of the user interface in the form of a first message area (animated) on the display. Correspondingly, the resource providing method according to some embodiments of the present invention may further include: in response to a plurality of operations applied to the plurality of input interfaces, respectively communicating with a first contact through a mobile telephone network interface, a wireless data transfer network interface, via a mobile telephone network and a wireless data transfer network, to respectively generate a plurality of communication information of different service properties, comprising: i) voice service information, ii) short message service messages; iii) a data traffic message comprising one or more of: audio messages, video messages, picture messages, geographic locations, text messages, files, data; and, the step of providing integration further comprises: at least two items of voice service information, short message service information and data service information aiming at a first contact person, which are generated through a mobile telephone network and a wireless data transmission network, are arranged and displayed in a first message area according to occurrence time sequence. With the above steps in the resource providing method of this embodiment, the first contact is further used as a center (centric), and communication information respectively communicated with the first contact through a plurality of communication interfaces, such as i) and ii), or ii) and iii), or i) and iii), or all three items, i.e., i), ii) and iii), transmitted via one or more communication networks, such as a mobile phone network, a mobile data network, a WLAN, etc., are integrally presented in the first message area. Here, by integrating and displaying the plurality of communication information from one or more communication networks bearing different communication services, the requirements on interaction level and quantity in the process of the user operating the mobile terminal to access the relevant communication information are both reduced, for example, the user does not need to access different application programs such as a call management program, a short message management program and the like in a mobile phone respectively to obtain two different communication information respectively; similarly, it is not necessary to access different application programs such as short message management program and instant messaging program in the mobile phone to obtain two kinds of communication information with different service properties such as short message and voice message. Further improving accessibility of related communication resources/information in user interaction

Alternatively, in the arrangement display step described above, only the latest one or more records among the plurality of communication information of the mobile phone communication and the wireless data transmission communication may be displayed in the first message area.

Optionally, in the resource providing method according to some embodiments of the present invention, the first contact interface belongs to a single program or a plurality of associated programs, and the resource providing method may further include the steps of: the single program or the associated plurality of programs are run during a startup phase of the electronic device to load the first contact interface at a top level of a software interaction hierarchy of the electronic device. Preferably, the first contact Interface is loaded at a top level of a software interaction hierarchy of the electronic device as a part of a system level User Interface (UI), and is configured to be mutually switchably displayed through the display in parallel with other interfaces of the plurality of application interfaces configured in the single program at the top level of the software interaction hierarchy of the electronic device in an exclusive manner. Related communication resources, communication information and the like are also automatically provided for the user through the first contact person interface, and the accessibility of the communication resources and the communication information in user interaction is improved. Of course, a single program or associated multiple programs described above may also be run as a routine application, in response to a user selection. Through the 'exclusive' setting mode, the communication contact person is used as the center or the direction is used as the guide, a plurality of communication information or communication resources such as user interfaces aiming at the communication network are preferentially integrated and configured at the middle upper layer of the interaction hierarchy, and the accessibility of the related information of the contact person and the man-machine interface of the communication is convenient.

Optionally, in response to a switching operation of a user, switching to display a second contact interface or a first function interface from the first contact interface; the first contact interface, the second contact interface and the first function interface belong to or are related to a single program and are positioned at the top layer of the interaction of the single program.

The first functional interface may be a portal corresponding to an application other than the communication interaction application. The first contact interface, the second contact interface and the first function interface belong to or are associated with a single program or a plurality of associated programs, and the first contact interface, the second contact interface and the first function interface are positioned at the top layer of the interaction of the single program, so that the interactive interfaces can be switched with each other on the first level of the interaction of the application in response to the switching operation of a user. Meanwhile, in some embodiments described above or below, a conventional operating system such as android may be customized to integrate part of programs related to a contact communication interface into an operating system of an electronic device so as to collectively form a single program at a system level, and a program component related to a communication application interface is used as an operating system User Interface (UI), and multiple interfaces such as a contact communication interface in the single program are presented to a user at the first time after the completion of the startup. The single program or the associated plurality of programs may be run during a start-up phase of the electronic device such that the plurality of interfaces comprised by the application will run exclusively on the display of the communication means at the top level of the software interaction hierarchy of the electronic device, preferably the first contact communication interface is loaded at the top level of the software interaction hierarchy of the electronic device in juxtaposition with the other interfaces of the plurality of application interfaces configured in the application. In this way, the first contact interface, the second contact interface and the first functional interface are on top of the interaction of the entire software system, including the operating system, after system start-up of the communication device. Through the 'exclusive' setting mode, the communication contact person is used as a center or the communication contact person is used as a guide, a plurality of communication information or communication resources such as user interfaces aiming at the communication network are preferentially integrated and configured at the middle upper layer of the interaction hierarchy, and the accessibility of the related information of the contact person and the communication man-machine interface is improved.

As before, the user may access the contact interaction interface and other functional interfaces through operation of the first hierarchical level of interaction of the software system of the communication device. The first contact interface may comprise a single level of interactive interface, i.e. a communication record interface between the user and the contact. Of course, the first contact interface may also include two levels of interactive interfaces, such as a user profile interface and a user-to-contact communication record interface, in which case, typically, after system startup of the communication device, the user profile interface in the first contact interface will be loaded on top of the interaction of the entire software system for direct access by the user after startup of the communication device. In summary, this is a resource configuration that is oriented to communication with a contact, or a resource configuration that is centered on contact-related information, which greatly increases the accessibility of the contact-related information and the resources surrounding the contact, such as various available communication functions, to the user. This is completely different from the prior art resource configuration that is oriented by the differentiation of the application, the function/group of the software (function group).

It is worth noting that: the first functional interface may belong to or be associated with a single program of the communication device, but the first functional interface or the content provided by the first functional interface, such as an application program, may be developed by a third party, for example, may be a plug-in developed by the third party, or a separate third party application program running outside the system of the communication device or outside the operating platform of the communication device. Shortcuts to these plug-ins or third party applications are provided to the user at the communication device through the first functional interface. If the third party application is launched, the interaction interface of the third party application may be presented at the communication device, but if the third party application exits, the first interaction hierarchy of the software system of the communication device, such as the first contact interface, the second contact interface, and the first functional interface, will still be presented on the display of the communication device.

In the above embodiment, the communication resource providing step may further include: providing a plurality of communication resources in a single program or associated plurality of programs that can establish communication with a first contact, the plurality of communication resources having a plurality of different attributes; and integrating and configuring user interfaces corresponding to the plurality of communication resources in the first contact person interface.

Optionally, the profile interface in some embodiments of the invention may include an avatar for the first contact and a display area for the single piece of information to be displayed in turn.

According to some embodiments of the invention, an electronic device comprises a display, an optional processor unit, a memory, and one or more programs; the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the processor unit, and the one or more programs include instructions for performing or causing the performance of any of the methods in the embodiments described above or below herein, and the operations of the steps therein.

Optionally, the electronic device of the above embodiment further comprises a touch-sensitive surface and one or more sensors for detecting intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface.

According to some embodiments of the invention, a computer-readable storage medium has instructions stored therein, which when executed by an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and optionally one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface, cause the device to perform or cause performance of the operations of any of the methods described above or below.

Electronic device with high operability

In addition, according to other embodiments of the present invention, another electronic device is further provided, which includes some different functional or structural units in addition to the same/similar units as those of the electronic device of the above-mentioned embodiment, and hereinafter, a detailed description will be focused on the different parts of the electronic device of the above-mentioned embodiment, and the description of the same/similar parts will not be repeated.

Fig. 9A is a schematic diagram of partial modules of one or more programs stored in a resource providing apparatus according to another embodiment of the present invention, and fig. 9B is a schematic diagram of a structure of an electronic device according to another embodiment of the present invention, in which the electronic device has two different interface states, and the first contact interface may include a profile interface 1310 of the first contact in addition to the first contact communication record interface 1310'. The electronic device of 13B displays a first contact's profile interface 1310 and a first contact communication record interface 1310', respectively. After a user's selection/confirmation of a first contact, for example, the user clicks an avatar picture of the first contact on the first contact's profile interface 1310, the electronic device 1300 may switch the interface exhibiting two different hierarchies on the display, i.e., from the first contact profile interface 1310 to the first contact communication record interface 1310 ', in response to the user's above-described operation, during which the processor executes the program module 1301. The first contact communication record interface 1310' displays detailed communication records including messages, pictures, files, etc. from networks of different business nature, as shown, such as voice messages, pictures, videos, etc. coming and going through a mobile data network or a WIFI network, and short messages, incoming/outgoing phone records, etc. coming and going through a mobile phone network. This embodiment will be described below with reference to fig. 9A and 9B.

In the electronic devices of some embodiments including the embodiments shown in fig. 9A and 9B and the embodiments under the heading "method and apparatus for providing graphic elements across interfaces", in addition to the function/structural element (element) or unit in the electronic device of each of the embodiments described above, the following may be included: the virtual at least one user interface element provided on the first contact interface, a physical connector interface, wherein the connector interface may be a pin interface of a Pogopin connector provided in the electronic device, internally connected to the processor unit in the electronic device, externally adapted to detachably connect to a probe interface of the Pogopin connector to thereby couple with at least one physical operating part on the base.

The at least one physical operation portion is disposed on a base 1320 and coupled to the processor unit (not shown) through the physical connector interface 1340, and the at least one user interface element is disposed on the first contact profile interface 1310 or the first contact communication record interface 1310', or disposed on both correspondingly. Preferably, the physical operation portion 1330A may be configured on a base 1320, and the base 1320 may be physically independent and may be used to mount the mobile terminal 1350. And the processor unit in the electronic device is connected with a connector interface 1340 for detachably coupling the physical manipulation section 1330A. It should be noted that: for simplicity of description, in other embodiments of the invention, the connector interface or simply the connector is also referred to.

The at least one physical operation section 1330A and the at least one user interface element 1330B, which substantially correspond in number and respectively correspond in association with the plurality of communication networks, may be independently operated by a user to establish communication through the plurality of communication networks. When the user operates the at least one entity operation portion 1330A or the at least one user interface element 1330B, in response to the user operation, the processor executes the program module 1201-1 to enable the electronic device to establish communication with the contact, or the first contact, on the current interface through the plurality of communication networks, respectively, to generate a plurality of communication information. Such a corresponding configuration between the at least one physical operation portion 1330A and the at least one user interface element 1330B is also applicable to other embodiments of the present invention, and may not be described in detail herein.

Alternatively, in some embodiments, including the embodiments shown in fig. 9A, 9B and embodiments under the heading "graphic element providing method and apparatus across interfaces", the at least one entity operation 1330A may comprise a first button 1330A _1 and a second button 1330A _ 2; on the first contact interface, the at least one user interface element 1330B may include a first button 1330B _1 and a second button 1330B _2, respectively; and when the user operates the at least one entity operation portion 1330A _1, 1330A _2 or the at least one user interface element 1330B _1, 1330B _2 corresponding to the first contact interface in the state that the electronic device currently displays the first contact interface, the processor executes the program module 1202-1 to make the electronic device in fig. 9B display a plurality of communication arrangements for the first contact through the mobile phone network and the wireless data transmission network on the first contact interface, such as the first contact communication record interface 1310', in response to the user operation. Similarly, upon user manipulation of at least one of the user interface elements 1330B _1, 1330B _2 corresponding to the first contact interface, the processor may also execute the program module 1202-1 to cause the electronic device of fig. 9B to display on the first contact interface a plurality of communication arrangements for the first contact via the mobile phone network and the wireless data transfer network, oriented with the first contact. The entity operating sections 1330A _1, 1330A _2 and the at least one user interface element 1330B _1, 1330B _2 each have a certain correspondence in form and function. This applies to other embodiments of the invention, which may not be described in further detail elsewhere.

Specifically, the electronic device in fig. 9B transmits some of the data service messages on the first contact communication record interface 1310 'as shown in fig. 9B through the wireless data transmission network in response to the operation of the first button 1330B _1 or 1330A _1, and outputs the data service messages received through the wireless data transmission network through the message area 1312 on the first contact communication record interface 1310' in response to the operation of the second button 1330A _2 or 1330B _ 2. Alternatively, a phone call is initiated to or received from the first contact through the mobile phone network in response to the operation of the first button 1330B _1 or 1330A _1, and a short message service is established with the first contact through the mobile phone network or a short message from the first contact received through the mobile phone network is output in response to the operation of the second button 1330A _2 or 1330B _ 2. And thereafter, in response to a switching operation of the user, the processor executes the program module 1201-1 to cause the electronic device to switch to present a second contact interface or an application entry (not shown in the figure) from the first contact interface in response to the switching operation of the user.

Optionally, as shown: the first button 1330A _1 and the second button 1330A _2, or the first button 1330B _1 and the second button 1330B _2 are disposed adjacent to each other. The program module 1201-1 is also executable by the processor to initiate an audio or video call over a plurality of wireless communication networks, such as a mobile telephone network, a mobile data network, or a WLAN, in response to the associated operation of the first button 1330A _1 and the second button 1330A _ 2.

Alternatively, the program module 1201-1 is further executable by the processor to communicate with the first contact through the plurality of communication networks to generate the plurality of communication information, respectively, in response to a plurality of different operations of the user on one of the at least one physical operation part or one of the at least one user interface element. It is noted that in the electronic device of this embodiment, the program module 1201-1 may be executed by the processor to perform different communications in response to different operations of the same physical operating part by the user, and of course, the program module 1201-1 may also be executed by the processor to perform different communications in response to different operations of the same user interface element by the user. Optionally, the operation of the first button, the second button, or other user interface element or physical operation part includes, but is not limited to, any of the following: single click, double click, short-time single press, short-time double press, long-time press, toggle, touch slide/scroll, single contact, single continuous contact, synchronous press of two or more buttons, successive press. Such variations in the physical operation portion, the user interface element, and the user input interface operation action are also applicable to the methods and electronic apparatuses of all the embodiments described above and below. In addition, it should also be noted that: the same physical operation part or user interface element, or user input interface may respond to different operation actions to trigger the processor to execute different functions, and the same applies to the method or electronic device of all the embodiments before and after.

Optionally, the at least one physical operation 1330A further comprises a physical third button, and the at least one user interface element 1330A further comprises a virtual third button (not shown); the program modules 1201-1 are also executable by the processor to initiate an online audio group call or video group call over a mobile phone network or a wireless data transmission network in response to an operation of a physical third button or a virtual third button, for example, in an alternative (alternative) manner.

Preferably, in the embodiments herein and all other similar embodiments, the at least one user interface element 1330A may include two or more graphical command input interfaces (or simply input interfaces, which are not described further herein), both provided at a single level of the first contact interface, such as the first contact communication record interface 1310' shown in fig. 9B. On one hand, the input interfaces are continuously and stably provided on the interface, which avoids the need for a user to reproduce the input interfaces on the interface through additional operations when the input interfaces are automatically hidden; on the other hand, by configuring the user interface elements, during the communication process between the user and the first contact through the electronic device 1300, the interface resources, such as the input interfaces, that the user can use through the interactive interface are integrated and collectively (collectively) provided on the single interactive interface in a persistent manner, and the user does not need to cross the interactive interfaces of different hierarchies or additional operations to access all the input interfaces, in other words, the configuration of one or more user interface elements does not need to click certain entry buttons to enter the next hierarchy of interfaces or the sub-interfaces of the current hierarchy of interfaces to access the second communication means/user interface elements after accessing the first communication means/user interface elements through the current hierarchy of interfaces, which further promotes the plurality of communication resources in the same communication network or the plurality of communication networks in different communication networks Accessibility of the individual communication resource to the user, or efficiency of interaction of the user in communicating with the first contact. For the sake of simplicity, in the method or apparatus according to some other embodiments of the present invention, a detailed description will not be given to an implementation in which multiple or all communication input interfaces are collectively provided in the same hierarchy of the interactive interface, and the multiple or all communication input interfaces may be associated with the same communication network or different multiple communication networks. For the sake of simplicity, in the method or apparatus according to some other embodiments of the present invention, a detailed description will not be given to an implementation in which multiple or all communication input interfaces are collectively provided in the same hierarchy of the interactive interface, and the multiple or all communication input interfaces may be associated with the same communication network or different multiple communication networks.

Optionally, in some embodiments described above, the at least one physical operation part and the at least one user interface element have correspondence and/or consistency in at least one of number, layout, morphology, perception, orientation, color system, color, shape, pattern.

Optionally, the one or more programs are further configured to be executed by the processor unit to present a profile interface 1310 of the first contact; the first contact communication record interface 1310' is toggled to be presented on the display in response to a confirmation operation against the first contact profile interface 1310, or an interactive interface or other application portal interface for the second contact may also be toggled from being presented from the interface for the first contact in response to a toggle operation by the user. Of course, the transition from the first contact interface to the second contact interface or other application entry interface may be through one or more operations from the user, or may span one or more different levels of interfaces.

In the title "Electronic device with high operability"some steps of the method executed by the processor unit in the electronic device of the embodiments below may be referred to correspondinglyExamination "Some embodiments of the first resource providing method'or'Resource of the second kind Some embodiments of the method of providing"some steps are exemplified, which are not described herein again.

Optionally, in some embodiments, including embodiments under the heading "method and apparatus for providing graphical elements across interfaces", the first user interface element and the second user interface element correspond functionally to an application of the first interactive interface and an application of the second interactive interface, respectively. In other words, a first user interface element that is configurable to correspond to a user interface of a first application for provision of a first interactive interface by one or more programs in the electronic device may be configured to correspond to a second application user interface for provision of a second interactive interface as the interactive interface switches to the second interactive interface, such that the first user interface element remains substantially consistent in form across the interface while differing in functionality from one application to another on the interface. Likewise, this form-preserving consistency across interfaces and the correspondence of functionality to the current interface are also applicable to the second user interface element, which may not be described in detail elsewhere.

Fig. 18 is a schematic diagram of an operation process of an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention. The following describes an operation procedure of the user switching from the first interactive interface of the communication interactive function to the second interactive interface of the album function with reference to fig. 18. In this embodiment, the first interactive interface provides a communication application and a communication interactive program, and the second interactive interface provides an application of a photo album, and accordingly, the 3 buttons 2202 included in the first user interface element can be respectively associated with functions of "sending voice message" and "listening to voice message", "making/answering call", and the 3 buttons 2201 included in the second user interface element of the second interactive interface can be respectively associated with functions of "taking/recording video", "playing picture/video", and "pausing playing".

Optionally, in the inclusion of titlesIn some embodiments, including the embodiments under "method and apparatus for providing graphical elements across interfaces", the first user interface element and the second user interface element maintain correspondence in form. In the apparatus or method of some embodiments above, the plurality of buttons included in the first user interface element and the plurality of buttons included in the second user interface element each have a certain overall similarity, for example, consistency and/or correspondence with respect to at least one of: number, layout, form, appearance, orientation, color system, color, shape, pattern. Of course there may be some local differences to identify their different functions for different interactive interfaces, for example, in the above embodiment, on 3 buttons for the album application provided on the second interactive interface, a play prompt may be set on one of the buttons, such as a simple triangle:

these buttons may be consistent and correspond to the above-described attributes when displayed across the interface, such as the two

sets

2201, 2202 of FIG. 18, which are 3 in number and arranged on the right side of the interactive interface in layout, where two buttons are arranged near the middle of the right side of the interactive interface and the third button is arranged on the upper right side of the interactive interface. Based on the similarity of interface elements such as buttons and software keys of the software across interfaces, a relatively uniform operation sense, a use habit and the like can be established for the interface operation of the user, and the efficiency of the user interaction operation is improved.

Optionally, a form consistency is maintained between the virtual key group such as the buttons on the album application interface and the calendar application interface and the physical key group set on the electronic device, for example, consistency and/or correspondence is provided for at least one of the following items: number, layout, form, appearance, orientation, color system, color, shape, pattern.

Optionally, in some embodiments, including the embodiments under the heading "method and apparatus for providing graphical elements across interfaces", wherein the first interactive interface and the second interactive interface both belong to or are associated with a single program and are at a top level of interaction of the single program.

Optionally, in some embodiments, including embodiments under the heading "method and apparatus for providing graphical elements across interfaces", the first interactive interface is a first contact interface and the second interactive interface is a second contact interface or a first functional interface. A conventional operating system such as android may be customized to integrate portions of the contact communication interface into the operating system of the electronic device to form a single system-level program, and to use program components associated with the communication application interface as an operating system User Interface (UI), with multiple interfaces such as the contact communication interface in the single program being presented to the user at a first time after the completion of the launch. In this way, a single program or a plurality of associated programs may be automatically run during a start-up phase of the electronic device, such that the plurality of interfaces comprised by the application are exclusively loaded on the display of the electronic device at a top level of a software interaction hierarchy of the electronic device, preferably the first contact communication interface is loaded at the top level of the software interaction hierarchy of the electronic device, juxtaposed to other interfaces of the plurality of application interfaces configured in the application, switchably accessible to a user via the display.

Including the title "Cross-interface graphic element providing method and apparatus",first resource providing method Some embodiments"and"Some embodiments of the second resource providing method"the first function interface mentioned in the method or apparatus of all embodiments including the related embodiments may be one, for example, a portal corresponding to an application other than the communication interaction application. The first contact interface, the second contact interface and the first function interface belong to or are associated with a single program or a plurality of associated programs, and the first contact interface, the second contact interface and the first function interface are positioned at the top layer of the interaction of the single program, so that the interactive interfaces can be switched with each other on the first level of the interaction of the application in response to the switching operation of a user. Also, some of the embodiments described above or below may be usedThe method comprises the steps of customizing a conventional operating system such as android and the like so as to integrate programs related to a contact person interface into the operating system of the electronic equipment to form a single program at a system level together, and using program components related to a communication application interface as an operating system User Interface (UI), wherein a plurality of interfaces such as the contact person communication interface in the single program are presented to a user at the first time after the completion of starting. Thus, a single program or associated programs are arranged to launch (Launcher) level applications, and the first contact interface, the second contact interface and the first functional interface are on top of the interaction of the overall software system, including the operating system, after system launch of the communication device. As before, the user may access the contact interface and other functional interfaces through a first level of interaction of the software system of the communication device. The first contact interface can comprise a single-level interactive interface, namely a communication record interface between the user and the contact, and is used for showing more detailed historical communication content between the user and the contact. Of course, the first contact interface may also include two levels of interactive interfaces, such as a user profile interface and a user-to-contact communication record interface, in which case, typically, after system startup of the communication device, the user profile interface in the first contact interface will be loaded on top of the interaction of the entire software system for direct access by the user after startup of the communication device. In summary, this is a resource configuration that is oriented to communication with a contact, or a resource configuration that is centered on contact-related information, which greatly increases the accessibility of the contact-related information and the resources surrounding the contact, such as various available communication functions, to the user. This is completely different from the prior art resource configuration that is oriented by the differentiation of the application, the function/group of the software (function group).

After the electronic device is started, some contact-related communication resources and other applications can be accessed simply without any operation of the user for multiple interaction levels of the applications, for example, the entries of the applications can be intuitively obtained at the first level of the interaction level of the software system of the electronic device. For an electronic device for communication, a user may also desire to provide more consistency or correspondence between a user interface of the communication function of the electronic device and an interface of an application program providing other functions such as photographing or photo album, so as to enhance operability of the user across interfaces during use of the electronic device, and even provide a consistent user interface across software and hardware. This enables integration of multiple different application resources, including a communication interaction application, to be provided integrally at a first interaction level of the electronic device.

Alternatively, in a graphic element providing method and apparatus including a title "Cross interface"First resource providing method Some embodiments of"and"Some embodiments of the second resource providing methodIn some embodiments, including the embodiments below, the second interactive interface comprises an album application and the user interface elements comprise user interface elements for taking pictures, taking images, playing, pausing.

Method and apparatus for providing graphic element including title "Cross interface"Some embodiments of the first resource providing method Examples of the embodiments"and"Some embodiments of the second resource providing methodThe electronic device of some embodiments, including the following embodiments, further includes a first interface of a connector, and in other embodiments, or simply referred to as a connector, the processor of the electronic device is coupled to the first interface of the connector, and the first interface of the connector is used for detachably coupling the entity operating part. Specifically, an interface of the second end of the connector is configured on a base, the physical operation part is configured on the base and coupled with the interface of the second end of the connector, and the base can be used for placing the electronic device. Thus, the corresponding two connector interfaces, which are respectively provided with the base and the electronic device, may preferably constitute a spring probe connector, which is preferably a PogoPin connector. The connector and its corresponding configuration on the physical operating part and the electronic device are also applicable in methods and apparatuses according to other embodiments of the present invention and may not be described further hereinafter. In addition, further description of the above-described communication device with a base, or an electronic apparatus including a base and a communication device that can be combined by a connector can be found in the title "Split type electronic equipment with base"examples below.

Alternatively, the physical operation section or the user interface element of the electronic apparatus of the embodiment may be functionally distinguished as a user interface configured as an application program provided in the first interactive interface and the second interactive interface by one or more programs. In other words, the physical operator or user interface element may configure the functionality of both through one or more programs to enable a user to interact with the application provided by each of the first interactive interface and the second interactive interface by operating the physical operator or user interface element, respectively. It should be noted that the physical operation part or the user interface element mentioned in the present embodiment is basically equivalent in terms of the operability of the mobile terminal, that is, the user can perform the interactive operation with the mobile terminal through the virtual user interface element, which can be basically realized by means of the physical operation part. The physical operation part and the virtual user interface keep basic consistency in functions and forms, so that the operability of mobile terminals or electronic equipment such as mobile phones is improved. The formal and functional correspondence between the physical operation parts or the virtual user interface elements shown in this embodiment is also applicable to the methods and apparatuses according to other embodiments of the present invention, and may not be described in detail hereinafter.

Method and apparatus for providing graphic element including title "Cross interface"Some of the first resource providing methods Examples"and"Some embodiments of the second resource providing methodIn the electronic device of the embodiments including the following embodiments, at least one communication network includes a wireless lan and a mobile communication network, and a mobile phone or a mobile terminal as an electronic device having a communication function may be separated from a base and operate independently by connection or disconnection of the PogoPin connector. One or more programs stored in the mobile terminal are executable by the processor unit to: the mobile terminal is switched between the wireless lan and the mobile communication network according to at least one of i) a network switching operation from a user, ii) a communication network condition around the mobile terminal, and iii) connection or disconnection of a connector.

Fig. 19 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal communication device according to another embodiment of the present invention. The following describes in detail the operation of the communication apparatus according to the embodiment in connection with fig. 19, such as the occurrence of network connection switching during the connector connection/disconnection process. The terminal communication device of this embodiment further includes a connector interface 2340, the connector interface 2340 is internally connected to the processor unit, and the connector interface 2340 is externally used for detachably coupling the physical operating part, for example, through a second connector interface 2340' provided on the base 2320. The base 2320 is physically independent of the cell phone 2310. The operation unit is embodied as a physical keyboard 2330, the physical keyboard 2330 is disposed on the housing of the base 2320, and both ends of the connector interface 2340 are disposed on the housing of the mobile phone 2310 and the base 2320, respectively, so that the physical keyboard 2330 can be connected to the processor disposed inside the communication device through the connector interface 2340.

Alternatively, for the embodiment of the communication device shown in fig. 19 including the connector interface 2340 and the base 2320, as well as for all other embodiments of the communication device, one or more programs may be executed by the processor to: switching data links of the communication device between the wireless local area network and the mobile data network according to one or more of the following three items: i) active switching operations to the communication network from the user, ii) ambient (ambient) communication network conditions, in particular signal strength of the WLAN, iii) connection or disconnection of the connector interface 2340.

Specifically, on the one hand, in some exemplary application scenarios, a wireless data transmission network signal of the WLAN is generally available at a regular site such as an indoor site of the user for the mobile phone of the user to access, and meanwhile, a mobile communication network is also accessible, so that a signal of the WLAN is stronger and more stable, in such a scenario, one or more programs in the mobile phone 2310 may be executed by the processor to enable the mobile phone 2310 to access the indoor WLAN, and as a geographic location of the user changes, for example, the user moves from the indoor to the outdoor, the change in the geographic location may cause a communication network condition around the mobile phone 2310 carried by the user, such as a signal strength of the wireless communication network, to change. Generally, the WLAN signal will be weaker and weaker while the user is moving, and the signal from the mobile communication network will be stronger, and when the WLAN signal falls below a predetermined threshold, one or more routines within the handset 2310 can be executed by the processor to cause the handset 2310 to access the mobile communication network. If the user returns to a surrounding area of a home or regular premises, one or more programs within the handset 2310 may be executed by the processor to cause the handset 2310 to re-access the WLAN based on a comparison of signal strengths of the available multiple networks.

Meanwhile, it is worth noting that: the handset 2310 may be used in conjunction with the base 2320 or may be used independently as a mobile terminal. When the user is indoors, the mobile phone 2310 may be placed on the base 2320, and the mobile phone 2310 is operated through the physical keyboard 2330 disposed on the base, whereas when the user is outdoors, the user typically operates the mobile phone through the virtual keys/buttons provided on the screen of the mobile phone 2310, which correspond to and/or are consistent with at least one of the number, layout, shape, appearance, orientation, color system, color, shape, and pattern of the keyboard 2330, which is not described herein in detail in the following of the heading "high operability electronic device".

In summary, one or more programs within the handset 2310 can be executed by the processor to synthetically decide to access the handset 2310 to a WLAN or mobile communications network based on connection or disconnection of a connector, or based on connection or disconnection of a connector in conjunction with communications conditions or communications environments of the network. Wherein the communication conditions of the network include: the signal strength, the network connectivity, the stability, and other conditions and network states of the surrounding communication network. For the switching connection between the WLAN and the mobile data network of the electronic device or the mobile communication apparatus such as the mobile phone, and the corresponding selective configuration or reconfiguration of the communication key set and the user interface element provided on the first contact communication interface, so as to enable the electronic device to enter the mobile phone mode or the internet mode, reference may also be made to the description under the heading "switching between the internet mode and the mobile phone mode", which is not repeated herein.

In addition, optionally, the media capturing unit in the communication device may include at least one of a microphone and a camera, and the media playing unit may include at least one of a speaker and a display.

When the handset 2310 can be used in conjunction with the base 2320, i.e., the connector interface 2340 is connected to the connector opposite-end interface 2340' provided on the base, the user is also generally indoors and the WLAN signal is strong, and correspondingly, the handset 2310 may automatically access the WLAN. When the user takes the mobile phone 2310 off the base 2320 and separates the two interfaces, so that the connector interface 2340 is disconnected from the connector opposite-end interface 2340' provided on the base, at this time, generally, the user may move outdoors and therefore get away from the WLAN, so the mobile phone 2310 may also automatically access the mobile communication network, especially establish a data link of the mobile phone through the mobile data network, or comprehensively judge that the mobile phone 2310 should be accessed to the mobile communication network or maintain the access state of the WLAN according to the disconnection state of the connector, the signal strength of a plurality of communication networks available in the environment, and whether a network switching operation of the user occurs. In other words, as a result of switching the communication device between different communication networks such as a wireless lan and a mobile data network, it is possible to still maintain the connection with the current communication network or switch from the current communication network to another available communication network, which maintains the quality and stability of the communication connection and obtains the overall optimal communication effect.

In the one or more programs in the mobile phone 2310, when the communication device such as the mobile phone is combined with the base, a signal identifying connection with the base is sent to the operating system or the processor of the mobile phone through the data interface in the connector interface 2340, and after the one or more programs obtain the signal/event notification through the software system, the corresponding program module may switch the WLAN in the connection room, and switch the software mode to the "internet mode" or "internet mode". On the contrary, when the communication device such as the mobile phone is disconnected from the base, the signal identifying the disconnection from the base is sent to the operating system or the processor of the mobile phone through the data interface, and after one or more programs obtain the signal/event notification through the software system, the corresponding program module can be switched and connected to the mobile communication networks such as 3G, 4G, 5G, and correspondingly, the software mode of the system is also switched to the "mobile phone mode" (mobile phone mode). The "mobile phone mode" and the "internet mode" described above are generally associated with a home scene and an outdoor mobile scene, and in particular, may involve different software, hardware resource invoking and operating modes or user-provided interactive resource providing modes and thus different interactive styles. For example, in the "mobile phone mode" mode, communication resources such as voice telephone service carried by a mobile phone network, short message service, or data service carried by a mobile data network are mainly used or by default. And is mainly used in the above-mentioned "internet mode" or by default uses instant communication resources such as video telephony, voice messages, etc. carried over WLAN, internet. In addition, in the "internet mode", resources such as a camera in the mobile phone can be automatically activated to turn on the monitoring function, and in the "mobile phone mode", the resources and functions related to the camera are turned off and the speaker is enabled. In "mobile phone mode", the processor may be configured to automatically activate resources such as GPS in the handset to turn on location/navigation services for the user outdoors; while in the "internet mode" this functionality and related resources are turned off.

Further, if the above-mentioned switching of the connection in the WLAN or the mobile communication network by the handset 2310 automatically does not meet the user's requirement, the user may also switch the communication network associated with the user interface element or the communication operation interface provided on the handset according to the actual usage scenario, for example, switch the communication capability provided by the user by default between the WLAN-based data service and the short message service and the voice service based on the mobile phone network. The handset 2310 will provide the user with the default communication capability via the user interface to switch between WLAN-based data services and mobile phone network-based short message services and voice services, while the data link of the communication device may also be switched between WLAN and mobile data networks. In other words, one or more programs within the handset 2310 are executable by the processor to cause the handset 2310 to switch connections between the wireless local area network and the mobile data network in response to a handover operation from a user of a default communication service profile provided by the terminal communication device via the communication interface, while the handset 2310 generally maintains access to the mobile telephone network.

In the communication device of some of the embodiments above or below, the media playing unit comprises a display, preferably a touch display; one or more programs are executable by the processor unit to: providing, via the display, a first user interface array corresponding to the wireless data transmission network and a second user interface array corresponding to the mobile telephone network in response to any one of: i) network switching operations from the user, such as closing a connection to the WLAN, ii) changes in ambient communication network conditions, such as signal strength of the WLAN, iii) connection or disconnection of a connector between the base and the handset. The second user interface array and the first user interface array respectively comprise one or more buttons and other interface elements presented on the display, and users can operate the buttons to establish communication through communication networks such as WLAN, mobile data network and mobile telephone network.

It is worth noting that: the connectors between the base and the mobile phone in the communication device according to the embodiments of the present invention described above and below may include a spring probe connector, such as a Pogopin connector, having a probe interface and a pin interface at two ends thereof, respectively, and thus are not easily damaged even when repeatedly inserted and pulled out. Preferably, the base is provided with a probe interface of the Pogopin connector, and the handset is correspondingly provided with a pin hole interface of the Pogopin connector.

Alternatively, when the electronic device is switched in connection between the wireless local area network and the mobile communication network, one or more programs stored in the electronic device may be executed by the processor unit to: in response to the electronic device switching connection to the wireless local area network, the user interface elements on the first interactive interface are reconfigured, functionally and formally, to associate with the wireless local area network. Or one or more programs stored in the electronic device may be executable by the processor unit to: the user interface elements on the first interactive interface are reconfigured, functionally and formally, to associate with a mobile communications network, particularly a mobile telephony network, in response to the electronic device disconnecting from the WLAN or switching access to the mobile data network after disconnecting from the WLAN.

Fig. 20 is a schematic view of an interactive interface in a terminal communication device according to another embodiment of the present invention. Taking the terminal communication device in the embodiment shown in fig. 20 as an example, the user interface elements or communication key groups, such as the second user interface array and the first user interface array shown in the figure, may reconfigure their functions and forms after the network connection of the communication device is switched, which is exemplified below.

As shown in fig. 20, the terminal communication device on the left side is in "mobile phone mode", has access to a mobile phone network and a mobile data network, and the first user interface array 2430A provided on the first contact interface on the display of the terminal communication device, preferably associated with the mobile phone network, comprises three interface elements, or so-called three buttons, on the touch display, corresponding to the communication via the mobile phone network between the current contact on the display and "send short message", "listen short message", "online call", respectively. The terminal communication device on the right is in "internet mode" accessing the mobile phone network and the WLAN, and a second user interface array 2430B provided on the first contact interface on the terminal communication device display, preferably associated with the WLAN, comprises three buttons, corresponding to communications via the WLAN "send voice message", "listen to voice message", "video call" respectively for the current contact on the display. Of course, when the user operates the second user interface array 2430B on the terminal communication device on the right side of the "internet mode" to establish the data traffic type communication described above, the data traffic type communication may also be established over the mobile data network, such as in the case where the WLAN is temporarily inaccessible.

One or more programs stored in the memory of the terminal communication device of this embodiment may be executed by the processor unit (not shown in the figure) to capture a first media signal, such as a voice message, a video message, through a media capturing unit, such as a microphone, a camera, etc., and transmit the first media signal, such as a voice message or a video message, through the wireless data transmission network, in response to a fifth operation, such as a single long-time press, a double-click touch, etc., of the middle button of the three buttons of the second user interface array 2430B by the user. In general, wireless data transmission networks may include WLANs as well as mobile data networks belonging to mobile communication networks. Additionally, the one or more programs are also executable by the processor unit to output, by the media playback unit, the second media signal received via the wireless data transmission network through the speaker, the display, and the like, in response to a sixth operation, e.g., a single press/touch, of a lower button of the three buttons of the second user interface array 2430B by the user. Alternatively, the second media signal and the first media signal are not limited to the voice message described above, but may be a video message, a text message, etc. belonging to a data service message. By integrating and displaying a plurality of communication information from one or more communication networks bearing different communication services in the same contact interaction interface, comprehensive judgment according to various conditions can be allowed to automatically switch network connection, the behavior of a user and the network environment to be in can be predicted to a certain extent according to the on-off state of a connector, and correspondingly, the electronic equipment can synchronously provide corresponding user interfaces for networks with different service properties. The requirements on interaction level and quantity in the process of accessing the related communication information by operating the mobile terminal by the user are reduced, for example, the user does not need to access different application programs such as a call management program, a short message management program and the like in a mobile phone respectively to obtain two different communication information respectively; similarly, it is not necessary to access different application programs such as short message management program and instant messaging program in the mobile phone to obtain two kinds of communication information with different service properties such as short message and voice message. The accessibility of the relevant communication resources/information in the user interaction is further improved.

Preferably, the display may be a touch display, the mobile communication network comprises a mobile telephone network, and the one or more programs are further executable by the processor unit to: i) in response to a seventh operation of the button in the middle included in the first user interface array 2430A by the user, for example, a single press/touch or the like, a short message edited by the user is collected through the touch display, or a third media signal such as a voice of the user is collected through a media collecting unit such as a microphone, and the third media signal is transmitted through the mobile phone network; ii) in response to an eighth operation, such as a single press/touch, etc., of the lower button in the first user interface array 2430A by the user, outputting, by a media playing unit, such as a display, a speaker, etc., a fourth media signal, such as a short message, received via the mobile phone network, i.e., one or more programs executable by the processor to convert the text of the short message into speech for output in the speaker by a "text → speech" function. It should be understood that the third media signal and the fourth media signal are not limited to the short message service message, but may also be voice service related information such as voice call record, voice call, etc.

It should be noted that: the voice service information, the short message service message and the data service related information transmitted by the wireless data transmission network can be collectively or intensively displayed on the first contact interface on the display, or can be divided into a plurality of groups, and each group is respectively and independently displayed on the first contact interface in different time periods. In other words, one or more programs in the communications apparatus are executable by the processor unit to: the first media signal and the second media signal are used as a first group of information, the third media signal and the fourth media signal are used as a second group of information, and the two groups of information are respectively and independently displayed on the first contact interface instead of being simultaneously displayed on the first contact interface. The user can browse the voice service information, the short message service message, the voice message belonging to the data service message, the video message, the text message and the like simultaneously on the same first contact interface. This integrated presentation enhances the accessibility (accessibility) of the user to the information generated by the communication of multiple service properties.

In addition, it should be understood that: in a state where the communication device is accessing a mobile communication network without accessing a WLAN, such as the "mobile phone mode" of the embodiment shown in fig. 20 described below, an operation interface of a data service or a user interface element of a communication network supporting the data service may still be provided on a display of the communication device through one or more programs in the communication device, so that a user can perform data service-based communication with a current contact through the interfaces, and communication of the data service in the data service may be established through a mobile data network in the mobile communication network, such as sending a voice message, receiving a picture message, receiving a video message, and so on. On the contrary, when the electronic device is in the "internet mode" state of connecting to the WLAN, the electronic device may still provide an operation interface of the mobile voice service and the short message service or a user interface element supporting an operation on the mobile communication network on the display of the communication device through one or more programs in the communication device, so as to allow the user to send and receive short messages, receive calls, and the like. This also applies to the methods or devices, apparatuses in the other embodiments described above or below. And will probably not be described further elsewhere.

In the interaction interface schematic diagram in the resource providing method of the embodiment shown in fig. 20, for two setting modes of the communication device, the plurality of communication information may be divided into two groups, and displayed on the first contact interface in time sequence, and the plurality of communication information belonging to different service properties are integrated and output on the interface for the first contact in such a manner of "time-division multiplexing" for the first contact interface. For example, the communication device may allow the user to switch use of the communication resources of the WLAN and the mobile phone network to which the communication device is accessed in response to a user clicking on a mode switch button of "mobile phone mode"/"internet mode" at the upper right of the first contact interface. The above "mobile phone mode"/"internet mode" may also be named "outdoor mode"/"home mode", "handset"/"landline", for ease of understanding. While the communication traffic corresponding to a WLAN is mainly data traffic, e.g. sending or receiving one or more of the following information: audio messages, video messages, picture messages, geographic locations, text messages, files, data, and so forth. Communication services corresponding to mobile communication networks, particularly mobile telephone networks, are mainly voice services, short message services. Communication information of data services such as sending and receiving of voice messages can be displayed on the first contact interface (not shown in the figure) in the internet mode, and communication information such as voice calls and short messages can be displayed on the first contact interface in the mobile phone mode, as shown in a first message area 2403 in the left side of the figure 20. Of course, it should be understood that: voice messages, video messages, text messages, etc. belonging to the data service message may also be independently displayed on the first contact interface in the internet mode, such as the first message area (not shown in the drawing). Further, not limited to the above-described plurality of communication information being displayed in the same space at different times, for example, the first contact interface, the plurality of communication information may be displayed in the first contact interface collectively at the same time, as shown in the first message area 2403 in the right diagram in fig. 20, the communication records of "voice call incoming call record" and "short message" are all from communication through the mobile phone network, and the "internet voice message", "geographical location information" and "picture" are all from the mobile data network or the wireless data transmission network such as WLAN. Here, by integrating and displaying the plurality of communication information from one or more communication networks bearing different communication services, the accessibility of the plurality of communication information corresponding to the plurality of service properties is enhanced, and the interaction complexity of the user in the process of accessing the information is reduced, for example, the user does not need to access different application programs such as a call management program, a short message management program and the like in a mobile phone respectively to obtain two different communication information respectively; similarly, it is not necessary to access different application programs such as short message management program and instant messaging program in the mobile phone to obtain two kinds of communication information with different service properties such as short message and voice message.

Of course, the user interface elements available for the user to operate and use the communication capability of the mobile data network, the mobile phone network, the WLAN, etc. may be collectively provided in the first contact interface, or may be displayed on the first contact interface 29-0 in time sequence, for example, in a packet form, and may correspond to the communication network actually accessed by the electronic device or the communication apparatus, or may be unrelated to the communication network available for or actually accessed by the communication apparatus, and the user interface elements and the communication key group on the first contact interface 29-0 are customized by the user. Reference may also be made herein to various variations of the manner in which the plurality of communications of different business properties are displayed on the first contact interface in the embodiment shown in fig. 20, and various variations of the user interface elements and the plurality of communications corresponding to different business properties referred to herein may also be applied, or may be applied with reference, to the methods or apparatuses and devices in the other embodiments described above or below. And will probably not be described further elsewhere.

Integrated communication based on multiple networks

In the process of comprisingMenu interface, interface and main interface configuration and whole interface suitable for switching of various application interfaces "Integrated interactive interface", "Single card display"In some embodiments of the method of the present invention including title related embodiments, the method for providing resources in an electronic device for a user to communicate with a first contact through a first contact interface may comprise 3 steps: step (ii) of4201. Step 4202 and step 4203, as shown in fig. 36, illustrate a flowchart of a resource providing method for an electronic device according to one embodiment of the present invention.

In step 4201, a communication interface for the first contact is presented on the display for presenting communication information between the user and the first contact and optionally also for presenting profile information of the first contact.

In step 4202, in response to a user manipulation of the communication manipulation interface, a communication is established with a first contact through at least one communication network to generate a plurality of communication information.

In step 4203, a plurality of communications occurring with the contact are output via the first contact communication interface.

Optionally, compriseMenu interface universally suitable for switching various application interfaces, interface and main interface configuration "place", "integrate interactive interface", "some embodiments of the first resource providing method", "single card display"In some embodiments of the method of the present invention, the at least one communication network includes a plurality of communication networks having different business properties, and the communication operation interface may include a virtual key group provided virtually on the first contact communication interface, the virtual key group being respectively associated with the plurality of communication networks. The communication operation interface may further include entity key groups physically provided to the electronic device, the entity key groups being respectively associated with the plurality of communication networks. Both of the virtual key set and the physical key set may be configured in the electronic device, and communication with a current contact on the communication interface may be established independently in response to user manipulation of both, respectively.

Optionally, compriseMenu interface universally suitable for switching various application interfaces, interface and main interface configuration "put", "integrate the interactive interface", "single card display"Methods of some embodiments of the invention, including title related embodiments, wherein the plurality of communication networks comprises a plurality of wireless communication networks, the plurality of wireless communication networks comprising mobile phonesNetworks, wireless data transmission networks. Said virtual or physical key or key set being associated with a mobile phone network and a wireless data transmission network, respectively, and said communication establishing step 4202 may further comprise: in response to a user's manipulation of the keypad, communications are established with the first contact via the mobile phone network and the wireless data transmission network, respectively, to generate a plurality of communications.

Optionally, compriseMenu interface universally suitable for switching various application interfaces, interface and main interface configuration "put", "integrate the interactive interface", "single card display"In some embodiments of the method of the invention including the title related embodiment, the plurality of communications comprises: at least two of voice service information, short message service information, and data service information. The communication establishing step 4202 may further include two sub-steps for the case that the key group is respectively associated with communication networks of different traffic properties in different time periods: 1) when the key set is associated with the mobile telephone network, responding to the operation of the key set by a user, establishing communication with a first contact person through the mobile telephone network to generate voice service information and/or short message service information; and 2) when the key set is associated with the wireless data transmission network, in response to a user operating the key set, establishing communication with the first contact through the wireless data transmission network to generate a data service message. The wireless data transmission network comprises a wireless local area network or a mobile data network.

Fig. 25A to 25B are schematic diagrams of network instant messaging and mobile phone network communication modes according to an embodiment of the present invention. Combining the sets of figure pairs to includeMenu interface universally suitable for switching various application interfaces, interface and main Interface configuration, integrated interactive interface and single-card display "The methods of some embodiments of the present invention, including the title related examples, are further described.

FIG. 25A illustrates a single contact network communication interface 29-0 having a scroll bar, or slider bar 29-3, with multiple contacts and multiple operating options, such as virtual key sets 29-2, for user activationWhile interacting with the current contact based on the mobile data network or WLAN to which the electronic device is currently attached, a communication mode switching option 29-5 is also provided in the interface 29-0 shown in fig. 25A. One or more programs stored in the electronic device are executable by the processor unit to selectively configure the keypad 29-2 to associate with communication networks of different service properties, such as a mobile telephone network or a wireless data transmission network, in response to user operation of the communication mode switching option 29-5. And, one or more programs stored in the electronic device are executable by the processor unit to establish communication of the corresponding business property through the communication network with which the key set 29-2 is associated in response to user manipulation of the key set 29-2. Or the key set can be selectively configured to be associated with a mobile phone network or a wireless data transmission network according to the connection state of the electronic device and the WLAN. In particular, the electronic device may configure virtual or physical key sets associated with the wireless data transfer network and the mobile telephone network, respectively, in response to connection and disconnection of the electronic device to the wireless local area network. Reference is made to the title "Of internet mode and mobile telephone mode Handover"the related description below will not be repeated here.

Specifically, when the user triggers the communication mode switching option 29-5 on the interface shown in fig. 25A, the electronic device enters the mobile phone communication interface of a single contact shown in fig. 25B, the interface includes a slidable navigation window area 29-3 with multiple contact options and application options, and multiple operation options 29-2 are still maintained for the user to operate and further perform communication interaction with the current contact based on the mobile phone network, for example, the user can use the top circular key of the key set 29-2 to dial a voice phone through the mobile phone network, or the user can also operate two middle or lower keys of the key set 29-2 to "listen to a short message" and "send a short message", respectively, and related communication information generated by the user by operating the communication key set 29-2 is output in the message area 29-4, a communication mode switch option 29-5 is also provided in the first contact communication interface 29-0 for the user to trigger a switch back to the network communication interface shown in FIG. 25A. In the network communication interface 29-0 of the first contact shown in fig. 25A, the virtual key set 29-2 is operated by the user to perform communication interaction with the current contact based on the mobile data network or WLAN to which the electronic device is currently connected, for example, the user may use the uppermost circular key of the key set 29-2 to make voice calls through the mobile phone network in an alternative manner or, for example, in response to the user operating the uppermost circular key of the key set 29-2, the electronic device selectively makes video/voice calls to the first contact through the WLAN, and if a phone call fails, due to a network failure or the other party is not on-line, the electronic device directly switches the communication network and makes voice calls to the first contact again through the mobile phone network. This way of establishing communication based on the alternative two communication networks may not be described in detail elsewhere. The user can also operate the middle or lower two keys in the key group 29-2 to perform "listen to voice message" and "send voice message" respectively through WLAN or mobile data network, and the related communication information generated by the user through operating the communication key group 29-2 is output in the message area 29-4. It should be noted that: here, the message area 29-4 on the first contact communication interface 29-0 may output only communication information such as a short message service and a voice telephone service generated through a mobile phone network in the message area 29-4 of the message area 29B, or may output only communication information such as a data service generated through a mobile phone network in the message area 29-4 of the message area 29A, which corresponds to a communication function that is dynamically configured by the communication key group 29-2. Of course, in the electronic device, the multiple communication information of the three types of different service properties may also be collectively presented in the message area 29-4 on the first contact communication interface 29-0, and optionally, at the same time, the set number of the virtual key groups 29-2 may also be increased on the first contact communication interface 29-0, so that the mobile phone network and the wireless data transmission network are respectively associated with the virtual key groups 29-2 in a larger number, thereby supporting the user to establish communication with the first contact through the mobile phone network and the wireless data transmission network more conveniently on the first contact communication interface 29-0, which may refer to the embodiment shown in fig. 15, and details are not repeated here.

In the above embodiment, when the virtual key group 29-2 on the contact communication interface is associated with different communication networks, the consistency is maintained all the time in form, so that the different networks used by the electronic device to establish communication are consistent with the interface elements presented by the user, in the angle of use of the user, the interface elements are equivalent to those of a multi-network-in-one, so that the user cannot perceive the diversity of the communication networks, a uniform user interface is provided for the outside under the condition of coexistence of the multiple networks, and the user experience of 'using a single network' is given to the user. Furthermore, in the process of establishing communication by using the SMS service, conversion of "voice → text" or "text → voice" is used, allowing the user to acquire the SMS message in an audio manner and send the SMS message in an audio manner, whereby the interactive operation required by the electronic device for the outside of the SMS service is equivalent to the interactive operation required for receiving and sending the voice message in the data service. This makes the user unaware of the changes in the communication network or communication service used, improves the operability of cross-network communication of the electronic device, and the multiple network resources have consistent accessibility to the user.

A communication mode switching option 29-5 is further provided in the first contact communication interface 29-0 for the user to trigger to switch from the communication interface shown in fig. 25B to the communication interface shown in fig. 25A, where the communication interfaces shown in fig. 25B and 25A are both the first contact communication interface, or can be understood as two different states of the first contact communication interface, and the main difference between the two different states, i.e. the "mobile phone mode" and the "internet mode", respectively, of the electronic device is that the communication resources provided by the electronic device for the user are different, as can be seen in the title "Integrated communication based on multiple networks"are not described in detail herein. For the "mobile phone mode" and the "internet mode", the overall background color of the first contact communication interface is set distinctively, for example, blue and green, respectively, so that the user can easily distinguish the two possible states of the electronic device. In response to the user operating the communication mode switching option 29-5, the electronic device correspondingly switches to present the interface shown in fig. 25A or the interface shown in fig. 25B, and optionally switches between the electronic devices as shown in fig. 25A and 25BWhile redefining the communication function of the interface elements thereon, the data link can be switched in the mobile data network of the WLAN or the mobile communication network, thereby differentially carrying the data traffic that may occur in the electronic device.

Optionally, in some embodiments of the present invention, the plurality of communication information in the resource providing method are respectively categorized into two or more different service properties; the first application interface element and the communication interface element respectively comprise a virtual key group 29-2; the virtual key group 29-2 on the communication interface is associated with at least one communication network; and the communication information output step further comprises: responding to the operation of a user on the virtual key set 29-2 on the communication interface, establishing communication with the current contact or the current contact group through at least one communication network to generate a plurality of communication information; and outputs a plurality of communication information by integrating them through the message area 29-4.

Optionally, in the resource providing method of some embodiments of the present invention, the plurality of wireless communication networks include a mobile telephone network, a wireless data transmission network, the wireless data transmission network includes a wireless local area network and a mobile data network; the virtual key group 29-2 can be time-division multiplexed to be respectively associated with a mobile phone network and a wireless data transmission network in different time periods, and the communication information output step in the resource providing method of the embodiments of the present invention further includes: responding to the operation of a user on the virtual key set 29-2 on the communication interface 29-0, establishing communication with the current contact or the current contact group through a mobile telephone network and a wireless data transmission network respectively to generate a plurality of communication information; and outputting a plurality of communication information aiming at the current contact or the current contact group in a message area 29-4 in an integrated mode.

Optionally, compriseMenu interface universally suitable for switching various application interfaces, interface and main interface configuration "put", "integrate the interactive interface", "single card display"The method of some embodiments of the invention, including the title related embodiment, further includes providing profile information 29-1, such as avatar, identity, etc., of the current contact or group of contacts on the communication interface 29-0, as well as a number of different ones of the above embodimentsThe communication information of the nature of the service includes: communicating information over a mobile telephone network, comprising: voice service information, short message service information. The plurality of communication information of different service properties further comprises a data service message transmitted over a wireless local area network or a mobile data network, the data service message may further comprise one or more of the following: audio messages, video messages, picture messages, geographic locations, text messages, files, data, and the like.

The integrated output step in the resource providing method of some embodiments of the present invention further includes: two kinds of communication information or all three kinds of communication information in the voice service information, the short message service information and the data service information are collectively output to the message area according to the occurrence time sequence in the same time period.

Optionally, compriseMenu interface universally suitable for switching various application interfaces, interface and main Interface configuration, integrated interactive interface and single-card display "In the methods of some embodiments of the present invention including the title-related embodiments, after integrating the communication information of the user and the contact, the related communication network, and the communication operation options on the communication interface of the contact, all the communication information can correspond to the same contact, that is, for the contact, the mobile phone stores the unique ID (or instant communication address) corresponding to the instant communication tool and the mobile phone number of the contact at the same time, and of course, the mobile phone number is also unique, in other words, different communication tools used for communicating with the contact and the addresses of the communication tools on the corresponding communication networks are integrated and stored in the same communication application in the electronic device. In addition, the communication application may store profile information such as the contact's avatar, name, identity, interpersonal relationships, etc. This improves the accessibility of the communication information to the user, as well as the operability of the electronic device.

Currently, communication modes mainly used by users include traditional mobile phone network communication, namely, mobile phone telephone and short message, and instant communication tools based on a mobile data network or WIFI, such as wechat, WATSAPP, and the like, but for users, the two communication modes are often required to be switched in a complicated manner, because the functions are provided by different software layers. In practical situations, most of mobile internet instant messaging software is mostly provided independently by third-party software as a program in an operating system of an electronic device or a communication device, and a mobile phone and a short message function are directly integrated by a system (IOS, android and the like) of a smart phone or a smart mobile internet device, so that a user needs to switch different communication application software and needs to store two sets of contact information, namely two redundant sets of address books are actually stored, and the mobile internet instant messaging software is easy to confuse and tedious to access.

After the electronic equipment such as a mobile phone and the like operates the method of the embodiment of the invention, the instant messaging function and the mobile phone communication function are integrated into a whole, and only one set of address book system needs to be established, and the switching between software is not needed, and the instant messaging address book system only needs to be used in the same software interface. Specifically, in the mobile phone operated by the method of the embodiment of the present invention, two modes, referred to as an internet mode and a mobile phone mode, are provided for one contact, and the two modes can be switched by one key through the mode switching key 29-5 in fig. 25, so that resources of the mobile phone in the internet mode can be configured for guidance by providing an instant messaging function, such as non-real-time voice information, pictures, videos, articles, sharing location, and the like. In the mobile phone mode, the resource of the mobile phone is used to provide the functions of the mobile phone network, such as making a phone call and sending and receiving a short message, and the steps of the method or the electronic device and the related interface in some embodiments of the present application are shown and described in the internet mode as an example for guidance, but it should be understood that the resource providing method for the internet mode and the related communication interface, interactive interface, interface configuration method and steps, etc. are also applicable to the mobile phone mode, and vice versa.

It is worth noting that: in the internet mode described above, the virtual key set 29-2 is communicatively associated with a wireless data transmission network, such as a WLAN or a mobile data network. Communication resources of the data traffic are preferentially provided to the user through the contact interface for instant communications occurring between the user and the contacts and the contact group through the communication interface. However, for some users, such as the elderly, the information received and sent by the user may optionally have asymmetry in the internet mode. For example, the type of information sent by the user through the message area 29-4 and the complexity of the information sending operation are simplified, and the operation of receiving the communication information through the message area 29-4 and the related resources are supported as much as possible. Because the received communications may be from young people, the types of communications may vary.

Optionally, for the asymmetry between the sent information and the received information, the types of non-real-time messages that can be received by the user are more, and the receivable messages include voice, text information, independent expressions, comprehensive information of pictures and texts, pictures, videos and the like. And in the aspect of sending the communication information, less non-real-time communication information types such as voice messages and independent facial expression packages can be provided for users to select when editing the communication information, so that simple and practical user experience is obtained for the users such as the old. The independent emoticons generally refer to independent emoticons, but are not emoticons mixed in the text message.

With respect to asymmetry, in another aspect, the user may receive a greater number of types of real-time communications, which may include voice telephony and video telephony. The types of real-time communication information which can be sent by the user are few, and only a video telephone is included, and the called contact can select whether to answer the call in a video or voice mode; wherein, real-time and non-real-time refer to whether the user response information needs real-time response or delayed response in the communication process

Integrated storage of multiple communication network information for contacts in a single program

The communication tool of the contact, such as IM software or a mobile phone, the corresponding mobile phone number in the mobile communication network, or the corresponding identification code (ID) in the wireless data transmission network, such as WLAN, or it can be understood as an instant communication address/instant message address, are all stored or mapped in the same (identification) program, such as a communication application program for the contact, which can be used by the communication application program to establish communication with the communication tool used by the current contact through the mobile phone network and the wireless data transmission network, respectively, according to the mobile phone number and the unique identification code corresponding to the contact in the instant communication mode, in the process of using the communication application program by the user, thereby generating communication information. To some extent, the contact communication application integrates the primary functions of both mobile communications (e.g., based on a mobile telephone network) and Instant Messaging (IM) software. For users of electronic devices such as mobile phones, the communication application program belonging to the communication interface senses and experiences a single communication means or communication tool. Furthermore, the resources for communication information of different service properties during communication include a communication interface of a communication network corresponding to different service properties, which is located at a lower layer of the software architecture, and an interactive interface for outputting a plurality of communication information, which is located at an upper layer of the software architecture, all integrated into a single program. This is different from the following two cases: i) the communication interfaces with different service properties are configured in a plurality of different application programs, and only a plurality of pieces of information with different service properties, which are generated through the communication interfaces, are collectively shown on the same interactive interface in the modes of forwarding among different programs and the like; ii) the unique identification code (ID) and the mobile phone number for instant messaging are configured in a plurality of different application programs, and only a plurality of information with different service properties generated by the identification code and the mobile phone number for instant messaging are collectively shown on the same interactive interface in the modes of forwarding among different programs and the like. What is mentioned here can also be applied in the corresponding scenarios of all relevant embodiments described above or below.

Switching between internet mode and mobile telephone mode

One of the differences between the mobile phone mode and the internet mode is that the set of communication keys on the user interface are associated with communication networks of different business nature. In the internet mode, the software button 29-2 on the first contact communication interface of the electronic device or communication apparatus is associated with a WLAN or a mobile data network, in particular in terms of communication functionality. In the mobile phone mode, the software key 29-2 is associated with a mobile phone network, and particularly is associated with a (functional associated with) mobile phone network in terms of communication function, which is also applicable to the communication operation interface, the user interface element, the communication key group, etc. in other related embodiments, and will not be described in detail herein. Meanwhile, the difference between the mobile phone mode and the internet mode may further include a difference in resource configuration for use and disable of a functional module such as a camera of the electronic device. Reference may be made to other related embodiments, which may not be repeated herein.

A) The user actively switches the mode, that is, the electronic device responds to the mode switch 29-5 of the user operation "internet mode/mobile phone mode", and switches the corresponding working mode of the mobile phone, that is, the association relationship between the communication key set and the plurality of communication networks with different service properties and the enabling and disabling of the related resources are configured in a transformation manner, which is not described herein again.

Furthermore, the mode switch 29-5 also allows the user to distinguish the current mode of the mobile phone, and in addition to the state of the mode switch 29-5, the user can also distinguish the two different communication modes of the electronic device by the difference of the visual effect presented by the three software keys 29-2 when configured with different communication functions and the difference of the overall background color of the communication interface 29-0 as shown in fig. 25A and 25B.

B) Mode switching is performed based on a change in hardware configuration. For example, when the handset portion is placed on the base, the electronic device may automatically switch to an internet mode in response to the connection of a connector between the handset and the base, and when the handset portion is unplugged from the base, the electronic device may optionally automatically switch to a mobile phone mode, allowing the user to preferentially establish communications via SMS services and voice services by operating a communication key set associated with the mobile phone network on the first contact communication interface. See the related examples below for details, which are not repeated herein. For the base embodiment and the electronic device formed by combining the mobile phone and the base, reference may be made to the following item entitled "detachable electronic device with base".

C) And automatically switching according to the network connection state. When the electronic device is connected to WIFI, it can automatically switch to internet mode, where the network traffic cost is the lowest, which is suitable for using the instant messaging function based on data network, so that it is preferable to allow the user to establish communication based on data service by operating the button set 29-2 on the first contact interface. If the electronic device is disconnected from the WIFI network, or the electronic device is disconnected from the WIFI network and switched into the mobile data network, the electronic device may automatically switch to the mobile phone mode, and the communication key set is functionally preferentially configured to be associated with the mobile phone network. At this time, generally speaking, the network traffic cost may be higher than the cost of transmitting the data service through the WLAN, and therefore, it is preferable to switch to the mobile phone mode, thereby allowing the user to preferentially use the SMS service and the voice service by operating the communication key set on the first contact communication interface, with the aim of reducing the communication charges. See the related examples below for details, which are not repeated herein.

Combining the cases of a) and C), for example, if there is no WLAN available in the periphery of the electronic device and the user attempts to switch the electronic device to "internet mode" by operating the mode switch 29-5 on the first contact interface, one or more programs in the electronic device are executed to communicatively associate the software button 29-2 with the mobile data network, thereby allowing the user to establish SMS service and voice service based communications by operating the button set 29-2 on the first contact interface.

Combining the cases of a) and B), for example, if the connector between the electronic device located indoors and the base is disconnected, that is, the mobile phone is pulled out of the base, the electronic device will generally disconnect the indoor WIFI network in advance and switch to the mobile data network, so as to enter the mobile phone mode, thereby meeting the outdoor communication requirement that may occur to the user. If, however, the user attempts to switch the electronic device to "internet mode" by operating the mode switch 29-5 on the first contact interface, the electronic device will determine whether the current WLAN signal strength meets the connection threshold and selectively connect the electronic device to the WLAN or mobile data network, thereby allowing the user to establish data service based communications via the WLAN or mobile data network by operating the set of keys 29-2 on the first contact interface. Of course, in this case, if the signal strength of the WLAN meets the communication requirements, the electronic device would prefer to access the WLAN, possibly because the user is not away from the residence carrying the electronic device; and if the WLAN signal does not meet the communication requirement, accessing the mobile data network to enter an Internet mode. If the network conditions of the WLAN and the mobile data network do not satisfy the communication requirement at this time, the electronic device will give a corresponding prompt to the user through the display, and temporarily maintain the association between the keypad 29-2 and the mobile phone network in the communication function, so as to support the user to temporarily establish the communication based on the SMS service and the voice service by operating the keypad 29-2.

In summary, in an electronic device or a mobile communication device, the mobile communication device may be configured to be in an internet mode or a mobile phone mode comprehensively determined based on i) a communication network condition of a surrounding environment, particularly a signal strength of a WLAN ii) a connection or disconnection of a connector between the mobile communication device and a base, iii) a mode switching operation actively performed by a user through a contact interface, one, two or all three of which comprehensively determine to configure the mobile communication device to be in an internet mode or a mobile phone mode, thereby selectively configuring the key set 29-2 to be related to a mobile phone network, a WLAN or a mobile data network in a communication function.

User operation of the mode switch 29-5 may trigger one or more programs stored in the electronic device to be executed to configure the business properties of the communication that can be established by the communication key set when operated by the user, or to selectively configure the association of the communication key set of the first contact communication interface with several communication networks of different business properties. For example, when associated with a mobile phone network, the software button set 29-2 supports audio-based retrieval of content of SMS communication messages, sending SMS communication messages, etc., whereas when associated with a mobile data network or WLAN, the software button set 29-2 supports audio-based retrieval or sending of voice messages, etc., pertaining to data services, in other words, the user switch mode switcher 29-5 may selectively reconfigure the type of communication services initiated by the user through operation of these software buttons 29-2. For electronic devices such as handsets, it is preferable to maintain access to both the mobile telephone network and one of the "mobile data network and the WLAN", which makes the communication capabilities of the "voice service and SMS service" and the "data service" available to the user at any time.

Specifically, one or more programs in the mobile communication device are executable by the processor unit to connect or disconnect the electronic device from the wireless local area network according to network conditions of the surrounding wireless local area network, and the one or more programs are also executable by the processor unit to connect or disconnect the electronic device from the wireless local area network in response to connection or disconnection of the connector, respectively. Further, one or more programs in the mobile communication device are executable by the processor unit to enter an internet mode by associating the set of virtual keys and the set of physical keys each independently with a wireless local area network in response to connection of the electronic device to the wireless local area network. The one or more programs are also executable by the processor unit to enter a mobile phone mode by associating each of the virtual key set and the physical key set independently with a mobile phone network in response to disconnection of the electronic device from the wireless local area network. For a description of the electronic device or the mobile communication apparatus switching connection between the WLAN and the mobile data network, and correspondingly selectively configuring or reconfiguring the communication key group provided on the first contact communication interface so as to enable the electronic device to enter the mobile phone mode or the internet mode, reference may also be made to the description of the embodiment shown in fig. 19, which is not described herein again.

Optionally, compriseMenu interface universally suitable for switching various application interfaces, interface and main interface configuration "put", "integrate the interactive interface", "single card display"In some embodiments of the method of the present invention, the camera is enabled in response to the electronic device accessing the wireless local area network or switching to the internet mode as described above, and the camera is disabled and the speaker and location service in the electronic device are enabled in response to the electronic device accessing the mobile data network or switching to the mobile phone mode as described above. Thereby dynamically utilizing various hands in a corresponding network environmentMachine functions and communication resources.

Optionally, compriseMenu interface universally suitable for switching various application interfaces, interface and main interface configuration "put", "integrate the interactive interface", "single card display"In some embodiments of the method according to the invention, the switching between the internet mode and the mobile phone mode is applied to all contact objects stored in the handset, in other words, when the electronic device is switched to the mobile phone mode on the first contact communication interface, the mode switching is logically applied to all other contacts as well, and after the current contact is switched to the second contact, the communication occurring on the second contact interface also uses the mobile phone mode by default.

Comprises thatMenu interface universally suitable for switching of various application interfaces, interface and main interface configuration and integration Interactive interface, single card display "In some embodiments of the method of the present invention, including the title related embodiment, the communication operation interface, e.g., a set of keys in software form virtually provided at the first contact communication interface, a set of keys in hardware form physically provided at the electronic device, may be functionally redefined according to a communication network currently accessed by the electronic device, etc., to selectively associate with the plurality of communication networks currently available. In other words, the communication associations between the keypad and the plurality of different communication networks may be dynamically configured such that a user may conveniently initiate communication with the first contact based on any one of the currently available communication networks through the keypad or interface element for communication. In addition, the physical operating part and the virtual user interface element may be functionally redefined for the application of the first interactive interface and the application of the second interactive interface, respectively. In other words, the entity operating part can be functionally configured as a user interface corresponding to similar or different application programs provided in the first interactive interface and the second interactive interface through one or more programs in the mobile phone. The virtual user interface elements may also be functionally distinct configurable via one or more programs in the handsetThe user interfaces corresponding to similar or different application programs provided in the first interactive interface and the second interactive interface. In this way, the user can operate software functions on different interactive interfaces using the same physical operating part, or can operate software functions on different interactive interfaces using the same or similar virtual user interface elements on different interactive interfaces. This follows the use habit of the user, and improves the operability of the terminal device or the electronic equipment such as the mobile phone. For example, when the interactive interface is switched, the user interface elements are correspondingly provided on the switched user interface and the functions associated with the user interface elements are redefined according to the functions of the switched user interface. For example, the first interactive interface provides a communication application program and a communication interactive program, the second interactive interface provides an application program of an album, and correspondingly, when the electronic device presents the first interactive interface, the plurality of physical buttons/keys provided on the base, or the plurality of virtual buttons/keys provided on the first interactive interface, the respective associated functions may be "send voice message" and "listen to voice message", or "make/receive phone call" and "edit/send short message", etc., while when the electronic device presents the second interactive interface, the plurality of physical buttons/keys provided on the base, or the plurality of virtual buttons/keys provided on the second interactive interface, the respective associated functions may be "take/record video", "browse pictures/video", etc.

The virtual user interface elements provided on the user interface described above may be in a form that maintains consistency with physical controls provided on the base, and the processor may also be programmed to be the virtual user interface elements that maintain form consistency across the interface. In other words, the user interface elements are configured by one or more programs in the handset to maintain formal consistency across interfaces and also to maintain formal consistency with the physical workings at the same time. For example, user interface elements distributed on the first interactive interface and the second interactive interface are configured by one or more programs in the mobile phone to have consistency and/or correspondence with the entity operations for at least one of: number, layout, form, appearance, orientation, color system, color, shape, pattern. Taking consistency of layout as an example, fig. 17 is a schematic layout diagram of an entity operation part and virtual user interface elements of an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention, and as shown in the figure, the virtual user interface element 2102 includes three virtual keys distributed on a first contact interface: "listen", "speak", and "telephone". The physical operation unit 2101 includes three physical keys provided on the base 2103: "listen", "speak", and "telephone". The key layouts of the physical operation part 2101 and the user interface element 2102 are corresponding or consistent. The two buttons of "listen", "speak" of the user interface element 2102 are disposed adjacent to each other and located in the middle of the right side of the first contact interface, and the "phone" button is located in the upper portion of the right side of the first contact interface, and accordingly, the three physical buttons of "listen", "speak", and "phone" of the physical operation portion 2101 on the base 2103 also have the same/similar layout. The method is further compatible with the use habit of the user, and the operability of the terminal device or the electronic equipment such as the mobile phone is improved.

Single card display

In the process of comprisingMenu interface, interface and main interface configuration and integration generally applicable to switching of various application interfaces "Integrated communication based on multiple networks" with interactive interface "In the method of some embodiments of the present invention, including the embodiments under the heading, a resource providing method in an electronic device may comprise 3 steps for a user to communicate with a first contact through a first contact interface: step 4101, step 4102 and step 4103, as shown in fig. 35, which shows a flowchart of a resource providing method for an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention.

In step 4101, a communication interface for the first contact is presented on the display, including a message area for accommodating communication information between the user and the first contact.

In step 4102, in response to a user operating the communication operation interface, a communication is established with a first contact through at least one communication network to generate a plurality of communication information.

In step 4103, a plurality of communications occurring with the contact are output through a message area on the first contact communication interface.

Optionally, compriseMenu interface universally suitable for switching various application interfaces, interface and main interface configuration 'Integrated interactive interface' and 'integrated communication based on multiple networks'In some embodiments of the present invention, the plurality of communication information with the contact may be categorized into one, two or more different service properties, and correspondingly, the at least one communication network may also include only one communication network or two or more communication networks, for example, one or more of a mobile phone network, a mobile data network and a WLAN. If the plurality of communications relates to two or more traffic properties, step 4103 may further comprise: the plurality of communication information are integrated and provided in a message area of a communication interface aiming at the first contact in an electronic device such as a mobile phone.

It should be understood that: for the sake of brevity, in some embodiments of the present invention, a method and an electronic device related to a "single card display" title will be described with respect to two or more communication networks, but these embodiments are also applicable to a case where at least one communication network includes only one communication network.

Optionally, compriseMenu interface universally suitable for switching various application interfaces, interface and main interface configuration 'Integrated interactive interface' and 'integrated communication based on multiple networks'In some embodiments of the present invention, the message area on the first contact communication interface may output the communication information between the user and the contact in a variety of different ways, or may output some prompt information in other applications, such as alarm timing information, calendar scheduled event expiration reminders, etc., through the message area.

Optionally, according to a simplified message output concept, comprisingUniversally adapted for switching between various application interfaces Menu interface, interface and main interface configuration, integrated interactive interface, integrated communication based on multiple networks "In some embodiments of the present invention, including the embodiments under heading, the outputting step 4103 described above may further comprise: the latest piece of the plurality of communication information is individually output in the message area in response to occurrence of the latest piece.

Optionally, compriseMenu interface universally suitable for switching various application interfaces, interface and main interface configuration 'Integrated interactive interface' and 'integrated communication based on multiple networks'In some embodiments of the present invention, including the embodiments under the heading, the outputting step 4103 described above may further include: continuously updating the message area output on the first contact communication interface with the latest one of the plurality of communication information individually.

Subsequently, the pair of FIG. 25 and FIG. 26 will be combined to include"Menu interface universally applicable to switching of various application interfaces"), Interface and main interface configuration, integrated interactive interface, integrated communication based on multiple networks "The message output manner of "one at a time" in some embodiments of the present invention, including the embodiments under the heading, is explained in detail.

In addition, fig. 25A to 25B are schematic diagrams illustrating network instant messaging and mobile phone network communication modes according to an embodiment of the present invention. Taking fig. 25 as an example, optionally, the at least one communication network includes a plurality of wireless communication networks, and the plurality of wireless communication networks further includes a mobile telephone network and a wireless data transmission network, and the wireless data transmission network includes a wireless local area network and a mobile data network; the communication interface 29-0 of the first contact is further provided with a key group 29-2, which is respectively associated with the mobile phone network and the wireless data transmission network, and the key group can respond to the click and other operations of the user, and establish communication through the communication network to generate a plurality of pieces of communication information with different service properties. The electronic device may establish communication with the first contact through the mobile phone network and the wireless data transmission network respectively to generate a plurality of communication information in response to the user's operation of the key set 29-2, including: communication information and data service messages of a mobile telephone network; the communication information of the mobile phone network includes: voice service information and short message service messages.

Optionally, in comprisingMenu interface universally suitable for switching various application interfaces, interface and main interface configuration 'Integrated interactive interface' and 'integrated communication based on multiple networks'In some embodiments under the heading, in the "integrated output step", further, at least two of the voice service information, the short message service message, and the data service message may be integrated and output to the message area 29-4.

In particular, for a further embodiment of the above-mentioned "consolidated output", reference may be made in part to the description of the method and associated contact interface in the embodiment shown in fig. 15. In the embodiment shown in fig. 15, more keys are simultaneously provided in the group of keys 29-2 on the contact interface, so that each key is associated with a communication network of a different service property.

In another further embodiment of the above-mentioned "integrated output", in the electronic device, the integrated output of the message may be performed on the first contact interface in a time division multiplexing manner, specifically, when the key group 29-2 is associated with a mobile phone network, in response to a click or the like of the key group 29-2 by a user, establishing communication through the mobile phone network and generating both the voice service information and the short message service message, and integrally outputting both the voice service information and the short message service message with the first contact through the message area 29-4 on the first contact communication interface, or outputting only one of them, for example, the short message service message. In addition, when the key set 29-2 is associated with a wireless local area network or a mobile data network, in response to a user clicking on the key set 29-2 or the like, communication is established through the wireless local area network or the mobile data network and a data service message is generated, and the data service message is output through the message area 29-4 on the first contact communication interface. In the embodiment of the method for integrating the output messages through the first contact interface, consistency is formed between the communication network associated with the button group 29-2 and the communication information output through the message area 29-4, so that the operation and the information category identification of a user are facilitated.

It should be understood that the above is merely exemplary, and in fact, there may be substantial independence between the communication network with which the key set 29-2 is associated and the type of communication information output through the message area 29-4. For example, i) when the key set 29-2 is associated with a wireless local area network or a mobile data network, the user transmits a data service message using a WLAN or a mobile data network by operating the key set 29-2, and ii) when the key set 29-2 is associated with a mobile telephone network, the user transmits a voice service message and a short message service message using the mobile telephone network by operating the key set 29-2. In both cases, the communication information output through the message area 29-4 may include three types of communication information at the same time: voice service related information, short message service related information, and data service related information. This may enable the user to retrieve, for example, data service-like communication information such as a voice message sent by the first contact over the mobile data network or WLAN via the message area 29-4, and reply to the voice message sent by the first contact via the mobile telephone network by means of a short message service by operating the set of keys 29-2 associated with the mobile telephone network on the first contact interface. Similarly, the keypad 29-2 provided on the first contact interface may also be associated with a mobile telephone network, a wireless data transfer network, or both. The way of associating the key set 29-2 with the corresponding communication network is various, for example, it may be defined that the first key in the key set 29-2 transmits SMS-type communication information via the mobile phone network in response to a single-click operation by the user, and transmits communication information of data traffic via the mobile data network or WLAN in response to a double-click operation by the user. Of course, more keys may be provided in the key set 29-2, so that each key is associated with a communication network of a different service property. For a specific example, refer to the description of the method and the related contact interface in the embodiment shown in fig. 15, which is not described herein again. In the embodiment shown in fig. 15, if the user of the electronic device needs to operate the communication key set and the user interface element to establish communication using communication networks with different service properties, it is not necessary to switch the association between the communication key set and the communication networks with different service properties by operating, for example, the communication mode switching option 29-5 in fig. 25, so that the user can directly access the communication networks with different service properties by only a single operation of the first contact communication interface, which further improves the accessibility of the communication resources and the communication information of the electronic device.

In the instant messaging software in the prior art, the design of the interactive interface is all from instant messaging tools such as ICQ, Tencent QQ and the like of the PC side, that is, the interface of the chat records is used as the element background of the whole communication interface, but for users who do not need to pay much attention to the chat records, the layout mode of the interface elements on the communication interface occupies too much screen display space of the electronic equipment, and the information is too rich, but the users lose attention to the current information or the newer information.

Fig. 26A to 26C are schematic diagrams of a first contact communication interface of a "single card display mode" and a "communication record display mode" that can be switched with each other, provided by the method according to the embodiment of the present invention. In the method of the embodiment shown in fig. 26A to 26B of the present invention, some simplified interface configuration methods for instant messaging interaction are also proposed. Fig. 26A and 26B are schematic interface diagrams of independent display of a single message in the method according to the embodiment of the present invention. The resource providing method and the interface configuration method according to the present invention will be described with reference to fig. 25, 26A, and 26B. Optionally, the first contact communication interface is provided with profile information 29-1 of the first contact, which is located above the message area 29-4, and the step of integrating and outputting in the method of the above embodiment may further include: the Latest piece (last One) is individually output in the message area in response to the occurrence, reception, or transmission of the Latest piece of the plurality of pieces of communication information. For example, electronic devices have previously generated a number of communications including: a)1 Short Message (SMS) over the mobile telephone network with the first contact sent from the first contact to the electronic device 1 minute ago, b)2 voice call records over the mobile telephone network with the first contact for an outgoing call 25 minutes ago and a first incoming call 30 minutes ago for durations 35 seconds and 3 minutes, respectively, and c)3 voice messages from the mobile data network, all received 2 hours ago. The SMS short message in a) is the latest one according to the time occurrence order. The electronic device outputs the SMS message alone in the message area 29-4 without displaying any other communication information in b), c). At the present moment, the user of the electronic device further operates the middle key in the key group 29-2 to send a voice message of data service nature to the first contact through the WLAN associated with the middle key, and then the electronic device updates and displays the latest voice message in the message area 29-4, as shown in fig. 26A, of course, the latest communication information is output through the message area update, which may be performed during the sending or receiving of the communication information, or may be updated and output through the message area 29-4 after the sending or receiving of the communication information is completed, for example, after the sending of the voice message is completed for 1-10 seconds. From another aspect, the electronic device may output the latest one of the three types of communication information, namely, the voice service information, the short message service information, and the data service information, which occur between the user and the first contact person, separately in the message area of the communication interface of the first contact person, and continuously update and output the latest one of the communication information in the message area as more communication information is continuously generated, which is not described in detail below. Of course, the latest one of at least two of the three types of communication information of the service property can be continuously updated separately in the message area output from the first contact communication interface. For example, only the latest communication information among the plurality of communication information whose service properties belong to the voice service and the short message service is output to a message area (not shown in the figure) of the interface. The communication information of the voice service includes communication information such as call duration, call occurrence time, and the like of incoming/outgoing calls through the mobile phone network, which is also applicable to all other embodiments and may not be described in detail elsewhere. Alternatively, only the latest communication information among the plurality of communication information whose service property belongs to the short message service and the data service may be output to the message area of the first contact interface.

Alternatively, an association or correspondence may be formed between the communication network with which the key set 30-2 is associated and the type of communication information output through the message area 30-4, as described above. For example, when the key group 30-2 is associated with a mobile phone network, in response to the occurrence of the latest piece of communication information of the mobile phone network, the latest piece of communication information of the mobile phone network is individually output in the message area, in other words, only the latest piece of communication information among a plurality of pieces of communication information whose service properties belong to the voice service and the short message service is output in the message area (not shown in the figure) of the interface, that is, the latest piece of communication information is continuously updated and output in the message area individually, and each time, for example, the reception/transmission occurs, one piece of communication information of the above two service properties is updated and output in the message area substantially synchronously. Alternatively, only the latest communication information of the plurality of communication information whose service property belongs to the voice service may be continuously updated and outputted to the message area (not shown in the figure), or only the latest communication information of the plurality of communication information whose service property belongs to the short message service may be continuously updated and outputted to the message area (not shown in the figure), which is not described herein again.

Alternatively, when the keypad 30-2 is associated with a wireless local area network or a mobile data network, in response to the occurrence of the latest piece of data service message, the latest piece of data service message is separately output in a message area, such as a separate piece of communication information shown in a message area 30-4 in fig. 26B, which is text information sent by the current contact through the data service. In other words, the electronic device displays only the latest piece of the plurality of communication information having the service property belonging to the data service type individually in the message area 30-4. Further, the latest piece of communication information of the data service type is continuously outputted in the message area 30-4 updated, that is, every time a piece of communication information of the data service type occurs, the latest piece of communication information is outputted in the message area 30-4 separately. Of course, the data traffic message includes one or more of the following: audio messages, video messages, picture messages, geographical locations, text messages, files, data, and video calls, voice calls, etc. established over a WLAN or mobile data network may not be repeated here.

The mode of only displaying one piece of (one at a time) latest communication information at a time or optionally, simply called a message can be simply called a 'single card display' mode, the interface element layout method in the 'single card display' mode can meet the demand of instant communication in most cases, one or more messages are output one by one in series through a message area, and the 'one by one' mode enables the electronic equipment to provide the orderliness of message flow for a user, so that the experience of the user for obtaining the messages is more intuitive. Of course, in addition to the "one-to-one" manner, the round-to-one (round) of the message may also include: after receiving a plurality of messages, the user feeds back one message, or simply "one from and one to". Whether for the "one-to-one" or "many-to-one" approach, in some embodiments, the presentation of these incoming messages in the message area may preferably be in a manner of "only one at a time being displayed", e.g., only one message that has recently occurred is displayed.

When the communication application program to which the contact person communication interface in fig. 26A or fig. 26B belongs accumulates multiple pieces of unread information for the current contact person, the electronic device also supports the user to further view more chat records that have occurred with the current contact person through the operation of the current contact person communication interface.

In the method of some embodiments, if the user applies a common or specific interaction gesture such as a click, double-click, etc. to the profile information 30-1 or the message area 30-4 in fig. 26B, the electronic device may expand the message area 30-4 on the communication interface in response to the user's predetermined operation, as shown in fig. 26C, so as to be adapted to accommodate more communication information, allowing for the collective output of more communication information in the message area 30-4. Meanwhile, the electronic device may optionally configure the profile information 30-1 on the first contact communication interface as a thumbnail to reduce the display area it occupies on the interface, thereby facilitating expansion of the message area. Profile information 30-1 may be configured above message area 30-4. Corresponding to the expansion of the message area, the electronic device may collectively (collectively) output the plurality of communication information to the message area 30-4 in fig. 26C in the course of integrally outputting the plurality of communication information, instead of displaying only the latest one of the plurality of communication information in the message area, of course, the collective presentation of the plurality of communication information in the message area may be arranged in the chronological order of occurrence of the respective communication information.

Optionally, in the message area 30-4 collectively showing the historical communication information in fig. 26C, in the resource providing method according to the embodiment of the present invention, the user may also selectively browse the communication information on a desired date through the calendar option 30-9. In addition to the historical communications being correspondingly presented in response to the user's drag scrolling, communications corresponding to the date may be located and loaded into the message area 30-4 in response to the user popping up a calendar float interface (not shown) via the calendar option 30-9 on the communications interface for the user to select the date, depending on the particular date the user clicks on the calendar float interface. Therefore, the historical communication information expected by the user can be positioned mainly through at most 1 or 2 operations of the user on the first contact person communication interface of a single layer, and the requirement for the interactive operation of the user is further simplified.

Alternatively, an association or correspondence is formed between the group of keys 30-2 in fig. 26C and its associated communication network and the type of communication information output through the message area 30-4. When the key group 30-2 in fig. 26C is associated with the mobile phone network, the communication information of the mobile phone network is collectively output to the message area 30-4 in fig. 26C in time series, instead of displaying only the latest one of the plurality of communication information belonging to the voice service or the short message service in the message area; when the key group 30-2 in fig. 26C is associated with a wireless lan or a mobile data network, data service messages are collectively output to the message area 30-4 in fig. 26C in chronological order, instead of displaying only the latest one of a plurality of communication messages belonging to the data service in the message area.

The above-described manner of individually displaying the latest single piece of communication information among the plurality of pieces of communication information through the message area of the first contact communication interface, or may be simply referred to as the "one-card display" mode as above. And collectively outputting two or more pieces of communication information through the expanded message area may be simply referred to as a communication record display mode. Of course, after the electronic apparatus enters the communication record display mode from the single-card display mode in response to the switching operation by the user, it may also be necessary to return from the communication record display mode in fig. 26C to the single-card display mode as shown in fig. 26B in response to another switching operation by the user. Specifically, in response to a user's manipulation of the profile information or message region of the first contact communication interface in fig. 26C, the electronic device may narrow down the message region and expand the profile information for presentation, as shown in fig. 26B. Correspondingly, the electronic device may also switch to the single card display mode shown in fig. 26B by the following steps, so as to output a plurality of communication information by integrating the message area of the first contact communication interface, for example, outputting the latest one of the plurality of communication information separately in the message area in fig. 26B, in other words, outputting and only outputting the latest generated communication information through the message area every time one communication information is generated. Alternatively, an association or consistency may be formed between the communication network with which the key group 30-2 is associated and the type of communication information output through the message area 30-4 in fig. 26B. Specifically, when the key group is associated with a mobile telephone network, the communication information of a mobile telephone network which is newly generated, accepted or sent is individually output in the message area; when the key group is associated with a wireless local area network or a mobile data network, the latest piece of data service message is output in the message area separately. For reference, the corresponding parts in other embodiments under the heading "single card display" can be described, and are not described herein again.

Of course, in another aspect, the first contact communication interface in fig. 26B and 26C can be considered as two sub-communication interfaces included in the first contact communication interface, for example, the first contact communication interface in fig. 26A and 30-B can be referred to as a profile interface, and the first contact communication interface shown in fig. 26C can be referred to as a communication record interface. The profile interface and the communication record interface include profile information and a message area for the current contact, respectively, as shown in fig. 26B and 26C, the profile information on the communication record interface in fig. 26C is configured abbreviated with respect to the profile information on the profile interface in fig. 26A or 26B, and the message area on the profile interface in fig. 26A is used to accommodate a single communication record; the message area of the communication record interface in fig. 26C is configured to accommodate multiple communication records for accommodating more communication information relative to the profile interface in fig. 26A. When the user operates with respect to the message area or the profile information on the profile interface in fig. 26B, the electronic device may switch presentation of the communication record interface in fig. 26C on the display in response to the operation. Of course, the display may also switch to present the profile interface of fig. 26B on the display in response to user manipulation of the message area or profile information on the communication log interface of fig. 26C. Accordingly, the user may switch between the profile interface in fig. 26B or the communication record interface in fig. 26C by operating the profile information or message area of the profile interface in fig. 26B or the communication record interface in fig. 26C, respectively, and the switching operation of the user may be an operation of a common or specific interactive gesture such as a click, a double click, etc., which may be predefined and saved in the electronic device.

Alternatively, switching between the single-card display mode and the communication record display mode of the electronic apparatus is similar to switching between the profile interface shown in fig. 26B and the communication record interface shown in fig. 26C. This switching may be performed in response to a switching operation actively applied by the user to the profile information or the message area, or may be performed automatically to switch to the communication recording interface shown in fig. 26C when two or more pieces of user unread information occur in the profile interface shown in fig. 26B, or may be performed automatically by the electronic device by issuing a prompt message (not shown in the figure) in the message area in the profile interface shown in fig. 26B to prompt the user that there are a plurality of pieces of unread communication information when two or more pieces of user unread information occur, so that switching to the communication recording interface shown in fig. 26C is performed in response to a selection operation of the prompt message by the user. Of course, the above-mentioned prompt information may be issued continuously, or may be issued from time to time, that is, the following two items are alternately output in the message area: 1) the prompt message of "multiple unread messages" is associated with 2) the latest piece of communication information. In addition to this, as described above, the user may click on the area where the profile information such as the head portrait of the current contact is located or a predetermined peripheral area in the profile interface shown in fig. 26B, or may switch to the communication record interface shown in fig. 26C. Here, the electronic device issues a notification of a plurality of unread communication messages on the first contact interface, and before that, the electronic device may determine in advance whether the relevant communication messages have been read by the user. For example, a communication may be considered read when it has been received and output through the message area for a period of time exceeding 1 minute. Or, 1) the communication information is already subjected to the user operation after being generated, such as a gesture of clicking, sliding and the like, or 2) the user is judged and captured to have a visual interaction and a physical interaction with the current contact communication interface of the electronic device through a camera, a display and the like of the electronic device, 3) the audio message is played (without being played), 4) the short text message is amplified or a related reading option is operated, 5) the long text message, the picture or the video is amplified or played, and if any of the above occurs, the related communication information aiming at the current contact occurring at the interaction stage can be determined to be in a read state.

For some users who desire simplified interaction and clear visual focus, for example, the resource providing method or the so-called interaction method provided by the above-mentioned embodiment of the present invention emphasizes the round of going (round) of communication information in the daily communication process, and presents the information one (one a time) at a time, that is, only one piece of latest information is displayed at a time, which is read or unread, or alternatively, only the received communication information from the contact may be displayed, and the communication information sent by the user of the electronic device to the contact is not displayed. The method simplifies the interactive operation process of the user, more easily focuses on the latest generated communication information, has clear and simple typesetting of the communication interface, and leaves enough breadth for showing the profile information such as the head portrait of the contact person, thereby improving the accessibility, such as readability and real-time performance, of the communication information and improving the operability of the electronic equipment.

Optionally, in the method of the foregoing embodiment, the contact communication interface belongs to a single program, and generally, the multiple interfaces configured in the electronic device also belong to the single program or multiple associated programs. In the method of the above embodiment, a conventional operating system, such as android, may be customized to integrate the programs related to the contact interface into the operating system of the electronic device to form a single program at a system level, and the program components related to the communication application interface are used as an operating system User Interface (UI), and multiple interfaces, such as the contact communication interface, in the single program are presented to the user at the first time after the completion of the startup. Thus, during the boot of the operating system of the electronic device, the single program is also loaded. By running a single program or associated plurality of programs during a startup phase of the electronic device, the single program running exclusively on the display of the electronic device at a top level of a software interaction hierarchy of the electronic device, preferably the contact communication interface is loaded at the top level of the software interaction hierarchy of the electronic device, in juxtaposition with other interfaces of the plurality of application interfaces configured in the application program at the top level of the software interaction hierarchy of the electronic device, switchably accessible to a user via the display. Therefore, the contact person communication interface and the like in the above embodiment may be automatically loaded and displayed on the display in the starting process of the electronic device, and then the communication interface in the "single card display" mode, the profile interface and the like are loaded as the default home page of the normal working state after the electronic device is started, so that the user can communicate with the relevant contact person. By loading the single program in the starting stage, the communication interface such as the single-card display mode can be automatically loaded on the interactive top layer of the whole software system of the electronic device. The method further improves the intuitiveness and the real-time property of the communication information, and also improves the accessibility and the operability of the communication application and the related information in the electronic equipment.

In some embodiments according to the invention, there is also provided a computer-readable storage medium havingInstructions stored therein, which when executed by an electronic device with one or more processors, cause the device to perform operations including, but not limited to, captioningInterface and main interface configuration, integrated interactive interface, integrated communication based on multiple networks, split type electronic device with base Equipment 'Single card display'The following is the operation of any of the methods in the present application.

In some embodiments according to the invention, there is also provided a non-transitory computer readable storage medium comprising one or more programs for execution by one or more processors of an electronic device, the one or more programs including instructions which, when executed by the one or more processors, cause the device to perform operations including, but not limited to, titles"interface and Master Interface configuration, integrated interactive interface, integrated communication based on multiple networks, split type electronic equipment with base and single card Display'Operations or instructions of any of the methods in the present application.

There is also provided, in some embodiments according to the invention, an electronic device, including: a display, a processor unit, and a touch-sensitive surface unit configured to detect a contact; wherein the processor unit is coupled to the display and the touch-sensitive surface unit, the processor unit being programmatically configured to execute instructions including, but not limited to, a title' interface and main interface configuration ' and ' integer Interactive interface, integrated communication based on multiple networks, split electronic equipment with base and single card display "Operations or instructions of any of the methods in the present application.

There is also provided, in some embodiments according to the invention, an electronic device, including: a processor unit, memory, and one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the processor unit, the one or more programs including instructions that, when executed by the one or more processors, cause the electronic device to perform operations including, but not limited to, captioningInterface and main interface configuration, integrated interactive interface, integrated communication based on multiple networks, split type electronic device with base Equipment 'Single card display'Operations or instructions of any of the methods in the present application.

In addition, it is noteworthy that: all the definitions and explanations given above under the heading "single card display" for the steps of the method, for the various modular units of the electronic device apply and can be incorporated in the present application"boundary of Surface and main interface configuration, integrated interactive interface, integrated communication based on multi-network, split type electronic equipment with base "The method or electronic device, communication apparatus set forth in all embodiments under the heading.

Split type electronic equipment with base

In the field ofMenu interface universally suitable for switching of various application interfaces and integrated interactive interface " Integrated communication based on multiple networks, interface and main interface configurationIn the methods or the electronic devices and the communication apparatuses proposed in all embodiments under the heading, the user interface element for the user to operate to interact with the application interface or the communication operation interface for the user to operate to interact with the communication interface may be a virtual key group provided in software on the communication interface or the application interface or an entity key group provided physically on the electronic device, and these entity key groups and virtual key groups may be respectively associated with a plurality of wireless communication networks. Thus, for a current contact communication interface, the electronic device may establish communication with a current contact through a plurality of wireless communication networks to generate a plurality of communication information in response to user manipulation of a virtual or physical key set; and integrating and outputting a plurality of communication information through the message area on the current contact communication interface. It should be understood that: the plurality of communications, or also referred to as multiple communications, may correspond to two or more different traffic properties, and may include, for example: communication information of voice traffic through a mobile phone network, communication information of short message traffic through a mobile phone network, communication information of data traffic through a wireless data transmission network such as a mobile data network or a WLAN. Here, the same applies to "a plurality of communication informationFor any other related embodiment, the description may not be repeated here.

The following description will take the example that the key set is configured on the electronic device in a hardware manner, and the key set includes the key set and the key set"interface and main interface configuration, integrated interactive interface, integrated communication based on multiple networks and switching of various application interfaces Menu interface (A) "The subject related embodiments are described in terms of an entity key set, an electronic device configured with physical manipulations that may rely on, rely primarily on, or rely essentially entirely on the entity key set, and an electronic device supporting a user to establish communications by operating the entity key set. In addition, the electronic equipment can also comprise a base, a mobile phone and other communication devices which are detachably combined.

With the development of electronic devices with high-tech elements, for example, smart machines are gradually replacing functional machines, and touch screens are applied to more electronic devices, but some problems also arise, for example, the assembly of touch screens on these electronic devices significantly increases the misoperation caused by touch sensing. Moreover, in some cases, electronic devices interacting with emerging technologies such as touch control cannot be consistent with usage habits of some users including but not limited to the elderly due to insufficient cognitive or learning abilities of some users including the elderly for new technologies and new experiences. Therefore, for some electronic devices such as smart phones, it is necessary to support more accesses or interactions to the electronic devices based on hardware operations, so as to improve accessibility to multiple programs in the electronic devices and cross-interface accessibility of similar or different functional programs therein.

In some embodiments of the present invention, there is also provided a terminal communication apparatus, as shown in fig. 27, 28, and 29, including: base and first mobile terminal 5, wherein, the base includes:

a body 4;

a mounting part 411 formed on the body 4 to mount the first mobile terminal 5;

a physical operation part arranged on the body 4;

a first interface, which is arranged on the body 4 and a first end of which is coupled with the physical operation part;

a second interface, which is arranged on the first mobile terminal 5;

a second end of the first interface is communicatively coupled with and detachable from the second interface;

wherein the physical manipulation section is operable to send a signal to the first mobile terminal 5 via the coupled first and second interfaces to trigger communication of the first mobile terminal 5 via the at least one communication network, e.g. to exchange media data with the second terminal via the wireless data transmission network.

In addition, as described above, in "Split type electronic equipment with base"and"Key/button layout and its form and function "etcThe electronic device/communication apparatus of some embodiments is mainly proposed from the aspect of hardware, and reference may be made to a method for configuring or providing software resources such as a user interface in the electronic device or communication apparatus"interface and Main interface configuration "arrangement", "menu interface generally applicable to switching of various application interfaces", "integrated interactive interface", "single card display"And configuring or providing methods of software resources such as a communication interface for a contact and a user interface for an application program provided in any embodiments including the embodiments related to the titles, which are not described herein again.

Optionally, said at least one communications network comprises a mobile telephone network, a wireless data transmission network, and the wireless data transmission network may comprise a WLAN and a mobile data network; the physical operation section may include a first operation section that may transmit any one or a combination of the following signals to the first interface in response to an external operation:

a first signal for instructing a first mobile terminal to establish a short message service through a mobile telephone network;

a second signal for instructing the first mobile terminal to establish a voice telephony service over the mobile telephony network;

a third signal for instructing the first mobile terminal to transmit a data service message via the wireless data transmission network.

Optionally, the first operation part includes: a first key and a second key. The first key can send the first signal or the second signal to the first interface in response to the first operation. The second key may also be responsive to a second operation to send the first signal or the second signal to the first interface. Preferably, the signals that the first key and the second key may send to the first interface are different, i.e. if the first key may send the second signal to the first interface, the second key is arranged to send the first signal to the first interface.

Optionally, the first operation portion further includes a third key, and may respond to the third operation to send the second signal or the third signal to the first interface, and optionally, the third signal may be a signal for instructing the first mobile terminal to initiate a real-time call request based on wireless data transmission to another communication device.

Referring to fig. 27, the first interface is a physical interface and is directly connected to the first communication interface on the host housing.

Further, the second interface may be a physical interface provided on the first mobile terminal 5 matching the first interface.

Further optionally, when the first interface is a physical interface, the first communication interface and the second communication interface constitute a spring probe connector, for example, a Pogopin connector, the first interface may preferably be an interface of a contact structure of the spring probe connector, for example, a probe interface of the Pogopin connector, and the second communication interface may be set as a pin interface of the Pogopin connector, so that the first interface is not easily damaged by repeated plugging and unplugging.

Of course, the first and second interfaces may also use data transmission interfaces that are common on various mobile terminals on the market, such as lightning interfaces or USB interfaces, when adapting to mobile terminals that are conventional on the market, and not custom designed for the base provided by some embodiments of the invention. The lightning interface and the Type-C Type USB interface are used as the optimal scheme.

In terms of communication coupling such as a data interface protocol, a data interface protocol such as a USB protocol or a GPIO protocol may be used to support data transmission, audio/video transmission, and power supply.

Of course, the first interface may also be a wireless interface, and is wirelessly connected with the second interface through a near field communication protocol such as bluetooth or NFC.

When wireless connection is adopted, a wireless charging mechanism can be arranged in the body 4, and the first mobile terminal 5 is charged by the wireless charging mechanism. At this time, the seating portion 411 may not be formed as a fixed structure as shown in fig. 27, but may be simplified as a platform on which the first mobile terminal 5 is placed.

Regardless of whether a physical interface or a wireless interface is adopted, the connecting/fixing mechanism of the mounting portion 411 may include, but is not limited to, a sliding slot, a snap, a magnetic coupling mechanism, a coupling mechanism using gravity generated by the mounting angle of the device, and the like.

It should be noted that: the first interface may also be connected with other mobile terminals that are not compatible with the above-mentioned various physical interfaces or data interface protocols such as USB protocol, GPIO, etc. through some switching mechanisms/components such as connectors, connecting wires, etc.

Wherein the second terminal may generally be any mobile terminal located remotely. The held mobile terminals will be different according to different contacts, so that the second terminal or the second terminal referred to in some embodiments of the present invention is not specific to a certain mobile terminal, that is, any mobile terminal that may have media data with the first mobile terminal 5 may be defined as the second terminal.

Compared with the prior art, the terminal communication device provided by some embodiments of the present invention converts the operation of the first mobile terminal 5 into a physical operation with good feedback by means of the base and the physical operation part disposed on the base, so as to greatly improve convenience, and is particularly suitable for users who are not good at operating electronic devices, such as but not limited to the elderly, children, and blind.

In particular, some embodiments of the present invention refer to media data that includes, but is not limited to, various text messages, files, data, voice and video communications data generated by communications between mobile terminals. It is worth mentioning that the cost is relatively high when using the GSM network for communication and conversation, and many people are sensitive to the conversation cost. In contrast, media data exchange over wireless data networks tends to be free, or less expensive. However, for these special groups, it is often difficult to distinguish between GSM-based networks and wireless data-based networks, and to find a portal for communicating using a wireless data network.

Take the application program of "WeChat" as an example. In the prior art, when a user operates a WeChat to send a voice message and a video message, the user needs to open a wireless data network in the 'setting' of the mobile terminal, then open an 'WeChat' app (application program), find a contact person needing to be contacted in the app interface, switch to the contact person interface and open a dialog box, find a 'more' plus sign button near the dialog box, and select the 'video call' button, so that the video call to the specific contact person can be realized. This series of operations is difficult for the aforementioned user.

In some embodiments of the present invention, only the physical operation part is operated, the first mobile terminal 5 can be prompted to initiate a video call, send audio, text or image data, and the like directly through the wireless data network, which obviously has significant convenience in operation and obviously enables users to be more secure and relieved in terms of expenses compared with the prior art. As in some embodiments above, the first mobile terminal 5 may further reduce the cost burden of the user by identifying whether to connect to the first interface to switch its own network environment to Wlan or 3G, 4G, etc.

Next, alternatives to the physical operating portion of the base provided by some embodiments of the invention will be described in further detail.

Optionally, the physical operation unit includes a first operation unit, and the first operation unit may send any one or a combination of the following signals to the first mobile terminal 5 via the first interface and the second interface in response to an external operation:

a signal for instructing the first mobile terminal 5 to collect and transmit media data;

a signal for instructing the first mobile terminal 5 to play the media data.

A signal for instructing the first mobile terminal 5 to initiate a real-time call request based on wireless data transmission to the second terminal.

In the first operation section, most of the functions for exchanging media data are integrated, which is convenient. In the first operation portion, it may be embodied in the form of a physical operation member, such as a key, a lever, a handle, a touch pad, or the like. In the following embodiments, a preferred key structure is schematically illustrated.

Specifically, optionally, the first operation unit includes:

a first key 21 operable in response to a first operation to transmit a signal for instructing the first mobile terminal 5 to collect and transmit media data to the first mobile terminal 5 via the first interface and the second interface;

and a second key 22, responsive to a second operation, for sending a signal to the first mobile terminal 5 via the first interface and the second interface for instructing the first mobile terminal 5 to play the media data.

Wherein the first key 21 and the second key 22 may be disposed in an adjacent manner. The two physical keys can be in the shape of square or round. Of course, the first key 21 and the second key 22 may be disposed separately, for example, one is disposed on the first surface of the housing, and the other is disposed on the second surface of the body 4; alternatively, the first keys 21 and the second keys 22 may be distributed on the same surface of the body 4.

The specific mode of each operation may be determined according to the form of each "key", for example, the operation may be performed by pressing, toggling, sliding, scrolling, and the like, so as to correspond to a "keyboard" having various forms, such as a key, a toggle key, a knob, a sliding bar, and the like.

Taking the pressing operation as an example, when the first key 21 is pressed, the first mobile terminal 5 receives a signal from the first interface, starts to collect media data, and gives a corresponding prompt. After receiving the prompt, the user can record the voice and the video of the user and send the voice and the video as media data to the second terminal. The media data may be set for a specified duration or may be unlimited.

Optionally, the first operation unit further includes:

the third key 23 may be responsive to a third operation to send a real-time call request to the first mobile terminal 5 via the first interface and the second interface for instructing the first mobile terminal 5 to initiate wireless data transmission to the second terminal.

The second terminal may respond to the real-time call request to implement the real-time call between the first mobile terminal 5 and the first mobile terminal 5. The present invention is directed in some embodiments to a real-time call request. Including but not limited to video telephony, voice telephony, and the like.

That is, through three simple keys, namely the first key 21, the second key 22 and the third key 23, the user can trigger and meet own communication requirements by one key, so that complex operations of a plurality of hierarchical menus are not needed during operation, and the operability of the communication device and the accessibility of communication resources in the communication device are improved.

Alternatively, the third key 23 is different in shape from the first and

second keys

21 and 22. By distinguishing the shape of the third key 23 from the first key 21 and the second key 22, misoperation can be prevented, and the memory requirement of a user is reduced.

Of course, the third key 23 may not be provided, and instead, the combined operation of the first key 21 or the second key 22 may be used, for example, the first key 21 and the second key 22 are pressed at the same time to achieve the purpose of real-time call request.

Optionally, the method may further include:

and a warning light 231 for reflecting the communication state of the first terminal communication device, the warning light 231 being disposed on the third key 23. The prompt lamp 231 disposed on the third button 23 can directly give feedback on the status of the real-time call, for example, it can be red light when the real-time call request fails, and green light during the real-time call. Compared with the direct arrangement at other parts of the body 4, the intuition degree of the state indication can be improved.

In real life, network congestion sometimes occurs, which is represented as a jam in the real-time conversation process of video and audio. For a particular group of people, it is difficult to understand the cause of the occurrence of the jamming, and it may be possible to consider that the call is failed and make additional unnecessary operations, such as tapping the body 4, removing the first mobile terminal 5, and so on. The prompt lamp 231 is arranged on the third key 23, so that the function of reminding the user that the real-time conversation is not interrupted can be still started when the network is congested, and the prompt lamp has positive significance.

Alternatively, the third key 23, the first key 21 and the second key 22 are arranged along a substantially straight line.

When the three keys are arranged along the same straight line, the interaction logic can be more clearly and intuitively understood by the user. Also in the UI interface (user interface) of the first mobile terminal 5, three keys having equivalent functions are generally arranged along a straight line. When the virtual key in the UI interface is consistent with the entity key on the body 4, the consistency of user operation can be improved, and the learning cost of the user is reduced.

Further, the third key 23, the first key 21, and the second key 22 are arranged substantially along a straight line in sequence. Since the functions of the first key 21 and the second key 22 are related, the positions of the first key 21 and the second key 22 can be interchanged.

Still further, the third key 23 is spaced apart from the first key 21 by a distance greater than the distance between the first key 21 and the second key 22.

Since the function of the third key 23 is relatively less related to the functions of the first and

second keys

21 and 22, the third key 23 can be further prevented from being erroneously operated when it is disposed at a relatively distant position.

It is worth mentioning that the interval between the first key 21 and the second key 22 can be set small, and even be connected together, i.e. integrally set.

Alternatively, the placing portion 411 may be provided on the first surface 41 of the body 4, and the first operating portion is provided on the first surface 41. When the placing portion 411 and the first operation portion are disposed on the same surface, the user can see the content of the first operation portion while watching the display of the first mobile terminal 5, and the interactivity and operability of the communication apparatus can be further improved.

In addition, when the user interface of the first mobile terminal 5 has the virtual key that is consistent with the appearance (color, shape, size, etc.) of the key of the first operation portion, the user can intuitively understand that the function of the key of the first operation portion is also consistent with the virtual key, thereby improving the operability of the communication device and reducing the difficulty of the interactive operation between the user and the communication device.

Further alternatively, the placing portion 411 may be disposed on the left side of the first surface 41 of the body 4, and the first operating portion may be disposed on the right side of the first surface 41.

The placing part 411 is arranged on the left side, and when the first operating part is arranged on the right side, the operation habit of the right-handed person is met, and the adaptive crowd range of the base in the embodiment of the invention is improved. Of course, it is also possible to arrange the mounting portion 411 on the right side and the first operating portion on the left side.

Optionally, the physical operation unit further includes:

a fourth key 24, responsive to a fourth operation, is capable of sending a real-time call request to the first mobile terminal 5 via the first interface and the second interface, instructing the first mobile terminal 5 to initiate a real-time call request to at least two second terminals.

The fourth key 24 may be used as a help key in case of emergency. The fourth operation may be a single operation such as a single press or 2 to 3 consecutive presses. Upon triggering the fourth key 24, a real-time call request may be initiated to a plurality of second terminals over all available data transmission paths supported by the first mobile terminal 5. These data transmission paths include, but are not limited to, all data transmission paths based on the mobile communication network, and when any one network fails, it can be tried one by one through the other network.

The contact corresponding to the second terminal from which the request is initiated may be preset in the first mobile terminal 5. In practical applications, an emergency contact group may be preset in an instant messaging application program in the terminal communication device, where the emergency contact group includes at least two contacts, and generally, in order to ensure that a user can successfully contact an emergency contact in an emergency, the emergency contact group generally includes at least two contacts.

Alternatively, the fourth key 24 is disposed on the second surface 42 of the body 4, the seating portion 411 is formed on the first surface 41 of the body 4, and the second surface 42 intersects the first surface 41. In this way, the position of the fourth key 24 can be significantly distinguished from the first, second and third keys 23.

Further alternatively, the first surface 41 is a front surface and the second surface 42 is an upper surface, so that the user can more easily perform the fourth operation in an emergency. Being located on the upper surface, the user is most likely to touch the upper surface in a dark state, and is likely to grope the location of the fourth key 24, and thus is more likely to be found in an emergency.

Optionally, referring to fig. 28, the physical operation unit may further include:

a second operation section including:

a direction key 25 and/or a return key 26.

The directional keys 25 may provide for user selection of display content on the display, such as contact related information displayed via the communication application described above. That is, the selection of the contact can be achieved through the direction key 25. The direction key 25 may be a pair or a single direction key 25, and a pair of direction keys 25 is generally preferred. The return key 26 (which may be referred to as a Home key) may be used by the user to perform operations such as a rollback operation, or to return to a Home page or an initial page, i.e., a first interface, such as a first contact interface or other application interface, presented after power-on.

It should be understood that: the electronic device including the direction key and/or the Home key (Home key) is not limited to the combination of the mobile communication main body such as the mobile phone and the base, and may also include the mobile phone integrally configured with the direction key and/or the return key, which can be seen in the embodiment shown in fig. 34 and the related description, and will not be described herein again.

Of course, in these embodiments, communication keys may be further included, and the communication network related to the communication function, such as the first key 21, the second key 22, the third key 23, etc., in the above embodiments, may be dynamically configured according to at least one of the factors of the switching operation of the user, the change of the peripheral network condition (for example, connection or disconnection with the WLAN), connection or disconnection between the mobile communication device and the base, and the like, as described in detail in the related content of the title "switching between internet mode and mobile phone mode".

In addition, the electronic device of the embodiment including the direction key and/or Home key (Home key), communication key and other physical keys can also be compared with fig. 9, 10 andinterface and main interface configuration and switching universally suitable for various application interfaces Menu interface, integrated interactive interface, and single card display "And the contact interface, resource providing method, etc. disclosed in any title-related embodiments are combined and will not be described herein again.

For the electronic device of the embodiment including the plurality of thumbnail options of the menu bar disposed at the bottom of the display, correspondingly, the second operation portion of the above embodiment may further include a physical key (not shown in the figure) for turning pages of the plurality of thumbnail options in the menu bar so as to display the options in a batch moving manner.

In addition, alternatively, the seating portion 411 is formed at the first surface 41 of the body 4, and the second operating portion is provided at a surface of the body 4 of the base, which intersects the first surface 41. Specifically, it is possible to provide the second surface 42 described above with a relatively large distance between the second operation portion and the fourth key 24.

In some embodiments of the present invention, when the direction key 25 is disposed on the second surface 42, the switching direction of the display content on the display can be kept consistent, and in some embodiments, after the terminal communication device is started, the profile information or the interactive interface of the first contact, or the contact group where the first contact is located, is presented on the first interface, and at this time, the processor can switch to present the profile information or the interactive interface of the second contact, or the contact group where the second contact is located, on the screen in response to the user pressing the direction key 25. The first contact may be the contact that the user contacts most frequently in a statistical sense, and thereafter the second and third contacts are used less frequently in a statistical sense.

In addition, optionally, the physical operation unit further includes:

a function operating section comprising:

a power key 27 operable in response to a fifth operation to transmit a signal for instructing the first mobile terminal 5 to switch power to the first interface;

and a volume key 28 operable to adjust the volume of the base in response to the sixth operation or to send a signal to the first interface instructing the first mobile terminal to adjust the volume.

Through the function operation portion to on the base body 4, can directly realize the control to these two functions commonly used of first mobile terminal 5 volume and switch, further improved the convenience.

Alternatively, the seating portion 411 is formed on the first surface 41 of the body 4, and the function operating portion is provided on a surface of the body 4 intersecting the first surface 41. Among them, the function operating part may be provided on the third surface 43 to be distinguished from the first and second surfaces, and the third surface 43 may be a side surface or a back surface of the body 4.

In particular, the third surface 43 may be located at a side surface of the body 4. The power key 27 and the volume adjustment key are provided on the third surface 43 which intersects with the surfaces of the first surface 41 and the second surface 42, respectively, so that the accidental situations of power-off and abrupt volume increase caused by false touch can be prevented. Moreover, since the power key 27 and the volume key 28 are used less frequently, the arrangement on the side surface does not affect the use of both.

In summary, the user only needs to perform simple operations on the physical operation portion or at least one key included in the physical operation portion arranged on the base, so that different communication requirements can be met, and the timeliness and reliability of sending the communication message to the contact and the instantaneity of receiving the communication message sent by the contact are guaranteed while the operation is convenient.

Optionally, the mounting portion 411 is provided with a magnetic force adsorption component for combining with the first mobile terminal 5. Specifically, a permanent magnet may be provided on the mounting portion 411, and a ferromagnetic substance may be provided on the first mobile terminal 5, thereby preventing spontaneous magnetism from affecting the use of the first mobile terminal 5. Or, the two can be fastened and combined by fasteners such as buckles and clamping pieces, which are not described herein.

Specifically, at least a part of the first interface is formed as an elastic protrusion. And a portion of the first mobile terminal 5 corresponding to the first interface, for example, the second interface, may be correspondingly formed with a groove.

When the first mobile terminal 5 is placed in the placing portion 411 by the magnetic force, the protrusion may be naturally inserted into the groove to connect the first interface and the second interface.

Optionally, the communication device further includes: one end of the adapter is detachably connected with the first interface, and the other end of the adapter outputs at least one of a USB interface, a lightning interface, an audio interface and a video interface. The adapter may enable the base according to some embodiments of the present invention to adapt to not only the dedicated first mobile terminal 5 but also other conventional mobile terminals on the market when a special interface is used.

Alternatively, the seating portion 411 includes a slope inclined upward with respect to the placement surface of the body 4.

In particular, this inclined plane may have an inclination of typically 10-30 degrees, or 50-80 degrees, respectively, suitable for use when sitting and standing.

The base provided by some embodiments of the invention is particularly suitable for application scenes when the base is placed on a living room tea table or a bedside table. The general height of these platforms, when in use, typically determines that the user cannot look up the display of the first mobile terminal 5 at his or her right angle, but rather needs to look down at a certain angle. Accordingly, providing the seating portion 411 as a slope having a certain inclination angle can significantly improve user experience.

Alternatively, the mounting portion 411 includes a platform disposed on the body 4 to carry the first mobile terminal 5, and the platform can rotate relative to the rest of the body 4 to adjust its orientation.

When the platform can rotate relative to the rest parts of the body 4 to adjust the orientation of the platform, namely the orientation of the first mobile terminal 5 can be freely adjusted, the ergonomic principle is met, and the user experience can be further improved.

It can be understood that the platform can adjust the rotatable direction thereof through various rotatable mechanisms in the prior art, and specific implementation manners are various and will not be described herein again.

The adjustable structure of the placing portion 411 may be further improved, for example, the platform may be configured to be liftable, so as to further improve the user experience.

Besides, the terminal communication device according to some embodiments of the present invention may further include a line control unit and a line control operation unit, wherein a first end of the line control unit is connected to the body 4, and the line control operation unit is disposed at a second end of the line control unit and is in communication connection with the first mobile terminal through the first interface. The line control unit is connected to the body 4 and can be in communication connection with the first mobile terminal 5 through the first interface.

With age, vision ages, and some users, including some elderly people, have symptoms of hyperopia. They tend to deliberately pull the distance from the display of the first mobile terminal 5 when looking at it. For a user with a high degree of hyperopia, when the user operates the physical operation unit on the main body 4, the movement of the hand and the head away from each other may affect the operational feeling and cause discomfort.

In addition, when the base is placed on a living room tea table and a user leans on a sofa to operate or the base is placed on a bedside table and the user lies on the bed to operate, it is not comfortable to directly operate the physical operation part because the body is far from the base.

Accordingly, the provided drive-by-wire unit can provide a function of replacing the physical operation part in the application scenes so as to expand the moving range of the user when using the base. Specifically, a wire control operation part having the same function as the physical operation part on the body 4 may be provided on the wire control unit for the user to perform remote control operation.

Furthermore, the shape, structure and operation mode of each key on the wire control operation part can be consistent with those of the physical operation part, so that the identifiability is improved, and the learning cost is reduced.

Compared with a remote controller, the line control unit is not easy to lose, a battery does not need to be replaced, and convenience can be improved for relatively forgetful old people and relatively naughty children.

Further optionally, as shown in fig. 29, the body 4 is further provided with a data expansion interface for externally connecting an expansion device.

The external expansion devices can be various devices which can be linked with a host, such as printers, scanners, mice, lamps and the like, and particularly can be disease diagnosis and treatment devices such as sphygmomanometers, therapeutic instruments, electrocardiogram testers and the like which are suitable for the special group of the old. The data expansion interface can be used for remarkably enhancing the expandability of the terminal communication device, so that the terminal communication device has more powerful functions and is easy to use.

The data expansion interface can be a common interface such as lightning, Mini, Micro-USB or Type-C in the market. And in terms of communication coupling such as a data interface protocol, a data interface protocol such as a USB protocol or a GPIO protocol may be adopted.

In particular, the data expansion interface may also comprise the aforementioned drive-by-wire unit. The data expansion interface is connected with the wire control unit, so that the wire control unit is easy to replace when damaged, and the service life can be further prolonged.

In summary, compared to the prior art, in some embodiments of the present invention, by means of the combination of the detachable base and the first mobile terminal 5, the user can perform simple and low-level interface operation on the communication operation of the first mobile terminal 5 on the base, so that even people such as old people and children who are difficult to use the smart terminal device with skill can easily and intuitively realize the remote communication call requirement by means of the physical operation part of the base. Accordingly, the terminal communication device provided by some embodiments of the invention can reduce the use and learning cost and remarkably improve the convenience.

Optionally, in the short message service message and the data service message in some embodiments described above, the data service message has a preset maximum duration, a preset maximum text length, or a preset maximum volume, respectively.

In still other embodiments of the present invention, there is also provided a communication apparatus including: a display; a processor unit; a memory; and one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the processor unit, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the methods or steps thereof according to any of the embodiments of the present invention.

In still other embodiments of the present invention, there is also provided a communication apparatus including: means for performing the method according to any of the embodiments of the invention or the main steps thereof.

Of course, for the electronic device in the above or below embodiments, if the area of the effective display area of the display of the electronic device is large, for example, a tablet computer or a display with a foldable screen, or a foldable display; or, in the case that the electronic device does not include a display, the display screen of the television may be used to present the user interface of the application program such as instant messaging and the like and interact with the user on the display screen for the relevant video signal output by the electronic device. Correspondingly, two or more contact communication interfaces or other application interfaces such as photo albums can be presented simultaneously on the display with a larger display area, including but not limited to the types described above.

Fig. 37 is a schematic diagram illustrating a plurality of interactive interfaces presented on a foldable display of an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention, in fig. 37, a display 4400 is a display foldable at least along a linear area 4401, and a first interface 4402 and a second interface 4403 are respectively and independently presented on two sides along the linear area 4401, wherein the first interface 4402 may be a first contact interface, the second interface 4403 may be a second contact interface or other application program interfaces such as a photo album, and various attributes or features of the contact interface or other application program interfaces may be provided, which can refer to the related embodiment, and the electronic device in this embodiment may also be combined with other devices including but not limited to fig. 9, fig. 10 and fig. 9"interface and Master Interface (I)Configuration, menu interface universally applicable to switching of various application interfaces, integrated interactive interface, and single-card display "The contact interface, the resource providing method, and the like disclosed in any embodiments including the embodiments related to the titles are combined to form a new modified example, which is not described herein again.

Therefore, it should be noted that: in some embodiments, although a single communication interface or other application interface is presented on the display for example, it is not excluded that multiple contact interfaces and/or multiple application program interfaces may be provided simultaneously on the display in these embodiments, wherein the multiple contact interfaces may include multiple profile interfaces for multiple contacts respectively or multiple communication record interfaces for multiple contacts respectively.

Furthermore, it should be noted that in the method, the communication apparatus and the electronic device according to some of the above embodiments of the present invention, the mentioned display screen (display screen) generally refers to a screen portion of a display (display) to which the communication apparatus/electronic device is coupled, and is preferably a touch display, a touch display screen, or also simply referred to as a display, and may be a separate display unit independent from the electronic device, such as a television, or may be a touch display integrally assembled with the electronic device. In addition, for the switching operation of the touch display, a slide gesture, such as a single or continuous multiple horizontal/vertical slide gesture, may be performed. And may not be described in further detail elsewhere.

In some embodiments, the touch sensitive area of the touch sensitive display may be activated or deactivated, may be replaced by a display without touch sensitive functionality, or may be replaced by a touchpad (not shown) for activating or deactivating certain functions. In some embodiments, the touchpad is a touch-sensitive area of the device that, unlike a touch screen, does not display visual output. The touch pad may be a touch-sensitive surface separate from the touch-sensitive display, or an extension of the touch-sensitive surface formed by the touch-sensitive display.

In some embodiments, some or all of the operations described herein may be performed using an application executing on a user's device. The circuits, logic modules, processors, and/or other components may be configured to perform various operations described herein. Those skilled in the art will appreciate that such configuration can be accomplished through design, setup, interconnection, and/or programming of particular components, depending on the implementation, and that the configured components may or may not be reconfigurable for different operations, again depending on the implementation. For example, a programmable processor may be configured by providing appropriate executable code; a dedicated logic circuit may be configured by appropriately connecting logic gates and other circuit elements; and so on.

Any of the software components or functions described in this patent application may be implemented as software code executed by a processor using any suitable computer language, such as, for example, Java, C + +, C #, Objective-C, Swift, or a scripting language using, for example, conventional or object-oriented techniques, such as Perl or Python. The software code may be stored on a computer-readable medium as a series of instructions or commands to enable storage and/or transmission. Suitable non-transitory computer readable media may include Random Access Memory (RAM), Read Only Memory (ROM), magnetic media such as a hard drive or floppy disk, or optical media such as a Compact Disc (CD) or DVD (digital versatile disc), flash memory, or the like. The computer readable medium may be any combination of such storage devices or transmission devices.

Computer programs incorporating the various features of the present disclosure may be encoded on a variety of computer-readable storage media; suitable media include magnetic disks or tapes, optical storage media such as Compact Disks (CDs) or DVDs (digital versatile disks), flash memory, and the like. The computer readable storage medium encoded with the program code may be packaged with a compatible device or provided separately from other devices. Further, the program code may be encoded and transmitted over wired, optical, and/or wireless networks conforming to a variety of protocols, including the internet, to allow distribution, such as via internet download. Any such computer-readable media may reside or be located within a single computer product (e.g., a solid state drive, a hard drive, a CD, or an entire computer system), and may exist or be located within different computer products within a system or network. The computer system may include a monitor, printer, or other suitable display for providing any of the results mentioned herein to a user.

Unless expressly indicated to the contrary, the recitation of "a", "an", or "the" is intended to mean "one or more". The use of "or" is intended to mean "inclusive or" rather than "exclusive or" unless explicitly indicated to the contrary. Reference to a "first" element does not necessarily require that a second element be provided. Furthermore, unless explicitly stated otherwise, reference to "a first" or "a second" element does not limit the referenced element to a particular position.

All patents, patent applications, publications, and descriptions mentioned herein are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety for all purposes. No admission is made that any document is prior art.

Alternative embodiments

Embodiment 1, a resource providing method for an electronic device, wherein a plurality of applications are provided in the electronic device, the method comprising:

loading at least one of the plurality of applications through a display for the electronic device;

and responding to the switching operation of the user on the application program currently presented on the display, and switching and outputting the plurality of application programs through the display.

2. The method of embodiment 1, wherein the plurality of applications includes a first application and/or a collection item program for presenting an identified collection; and the step of loading at least one of the plurality of applications through the display for the electronic device further comprises:

loading the first application program or the collection item program through the display.

3. The method of

embodiment

1 or 2, wherein the interfaces of the plurality of applications are configured as a top level of a user interface of an application manager for the plurality of applications; the interface of the first application program or the collection program is configured on the first page of the top layer of the user interface of the application management program.

4. The method of embodiment 3, wherein interfaces of a plurality of applications are collocated on a top level of a user interface of the application management program, and the step of loading the first application or the collection item program through the display further comprises: preferentially loading the first application or the collection item at a top level of an application manager user interface relative to other applications in the plurality of applications; and

the step of switching the output of the plurality of applications through the display further comprises any one of the following steps:

s1, responding to the transverse sliding gesture aiming at the application management program user interface, and scheduling the plurality of application programs to be output through the top layer of the application management program user interface respectively;

s2, responding to the transverse sliding gesture aiming at the application management program user interface, parallelly switching the plurality of application programs through the top layer of the application management program user interface to output on the display one by one;

s3, loading corresponding application programs in the plurality of application programs in the application management program user interface according to the switching operation of the user on the plurality of application programs through the top layer of the application management program;

s4, responding to the transverse sliding gesture of the interface of the current application program, and sequentially outputting the next interface of the current program or the next program in the plurality of application programs through the top layer of the user interface of the application management program.

5. The method of embodiment 4, wherein the step of preferentially loading the first application or the collection item at a top level of an application manager user interface further comprises: after the electronic equipment is started, the first application program is preferentially loaded on the top layer of the application management program user interface; and

any of the steps S1, S2, S3, or S4 further includes, in response to the lateral swipe gesture, loading a subsequent program of the plurality of application programs, the subsequent program including the collection item program.

6. The method of embodiment 4, wherein the step of preferentially loading the first application or the collection item at a top level of an application manager user interface further comprises: after the electronic equipment is started, the collection item program is preferentially loaded on the top layer of the application management program user interface; and

any of the steps S1, S2, S3, or S4 further includes, in response to the lateral swipe gesture, subsequently loading the first application.

7. The method of any of embodiments 2-6, wherein the application management program is an operating system of the electronic device or a program independent of the operating system; and if the application manager is independent of the operating system, the method further comprising: and responding to the starting operation of the application management program, and loading the application management program through the display.

8. The method of any of embodiments 1-7, further comprising the step of: the method includes providing a thumbnail form through the display and associating with the plurality of applications respectively, operable to execute in a one-to-one correspondence and output the plurality of applications through the display.

9. The method of embodiment 8, wherein the plurality of options are arranged in a row and column around the current interface, further comprising: and in response to the switching operation aiming at the option area, the plurality of options are presented in a moving mode.

10. The method of embodiment 9, wherein the order of the plurality of applications in the line is configured according to user settings for the order of the plurality of applications and/or user access frequency to the plurality of applications, respectively.

11. The method of embodiment 9, wherein at least a portion of the plurality of options are arranged laterally below the current interface, the step of moving the presentation further comprising: in response to a switching operation for the option area, the plurality of options are presented in the option area by moving part by part.

12. The method according to any of embodiments 8-11, wherein the step of switching output of the plurality of applications through the display further comprises: in response to a user selection of the plurality of options, switching the current interface to an interface corresponding to the selected option on the display, and synchronously focalizing the selected option in the option area.

13. The method of embodiment 11, wherein each of the portions includes a same number of options, the same number being 3-6; the width of the option area along the longitudinal direction is 1.5cm-2.5 cm; and, the method further comprises the steps of: in response to a switch of an application currently loaded on the display, switching a focus display of the plurality of options to correspond to the switched application.

14. The method of any of embodiments 1-13, wherein the plurality of applications are executable, each of the plurality of applications being activatable in response to being currently loaded on the display; and the electronic equipment further comprises an application operation unit which is provided on the current interface virtually and/or is provided on the electronic equipment physically; the application operating unit is operable by a user to access the plurality of application programs, respectively.

15. The method of embodiment 14, wherein the application operating unit is correspondingly functionally variable from one current program to another to maintain operability on the characteristics of the current program.

16. The method of embodiment 15, wherein the application operating unit comprises a key set; the method further comprises the following steps: in response to an operation on the key array, a plurality of properties of the current program are respectively invoked.

17. The method of embodiment 16, wherein the set of keys comprises: a row of virtual push or toggle keys disposed on a right side of the current interface and/or a row of physical push or toggle keys correspondingly disposed on an electronic device on a right side of a display integrally assembled with the electronic device; and

the plurality of applications are respectively configured to be customized for the plurality of entity keys such that a plurality of characteristics of each of the plurality of applications are respectively correspondingly activated in response to physical actions of the plurality of entity keys.

18. The method of embodiment 16, wherein the first application is a communication program for a first contact executable to output a communication interface for the first contact through the display, including a message area; the key groups are respectively associated with at least one communication network; and the method further comprises:

outputting a plurality of communications with the first contact via the at least one communications network in the message area in response to user manipulation of the key set.

19. The method of embodiment 18, wherein the at least one communication network comprises a plurality of communication networks having different traffic properties, the key sets being respectively associated with the plurality of communication networks; and the communication information output step further includes:

establishing communication with the first contact through the plurality of communication networks to generate the plurality of communication information in response to the operation of the key set by the user; and

and outputting the plurality of communication information with the different service properties through the message region integration.

20. The method of embodiment 19, wherein the plurality of communication networks comprises a plurality of wireless communication networks including a mobile telephone network, a wireless data transmission network; said key set being associated with said mobile telephone network and said wireless data transmission network, respectively, and said communication information outputting step further comprising:

and responding to the operation of the user on the key group, establishing communication with the first contact person through the mobile telephone network and the wireless data transmission network respectively to generate the plurality of communication information.

21. The method as in embodiment 20 wherein the wireless data transport network comprises a mobile data network and a wireless local area network, and the method further comprises:

selectively associating the set of keys with the mobile telephony network, the mobile data network or the wireless local area network, whereby the set of keys are operable to establish corresponding services based on the associated communication network, respectively.

22. The method of embodiment 21, wherein the plurality of communications comprises: at least two items of the voice service information, the short message service information and the data service information; the communication establishing step further comprises:

when the key set is associated with the mobile telephone network, responding to the operation of the key set by a user, establishing communication with the first contact person through the mobile telephone network to generate the voice service information and/or the short message service message;

establishing communication with the first contact through the wireless data transmission network to generate the data service message in response to a user operating the key set when the key set is associated with the wireless data transmission network.

23. The method of embodiment 21, wherein the first contact communication interface further comprises a toggle option, the selectively associating step comprising:

selectively configuring the key set to be associated with the mobile phone network, the mobile data network, or the wireless local area network based on at least one of i) user operation of the switching option, ii) a connection status of the electronic device with the wireless local area network, or iii) communication network conditions available in the vicinity.

24. The method of embodiment 23, wherein the step of selectively associating further comprises:

responsive to the electronic device accessing the wireless local area network, configuring the key set to be associated with the wireless local area network on a communication function; and

configuring the key set to be associated with the mobile phone network on a communication function in response to the electronic device being disconnected from a wireless local area network.

25. The method of any of embodiments 18-24, wherein the first contact communication program is integrated with the operating system, an interface of the first contact communication program being at least a portion of the operating system user interface component.

26. The method of embodiment 25 wherein the corresponding cell phone number of the first contact in the mobile phone network and the corresponding identification code in the wireless data transmission network are configured integrally.

27. The method of embodiment 26 wherein the corresponding cell phone number of the first contact in the mobile phone network and the corresponding identification code in the wireless data transmission network are integrally stored in the same program, and the communication establishing step further comprises:

and responding to the operation of the user on the key group, and establishing communication with the first contact person through the mobile phone number and the identification code respectively to generate the plurality of communication information.

28. The method according to any of embodiments 14-27, wherein the outputting of the plurality of communication information further comprises:

and integrating and outputting at least two items of the voice service information, the short message service message and the data service message to the message area on the first contact person communication interface.

29. The method of embodiment 28, wherein the step of integrating outputs further comprises:

outputting the voice service information and/or the short message service information through the message area when the key set is associated with the mobile phone network;

and outputting the data service message through the message area when the key group is associated with the wireless local area network or the mobile data network.

30. The method according to any one of embodiments 18-29, wherein the plurality of communication information outputting steps further comprises: outputting the latest piece of the plurality of communication information separately in the message area in response to occurrence of the latest piece; or

Continuously updating the message area output on the first contact communication interface with the latest one of the plurality of communication information;

31. The method of embodiment 30, wherein the outputting step further comprises: in response to occurrence of a latest one of at least two of the voice service information, the short message service message, and the data service message, outputting the latest one alone in the message area, or

And continuously updating and outputting the latest one of the voice service information, the short message service message and the data service message in the message area.

32. The method of

embodiment

30 or 31, wherein the profile information of the first contact is configured separately outside of and commensurate with the message area; the method further comprises the following steps:

expanding the message area and abbreviating the profile information; and collectively outputting the plurality of messages to the message area.

33. The method of embodiment 32, wherein the profile information of the first contact is configured substantially centrally above and below the message area on the first contact communication interface, the plurality of communication output steps further comprising:

collectively outputting at least two of the voice service information, the short message service message, and the data service message to the message area; or

Collectively outputting the voice service information and/or the short message service information arranged in the occurrence order through the message area when the key group is associated with the mobile phone network; collectively outputting the data service messages in order of occurrence through the message area when the key set is associated with the wireless data transmission network.

34. The method of embodiment 33, wherein the plurality of communication information outputting steps further comprise:

when the key set is associated with the mobile telephone network, integrating the voice service information and/or short message service message to output the latest one of the voice service information and/or short message service message in the message area;

outputting said message region only for the latest one of said data service messages with a persistent update when said key set is associated with said wireless data transmission network;

wherein the data traffic message includes one or more of: audio messages, video messages, picture messages, geographic locations, text messages, files, data.

35. An electronic device, comprising: a processor unit, a memory, and one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the processor unit, the one or more programs including instructions for performing any of the methods of embodiments 1-34.

36. An electronic device, comprising: a physical keypad, a spring probe connector, and a communication device including a display, a processor unit, a memory, and one or more programs,

the physical key set is detachably coupled to the processor unit by the spring probe connector;

wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the processor unit, the one or more programs including instructions for performing any of the methods of embodiments 1-34.

37. The electronic device of embodiment 36, further comprising a base, the spring probe connector being a Pogopin connector, the set of physical keys being disposed on the base; the pinhole interface and the probe interface of the Pogopin connector are correspondingly arranged on the mobile communication device and the base and are respectively connected with the processor unit and the entity key group;

the one or more programs include an operating system and/or an application manager comprising instructions for performing any of the methods of embodiments 1-17.

38. The electronic device of embodiment 37 or 36, wherein the one or more programs further comprise a communication program comprising instructions for performing any of the methods of embodiments 18-34 in combination with the application manager; the communication program is integrated with or independent of the operating system; the communications program is further executable by the processor unit to: switching the electronic device between the wireless local area network and the mobile data network according to i) surrounding communication network conditions, ii) at least one of connection and disconnection of the connector.

39. The electronic device of embodiment 37 or 36, wherein the set of virtual keys corresponds in form to the set of physical keys.

40. The electronic device of embodiment 39, wherein the virtual key set and the physical key set have consistency with respect to at least one of: the number, layout, shape, appearance, orientation, color system, color, shape, pattern, and the plurality of virtual keys included in the virtual key set are arranged in a row on the right side of the current interface, and the plurality of physical keys included in the physical key set are correspondingly arranged in a row on the right side of the display.

41. The electronic device of any of embodiments 35-40, wherein the one or more programs further include an album application, the operating system and/or application management program further including instructions executable by the processor unit to cause the electronic device to: responding to a sixth switching operation of the user on the current interface, a seventh switching operation of the interface switching key or a selection operation of the user on an option corresponding to the album application interface in the area where the plurality of options are located, and outputting the album application interface on the display; and

in response to the album application interface being currently output on the display, correspondingly configuring the application operating section to be operable to run a plurality of characteristics of the album application.

42. The electronic device of embodiment 41 wherein the plurality of characteristics include a photograph characteristic, a play characteristic, a pause characteristic; and the key set comprises a first key, a second key and a third key operable to invoke the photographing characteristic, the playing characteristic and the pause characteristic of the album application, respectively.

43. The electronic device of embodiment 42, wherein the operating system and/or application management program further comprises instructions that, when executed by the processor unit, cause the electronic device to, in response to the first contact communication interface being currently output on the display, functionally reconfigure the first, second and third keys to be operable to respectively invoke the following characteristics provided by the first contact communication interface:

when the first key, second key and third key are associated with the wireless data transmission network, i) sending a voice message over the wireless data transmission network; ii) accessing a voice message received over the wireless data transmission network; iii) establishing an audio-video call over said wireless data transmission network; or

When the first key, second key and third key are associated with the mobile phone network, a) sending a short message service through the mobile phone network; b) accessing a short message service received over said mobile telephony network; c) voice telephony services are established over the mobile telephony network.

44. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device with one or more processors, comprising:

apparatus for performing any of the methods of embodiments 1-34.

45. A non-transitory computer readable storage medium comprising one or more programs for execution by one or more processors of an electronic device, the one or more programs including instructions, which when executed by the one or more processors, cause the electronic device to perform the method of any of embodiments 1-34.

46. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium of embodiment 45, the one or more programs comprising an operating system and/or an application management program comprising instructions that when executed by one or more processors of an electronic device cause the electronic device to perform any of the methods of embodiments 1-17.

47. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium of embodiment 46, wherein the application management program is integrated with or separate from the operating system, the one or more programs further comprising a communication program comprising instructions that when executed by one or more processors of an electronic device in combination with the application management program cause the electronic device to perform any of the methods of embodiments 18-34.

48. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium of embodiment 47 wherein the communication program is at least partially integrated with or independent of the operating system.

49. An electronic device, comprising: a display, a processor unit, and a touch-sensitive surface unit configured to detect a contact; wherein the processor unit is coupled with the display and the touch-sensitive surface unit, the processing unit being programmatically configured to perform the steps of any of the methods of embodiments 1-34.

50. The electronic device of embodiment 35, wherein the one or more programs include an operating system program and/or an application management program configured to be executed by the processor unit, the operating system program and/or application management program including instructions for performing any of the methods of embodiments 1-17.

51. The electronic device of embodiment 50, wherein the application manager is integrated with an operating system or is separate from the operating system, the one or more programs further comprising a communication program comprising instructions that when executed by one or more processors of the electronic device in combination with the application manager cause the electronic device to perform any of the methods of embodiments 18-34.

52. The electronic device of embodiment 51, wherein the communication program is at least partially integrated with the operating system or an application that is independent of the operating system.

53. The method according to any one of embodiments 8-18, wherein at least one information publishing interface is provided in the electronic device, and the step of switching output of the plurality of applications through the display further comprises: and outputting the plurality of application programs which are interspersed with the at least one information publishing interface one by one through the display.

54. The method according to any one of embodiments 8-18, wherein at least one information publishing interface is provided in the electronic device, and the step of switching output of the plurality of applications through the display further comprises: and in the process of switching to output the plurality of application programs, the at least one information publishing interface is output through the display occasionally.

55. The method of embodiment 53 or 54 wherein the plurality of options does not include an option corresponding to the at least one information publication interface.

56. The method of embodiment 55 wherein the at least one information publication interface comprises a dynamic or static media publication interface with interface output elements comprising at least one of text elements, video elements, audio elements, or combinations thereof.

57. An electronic device, comprising: a display, a processor unit, a memory, and one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the processor unit, the one or more programs including instructions for performing any of the methods of embodiments 1-34.

58. An electronic device, comprising: a memory, a processor unit, one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the processor unit, the one or more programs comprising instructions for performing any of the methods of embodiments 1-34.

59. A system, comprising: an electronic device according to embodiment 58 and a display coupled to the electronic device.

In addition, the above-described device embodiments are merely illustrative, wherein units described as separate parts may or may not be physically separate, and parts displayed as units may or may not be physical units, may be located in one place, or may be distributed on a plurality of network units. Some or all of the modules may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the embodiment. One of ordinary skill in the art can understand and implement it without inventive effort.

Through the above description of some embodiments, those skilled in the art can clearly understand that each embodiment can be implemented by adding a necessary general hardware platform, and of course, can also be implemented by a combination of hardware and software. With this understanding in mind, the above-described aspects and portions of the present technology which contribute substantially or in part to the prior art may be embodied in the form of a computer program product, which may be embodied on one or more computer-usable storage media having computer-usable program code embodied therein, including without limitation disk storage, CD-ROM, optical storage, and the like.

The present invention is described with reference to flowchart illustrations and/or block diagrams of methods, apparatus (systems), and computer program products according to embodiments of the invention. It will be understood that each flow and/or block of the flow diagrams and/or block diagrams, and combinations of flows and/or blocks in the flow diagrams and/or block diagrams, can be implemented by computer program instructions. These computer program instructions may be provided to a processor of a general purpose computer, special purpose computer, embedded processor, or other programmable communication device to produce a machine, such that the instructions, which execute via the processor of the computer or other programmable communication device, create means for implementing the functions specified in the flowchart flow or flows and/or block diagram block or blocks.

These computer program instructions may also be stored in a computer-readable memory that can direct a computer or other programmable communication device to function in a particular manner, such that the instructions stored in the computer-readable memory produce an article of manufacture including instruction means which implement the function specified in the flowchart flow or flows and/or block diagram block or blocks.

These computer program instructions may also be loaded onto a computer or other programmable communication device to cause a series of operational steps to be performed on the computer or other programmable apparatus to produce a computer implemented process such that the instructions which execute on the computer or other programmable apparatus provide steps for implementing the functions specified in the flowchart flow or flows and/or block diagram block or blocks.

In a typical configuration, a computing device includes a processor unit (CPU), input/output interfaces, a network interface, and memory.

The memory may include forms of volatile memory in a computer readable medium, Random Access Memory (RAM) and/or non-volatile memory, such as Read Only Memory (ROM) or flash memory (flash RAM). Memory is an example of a computer-readable medium.

Computer-readable media, including both non-transitory and non-transitory, removable and non-removable media, may implement information storage by any method or technology. The information may be computer readable instructions, data structures, modules of a program, or other data. Examples of computer storage media include, but are not limited to, phase change memory (PRAM), Static Random Access Memory (SRAM), Dynamic Random Access Memory (DRAM), other types of Random Access Memory (RAM), Read Only Memory (ROM), Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM), flash memory or other memory technology, compact disc read only memory (CD-ROM), Digital Versatile Discs (DVD) or other optical storage, magnetic cassettes, magnetic tape magnetic disk storage or other magnetic storage devices, or any other non-transmission medium that can be used to store information that can be accessed by a computing device. As defined herein, a computer readable medium does not include a transitory computer readable medium such as a modulated data signal and a carrier wave.

Finally, it should be noted that: the above examples are only intended to illustrate the technical solution of the present invention, but not to limit it; although the present invention has been described in detail with reference to the foregoing embodiments, it will be understood by those of ordinary skill in the art that: the technical solutions described in the foregoing embodiments may still be modified, or some technical features may be equivalently replaced; and such modifications or substitutions do not depart from the spirit and scope of the corresponding technical solutions of the embodiments of the present invention.

Claims

1. A resource providing method for an electronic device, wherein a plurality of applications are provided in the electronic device, the method comprising:

2. The method of claim 1, wherein the plurality of applications includes a first application and/or a collection item program for presenting an identified collection; and the step of loading at least one of the plurality of applications through the display for the electronic device further comprises:

3. The method of claim 1 or 2, wherein the interfaces of the plurality of applications are configured as a top level of a user interface for an application manager of the plurality of applications; the interface of the first application program or the collection program is configured on the first page of the top layer of the user interface of the application management program.

4. The method of claim 3, wherein interfaces of a plurality of applications are collocated on a top level of a user interface of the application management program, and the step of loading the first application or the collection item program through the display further comprises: preferentially loading the first application or the collection item at a top level of an application manager user interface relative to other applications in the plurality of applications; and

5. The method of claim 4, wherein the step of preferentially loading the first application or the collection item at a top level of an application manager user interface further comprises: after the electronic equipment is started, the first application program is preferentially loaded on the top layer of the application management program user interface; and

6. The method of claim 4, wherein the step of preferentially loading the first application or the collection item at a top level of an application manager user interface further comprises: after the electronic equipment is started, the collection item program is preferentially loaded on the top layer of the application management program user interface; and

7. The method of any of claims 2-6, wherein the application management program is an operating system of the electronic device or a program independent of the operating system; and if the application manager is independent of the operating system, the method further comprising: and responding to the starting operation of the application management program, and loading the application management program through the display.

8. The method according to any one of claims 1-7, further comprising the step of: the method includes providing a thumbnail form through the display and associating with the plurality of applications respectively, operable to execute in a one-to-one correspondence and output the plurality of applications through the display.

9. The method of claim 8, wherein the plurality of options are arranged in a row and column around the current interface, further comprising: and in response to the switching operation aiming at the option area, the plurality of options are presented in a moving mode.

10. The method of claim 9, wherein the order of the plurality of applications in the line is configured according to user settings for the order of the plurality of applications and/or user access frequency to the plurality of applications, respectively.